10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

PV Elite Help
Hexagon Documentation

Generated 10/08/2024

[Link] 1/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Welcome to PV Elite

Getting Started Command Reference Reports

What's New in PV Elite and File Tab Output Processor

CodeCalc
Home Tab Customize report header
Getting Started and
Workflows Tools Tab Customize company name

View Tab Customize the title page

Set Interface Language

PV Elite Quick Start 3D Tab Setting default fonts

Understanding the Interface Save reports to Microsoft

Word
Modeling Basics
Save reports to PDF
Keyboard and Mouse
Commands

Installation Customer Support

Before You Begin PV Elite

Installation

Installing PV Elite from the

Product Media

Customer Support
Anti-Piracy Statement
Copyright © 1993-2023, Hexagon AB and/or its subsidiaries and affiliates
Documentation updates available from Hexagon Documentation <[Link]
Published: 9/4/2024 at 7:22 PM

[Link] 2/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

What's New in PV Elite and CodeCalc

The following changes have been made to PV Elite and CodeCalc.

PV Elite and CodeCalc Version 25.0 Service Pack 2

Code Updates

Added support for API 579-1/ASME FFS-1, 2022

Part 4 - General Corrosion

Part 5 - Local Corrosion (Local thinning areas, grooves)

Part 6 - Pitting

An API 579 examples folder has also been added.

(3595387)

PV Elite and CodeCalc Version 25.0 Service Pack 1

Code Updates

Added support for PD 5500:2021 +A2: 2022 and the option to perform alternative
calculations for local loads on nozzles according to G.2.8. (A-3595385, A-3595386,
A-3667808, A-3569306)

Input Processor and Analysis

Added ASCE 7-2022 parameters to the Seismic Data tab. (3753936)

Documentation/Help

Modified and added graphics to clarify the properties on the Tailing Lug Data Tab of
the Basering Dialog.

Clarified the definitions for Lug Distances from Base and Compression Allowable
Increase Factor on the Load Cases Tab.

Added a description for Is this welded in metallic cladding or overlay material? on the
Lining/Cladding Dialog.

Modified the description of Evaluate Uniform Patterned Holes? to include blind

flanges. (3727730)

[Link] 3/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Clarified the definition for Nozzle does not have a "Nut Relief" on the FVC Catalog
dialog.

PV Elite and CodeCalc Version 25.0

Code Updates

Added support for the ASCE-7 2022 edition for wind and seismic design.

Input Processor and Analysis

Added support for design and analysis of rectangular vessels on the Elements Panel.
(RI-TX-29318)

Redesigned and reorganized the Configuration dialog to improve usability. (CR-TX-

41822)

Added the Consider nozzle loads for UG-45 option to the Configuration dialog. This
option allows UG-45 nozzle calculation to consider all UG-22 loadings of nozzle
necks, including pressure, bending, and shear loads. (CR-TX-40955)

Added the No earthquake deflection calculations option to the Configuration dialog.

This option turns off seismic deflection due to seismic loads. (CR-TX-41904)

You can now define your own Inside Crown Radius and Inside Knuckle Radius
values for torispherical heads. (CR-TX-40739)

Added the Out of Roundness Radii Measurements Dialog to perform out-of-

roundness calculations. (CR-TX-29306)

Added the ability to transfer nozzle loads to supports. (RI-TX-40551)

Updated the Visibility icon on the 3D Tab.

The software automatically calculates the cone length when you define Half Apex
Angle and displays the value in the status bar. (CR-TX-40799)

The software now determines the correct overall cone length for multiple connected
cones with varying angles for use in external pressure calculations. (CR-TX-40943)

The software now calculates the distance for nozzles on top or bottom cones in the
same way as hillside nozzles on heads. (CR-TX-40889)

Derate Flange MAWP if Externally Loaded? is now cleared and disabled for studding
outlet nozzles. This removes the UG-44(b) evaluation from the Nozzle Flange
MAWP report. (CR-TX-41089)

[Link] 4/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Added support for the PED & UG99b hydrotest option in Shop Pressure Test Type.
(CR-TX-41644)

Added support for the EN 13445 Section 17 simplified fatigue analysis. (RI-TX-
29324)

Added the calculation of the torispherical head to determine the crown radius and
knuckle radius dimensions for PD 5500. (CR-TX-41653)

For ASME Division 1, the allowed nozzle load evaluation according to EN13445-3
Section 16 is now available. (CR-TX-40378)

Added the vessel direction status to the status bar. (CR-TX-41823)

For local loads on nozzles, the software now determines the maximum permitted
compressive longitudinal stress according to EN 13445-3 16.14.8, which is used to
calculate the nozzle longitudinal stress according to EN 13445-3 16.4.8 and 16.5.8.
(3589499)

Added support for EN 13445-3 Section 19 nominal design stress in the creep range.
(RI-TX-29327)

Analysis no longer considers static liquid pressure for standard flanges. See the
knowledge base article How Static Liquid Pressure Influences Flange Analysis in
Pressure Vessels on Smart Support.

Output Processor and Reports

The software now uses the company name set from the installation and sets this
name in the [Link] file. (CR-TX-41824)

When you select Use Division 2 Stress Indices on the Local Stress Analysis tab of
the Nozzle Input/Analysis dialog, pressure Indices for Table 5-D.2 now display in
the Nozzle Calc reports. (CR-TX-39940)

For the End Plate Bending Stress at a given Thickness for the closure plate in the
pressure indices for Table 5-D.2, resultant stress equations and substitutions now
display in the Nozzle Calc reports. (CR-TX-14491)

Added a note in the input echo of the Conical Section report when the attached
element to the cone is not a cylinder (CR-TX-39812)

In the ASME TS Calc report, changed the logic for calculating Ls for gamma
according to UHX-13.5.5 Step 5. (CR-TX-40443)

[Link] 5/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

In the Conical Section report, the software now performs the discontinuity stress
calculation for cone to cone junction without creating an intermediate false cylinder
element. (CR-TX-40944)

Added a note in the Wind Load output report stating that an importance factor isn't
used for wind codes such as IBC 2015, IBC 2018, and ASCE7-16. (CR-TX-40783)

Added a note to the Warnings and Errors output report stating that in many cases,
a matching nominal diameter cannot be determined for the attached standard flange
when using the actual thickness basis for a nozzle. You must manually calculate the
weights of the nozzle, flange, and optional blind flange assembly and add the weight
total to Overriding Weight on the Nozzle Input/Analysis dialog. (CR-TX-40879)

The software now determines the stiffening ring weld MAEP if a ring fillet weld leg
size is specified for ASME Sec VIII Division 1 vessels. The MAEP of the stiffening
ring is considered when determining the MAEP of the entire vessel shown in the
External Pressure Calculations report. (CR-TX-1388)

Added the bearing stress calculation for loose flanges and stub end flanges in the
Flange Calculations report. (CR-TX-41682)

Updated the bolt load calculation output in the Basering Calculations report when
load case factors are used for basering design. Also updated the Vessel Design
Summary to reflect the maximum bolt, earthquake, and wind loads shown in the
Basering Calculations report. (CR-TX-41509)

Added multiple graphic images to the output, including ASME VIII-1 nozzle details.

Tools

Added the PED Classification Utility to perform calculations according to the

European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED). (RI-TX-41097)

The Diagnostics tab is obsolete and has been removed from the software.

A newly installed version of PV Elite automatically imports customized registry

settings from the previous versions, such as colors and metric/customary settings.
(CR-TX-40960)

Documentation/Help

Added PD5500 limitations to Inside Knuckle Radius. (CR-TX-39099)

Added a note clarifying WRC nozzle loads when the nozzle is on a head element.
(CR-TX-39478)

[Link] 6/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Removed the edition year from ASME Steel Stack. (CR-TX-39731)

Clarified UW-11(b) requirements for Longitudinal Seam Efficiency and

Circumferential Seam Efficiency. (CR-TX-40026)

Added a description for Method for Dimension Calc for torispherical heads. (CR-TX-
41048)

Added detailed help for the Baffle, Tie Rod, and Spacer Data Dialog. (CR-TX-37017)

Updated the instructions for Installing PV Elite in Silent Mode in the PV Elite Quick
Start Guide. (CR-TX-41836)

Added descriptions for EN 13445 Section 16 Analysis to the Local Stress Analysis
Tab (Nozzle Input/Analysis Dialog). (3581046)

Clarified the description for Use Full Bolt Load in Calc (Sa*Ab)?.

Fixed an error in the Wall Thickness table for ASME tubesheets.

Clarified the definition for Tapped Hole Area Loss.

[Link] 7/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

PV Elite Overview
PV Elite consists of nineteen modules for the design and analysis of pressure vessels and
heat exchangers, and assessment of fitness for service. The software provides the
mechanical engineer with easy-to-use, technically sound, well-documented reports. The
reports contain detailed calculations and supporting comments that speed and simplify the
task of vessel design, re-rating, or fitness for service. The popularity of PV Elite is a
reflection of Intergraph CADWorx and Analysis Solutions' expertise in programming and
engineering, and dedication to service and quality.

Calculations in PV Elite are based on the latest editions of national codes such as the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, or industry standards such as the Zick analysis
method for horizontal drums. PV Elite offers exceptional ease of use that results in
dramatic improvement in efficiency for both design and re-rating.

PV Elite features include:

A graphical user interface allowing you to add model data while seeing the vessel
elements as they are added.

[Link] 8/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Horizontal and vertical vessels of cylinders, conical sections, and body flanges, as
well as elliptical, torispherical, hemispherical, conical, and flat heads.

Saddle supports for horizontal vessels.

Leg and skirt supports at any location for vertical vessels.

Extensive on-line help.

Dead weight calculation from vessel details such as nozzles, lugs, rings, trays,
insulation, packing, and lining.

Wall thickness calculations for internal and external pressure according to the rules
of ASME Section VIII Divisions 1 and 2, PD 5500, and EN 13445.

Stiffener ring evaluation for external pressure.

Wind and seismic data using the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
standard, the Uniform Building Code (UBC), the National (Canadian) Building Code,
India standards, as well as British, Mexican, Australian, Japanese, and European
standards.

A user-defined unit system.

A complete examination of vessel structural loads, combining the effects of pressure,

dead weight, and live loads in the empty, operating, and hydrotest conditions.

Logic to automatically increase wall thickness to satisfy requirements for pressure

and structural loads, and introduce stiffener rings to address external pressure rules.

Structural load evaluation in terms of both tensile and compressive stress ratios to
the allowable limits.

Detailed analysis of nozzles, flanges, and base rings.

Material libraries for all three design standards.

Component libraries containing pipe diameter and wall thickness, ANSI B16.5 flange
pressure vs. temperature charts, and section properties for AISC, British, Indian,
Japanese, Korean, Australian and South African structural shapes.

Thorough and complete printed analysis reports, with definable headings on each
page. Comments and additions may be inserted at any point in the output.

[Link] 9/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

What Distinguishes PV Elite From our Competitors?

Our staff of experienced pressure vessel engineers are involved in day-to-day software
development, software support, and training. This approach has produced software that
closely fits today's requirements of the pressure vessel industry. Data entry is simple and
straightforward through annotated input fields. PV Elite provides the widest range of
modeling and analysis capabilities without becoming too complicated for simple system
analysis. You can tailor PV Elite through default settings and customized databases.
Comprehensive input graphics confirm model construction before analysis is made. The
software's interactive output processor presents results on the monitor for quick review or
sends complete reports to a file, printer or Word document. PV Elite is an up-to-date
package that not only uses standard analysis guidelines, but also provides the latest
recognized opinions for these analyses.

PV Elite is a field-proven engineering analysis program and is a widely recognized product

with a large customer base and an excellent support and development record.

What Can Be Designed?

PV Elite can design and analyze:

General Vessels

Enables users to perform wall thickness design and analysis of any vessel for realistic
combinations of pressure, deadweight, nozzle, wind and seismic loads in accordance with
ASME Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2 rules, PD 5500, and EN 13445. These
calculations address minimum wall thickness for pressure and allowable longitudinal stress
(both tension and compression) in the vessel wall for the expected structural load
combinations.

Complete Vertical Vessels

Enables users to define vessels supported by skirts, legs or lugs for complete dead load
and live load analysis. Stacked vessels with liquid are also addressed. Enables users to
specify Hydrotest conditions for either vertical or horizontal test positions. Vessel MAWP
includes hydrostatic head and ANSI B16.5 flange pressure limitations.

Complete Horizontal Vessels

Enables stress analysis of horizontal drums on saddle supports using the method of L. P.
Zick. Results include stresses at the saddles, the midpoint of the vessel and in the heads.

[Link] 10/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Getting Started and Workflows

This section focuses on getting started and the fundamental workflows PV Elite.

Input - Enter information required to define the vessel, its service requirements, and
its design guidelines.

Analysis - Translate the input data with design and analysis algorithms, apply the
rules of the appropriate code or standard, and generate results.

Output - Present a comprehensive final report of the results.

Understanding the Interface

The main PV Elite window has a quick access toolbar in the top left corner (indicated with
a red 1 in the picture below), which you can customize with the commands that you use
most or use the Undo and Redo functionality. Directly below the quick access toolbar is a
series of ribbons (2) and panels. On the Home tab, are data file commands (3 File Panel).
You can also add elements (4 Elements Panel) and details (5 Details Panel) to the current
element.

PV Elite breaks a vessel into an assemblage of individual elements—heads, shells, cones,

body flanges, and/or a skirt—and the components on these elements. A quick look at the
screen above shows the data (11) defining one element in the graphic view (13). Except

[Link] 11/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

for From Node and To Node, the data is common to all vessel wall thickness calculations.
The From Node and To Node inputs are necessary to assemble the individual elements
into the complete vessel and are automatically assigned by PV Elite. A complete vessel is
required if all dead and live loads are to be included in the design or analysis. However,
PV Elite will run wall thickness calculations on elements without constructing the entire
vessel.

The body of the screen contains either two or three areas - a table of the Element Data
(11), a table of the Element Additional Data (12) and the graphic area which contains an
image of the current status of the entire vessel or the current element (13). A status bar
displays (17) across the bottom of the screen and displays the element count, the position
and orientation of the current element, quick internal pressure calculations for the current
element.

When you click in the data areas (11 and 12), the Tab key moves the highlight (and
control) through its input cells. In most element data areas, press Enter to register the data
and move the focus to the next field. The exception is at combo boxes where clicking the
arrow displays the available choices. Throughout the software, F1 displays help for the
highlighted data item. After you are familiar with these screen controls, a combination of
mouse and keystroke commands will provide the most efficient navigation through the
software.

Some of the data input in PV Elite is controlled through a data grid (11 and 12). To enter
the data, click the mouse on the data text, such as Inside Diameter, and type the input
value. The cursor will not blink over the numeric/alphanumeric values until typing has
begun. After the data is entered, press Enter or Tab to proceed. The arrow keys can also
be used to navigate between the input fields.

The right mouse button is used to select vessel details on the vessel graphic.
Combo boxes have the down arrow button at the right end of the input cell.

When the 3D View (13) is active, a few more keys are available. No special highlight
appears, but the string PgUp/PgDn/Home/End displays at the bottom graphics area. This
indicates that these keys are now active. The image in the graphics area shows the current
state of the input for the vessel model with its elements and the details on these elements.
Switch between 2D and 3D views using the tabs at the bottom of the screen (16).

When the 2D View is active, one of the elements is highlighted. The Element Data and
Element Additional Data sections (11 and 12) define this element. By pressing Page Up
or Page Down, the highlight changes from one element to the next through the vessel.
Press the Home and End keys to move the highlight to the first and last elements in the
vessel. Also, you can click the left mouse button while selecting the element to highlight it.

[Link] 12/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

After an element is highlighted, detail information for that element may be accessed. With
the mouse, click the right mouse button for the existing detail image to display. To add
details to the current element, click the appropriate detail on the Details panel (5) and
enter the necessary data.

The News Feed contains product information, such as the latest product version. In
addition, you can refer to the page for upcoming events, product training opportunities, and
future webinars. You can use the quick icon links at the bottom to get to the product web
pages, the latest newsletter/blog postings, and Intergraph CAS social media sites.

Set Interface Language

The PV Elite interface is available in several languages. Use Options > Language to
select the language that you want to use.

La interfaz de PV Elite está disponible en varios idiomas. Utilice Opciones> Idioma para
seleccionar el idioma que desea utilizar.

L'interface PV Elite est disponible en plusieurs langues. Utilisez Options> Langue pour
sélectionner la langue que vous souhaitez utiliser.

L'interfaccia PV Elite è disponibile in diverse lingue. Utilizzare Opzioni> Lingua per

selezionare la lingua che si desidera utilizzare.

O interface de PV Elite está disponível em vários idiomas. Use Opções> Idioma para
selecionar o idioma que você deseja usar.

Input Processors
The Input items are used to define the other types of data that might be necessary for
an analysis: design constraints, report headings, general input data, and live (Wind Loads
(Wind Data Tab) and Seismic Loads (Seismic Data Tab)) load definitions. Each command
activates an input data tab in the bottom-left corner of the window. You can re-order the

[Link] 13/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

tabs as you like. The Design Constraints Tab data is important because this is where the
overall analysis for this vessel is defined and controlled.

The Component Analysis option allows you to enter data and analyze without building
a vessel. These are Intergraph's CodeCalc analysis modules, some of which are not
incorporated directly into PV Elite. CodeCalc, Intergraph's popular vessel component
analysis package is included in PV Elite.

Status Bar
The status bar across the bottom of the window displays information about your vessel in
real time. Values that display in red need attention. You can show or hide the status bar
using the Toggle Status Bar option on the View tab.

Wgt Cor

Displays the corroded weight.

Vol Cor

Displays the corroded volume.

t/L

[Link] 14/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Displays the thickness to length ratio.

OutDepth

Displays the head depth for a torispherical head.

El#

Displays the current element location relative to the start of the vessel. For example, a
value of 4 of 11 means the active element is the fourth element from the start of the vessel
and that there are eleven elements in total that define the vessel.

Fr

Displays the starting and ending distances from the Datum point for the current element.

Left / Right / Up / Down

Displays the element orientation.

Tr

Displays the computed thickness for the internal pressure.

Tmin, as

Displays the retirement limit minimum thickness at the seam.

Tmin, afs

Displays the retirement limit minimum thickness away from the seam.

Mawp

Displays the maximum allowable working pressure of the vessel and flange.

MAPnc

Displays the maximum allowable pressure in a new and cold condition.

Trext

Displays the computed thickness for the external pressure.

EMawp

Displays the external maximum allowable working pressure.

[Link] 15/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Slen

Displays the maximum length between ring stiffeners. When >>> displays, no reinforcing
ring is required for this element for external pressure purposes. For more information, see
Stiffening Ring.

Tooltip
When you press the CTRL key and hover your mouse over an element or detail on the 3D
View tab, PV Elite displays a tooltip that contains a table with data about the element or
detail. The tooltip table contains information such as, the element/detail type, material
name, thickness, diameter, and so forth.

[Link] 16/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

After analyzing a file, when you display the tooltip, the Tmin row displays the calculated
minimum thickness of the element/detail as well as the element which governs the MAWP.

Adding Details
With the elements defined, enough information exists to run through the pressure
calculations but the total vessel weight is not yet set. Much of this information is specified
as element details. Nozzles, insulation, operating fluid, platforms and the like are all
entered as details on the various elements. PV Elite calculates the weight of each of these

[Link] 17/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

items and account for them in the various analyses. Details such as saddles, lugs and legs
are also used to locate support points on the vessel—important data for load calculations.

Details can only be specified on the current element. To enter the first detail, highlight
(make current) the element that will hold the detail, and click the appropriate DETAIL
command. Allowing the cursor to rest on the toolbar button displays a tool tip definition of
the button. Select the detail and enter the data in the screen that follows. For more
information, see Details Panel.

Use the Help button on the detail screen or press [F1] to learn more about the requested
data. Define all details necessary to develop the proper total vessel load.

Specifying Global Data - Loads and Design Constraints

Although default values allow the analysis to proceed, other data should be set before the
analysis continues. These data are the required live loads and design constraints, and the
optional vessel identification and report headings. These data are accessed and entered
through the Input/Output Panel on the Home tab. The Heading Tab allows the specification
of three lines of data, which appears at the top of each page in the printed output. The
heading data also includes title page entry, which appears at the beginning of the input
echo report.

Select Input > Design Constraints and then select the Design Constraints Tab to display
the design data.

[Link] 18/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Design Data includes vessel identification along with items that affect the design and
analysis of the vessel; items such as type of hydrostatic testing and degree of radiographic
examination appear here. It is important to note that this is where the design code is set -
Division 1, Division 2, PD 5500 or EN 13445.

The Design Modification area holds four inputs that control the redesign of the vessel
should the user-entered wall thickness be insufficient for the analyzed loads. If a box is
checked, the software increase the element's wall thickness so that it meets or exceeds
the requirements for that load category. There are four boxes for three load types: one box
for internal pressure, two boxes for external pressure (either increase the wall thickness or
locate stiffener rings along the vessel to satisfy the buckling requirements), and one box
for the variety of structural loads that develop longitudinal stresses in the vessel wall. The

[Link] 19/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

software provides the option of rounding up a required thickness to a nominal value (such
as the next 1/16 inch or 1 mm) in the Configuration dialog box.

The Load Cases Tab displays nineteen default structural load cases for the analysis.
These cases cover the extent of structural loads on the vessel wall. Each case contains a
pressure component (axial) 1, a weight component (both axial and bending), and a live
load component (bending). The axial stresses are combined with the bending stresses to
produce a total stress in the vessel wall. Both tensile and compressive stresses are
compared to their allowable limits. Refer to the table below for a definition of terms used in
the Load Case input.

These pressure calculations should not be confused with those used for the wall
thickness requirements defined in ASME Section VIII and PD 5500. Here, internal and
hydrostatic pressures are used to calculate a longitudinal, tensile stress in the vessel wall
and the external pressure a similar compressive stress in the wall.

Pressure Weight Live Load

NP - No Pressure EW - Empty Weight WI - Wind

IP - Internal Pressure OW - Operating Weight EQ - Earthquake

EP - External Pressure HW - Hydrostatic HI - Wind at Hydrostatic Weight

Weight conditions

HP - Hydrostatic Pressure CW - Empty Weight No HE - Earthquake at Hydrostatic

CA Weight conditions

EE - Bending Stress due to

Earthquake Moment (Empty)

VF - Vortex Shedding Filled

VO - Vortex Shedding Operating

[Link] 20/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

VE - Vortex Shedding Empty

WE - Wind Bending Empty New

and Cold

WF - Wind Bend Filled New and

Cold

CW - Axial Weight Stress New

and Cold

FS - Axial Stress, Seismic

PW - Axial Stress Wind

Nozzle Design Options are used to set the overall pressure requirements for the nozzles
on this vessel and also to include the maximum allowable pressure - new and cold (MAP
nc) case in the nozzle checks. The Installation | Misc. Options option displays a screen
to specify where certain vessel details will be added - either at the fabrication shop or in
the field. This data is used to properly set the detail weights for the empty and operating
conditions.

Wind and earthquake information is entered on the Wind Loads or Seismic Loads. PV Elite
generates live loads based on the criteria established by one of many standards, including
the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE), the Uniform Building Code (UBC), the
(Canadian) National Building Code (NBC), and the Indian National Standard. Wind loads
can also be specified directly as a wind pressure profile. PV Elite references these codes
for live loads only. ASME Section VIII or PD 5500 rules apply for all other calculations. The
screen below shows the data required for the default codes. PV Elite uses these criteria to
set the magnitude of the live load and bending moment on each element of the vessel.

After the element, detail, and global data is entered and checked, the model is ready for
error processing and analysis.

[Link] 21/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Error Checking
The Input Processor makes many data consistency checks during the input session. For
example, the processor creates an error message if you try to specify a nozzle 20 feet
from the bottom of a 10-foot shell element. However, not all data can be confirmed on
input so a general error processor is run prior to the analysis. This error processor can be
run as a stand-alone from the Analyze panel, Error Check Only .

In addition to the notes that are presented on the screen during error checking, these error
messages appear in the output report and are accessible through the output review
processor.

As with all engineering and designing, the vessel analyst must use common
sense to insure the model is basically correct. This is a great advantage of the 3D graphics
as it reveals obvious errors.

Modeling Basics
PV Elite breaks a vessel into an assemblage of individual elements—heads, shells, cones,
body flanges, and/or a skirt—and the components on these elements. Vessels are defined
one element to the next - from bottom to top for vertical vessels and from left to right for
horizontal vessels.

Before starting PV Elite, most users collect the necessary data for the vessel design or
analysis. Collecting data to define these elements before starting the program is not
required but it will make the most efficient use of the designer's time. Typical input items
include actual or proposed values for vessel material, inside diameter, operating
temperatures and pressures, wind and seismic site data, nozzle and ring location to name
a few. If necessary, the input processor can be terminated at any time and restarted later if
any missing data need be collected. With the program's graphic display of the vessel input,
it is easy to recall the current state of an unfinished model or identify where data is missing
or incomplete.

1. Start PV Elite by clicking the icon on the desktop or selecting the item from Start >
Intergraph CAS > PV Elite.

PV Elite starts with a Vessel Input screen for the job called "Untitled."

[Link] 22/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Defining the Basic Vessel

You should build vertical vessels from bottom to top and horizontal vessels from left to
right. It is not necessary to build an entire vessel if only the thickness for pressure is
needed. The Element Data (the grid on the left side of the interface) must be specified
before the first element can be placed on the screen.

1. Start with the Inside Diameter, as both the Node Numbers and the Element Type
are set by using the Element toolbar.

2. After the Element Data is entered, elements are quickly assembled one after another
by clicking the Element toolbar and making any changes to the Element Data.

The complete vessel is created from the following elements (in their toolbar order):

Shell

Elliptical Head

Torispherical Head

Spherical Head

Cone

Welded Flat Head

[Link] 23/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

ANSI/Bolted Flange

Skirt

If the vessel begins with a skirt element, it is a vertical vessel. Vertical vessels on legs and
horizontal vessels start with a head element.

If that first head element is improperly oriented for the vessel in mind (horizontal
or vertical), click Flip Element Orientation on the Home Tab tab, Utility Panel panel to
correct the orientation. Later, if heads, body flanges, or cone elements show incorrect
orientation, click Flip Element Orientation to fix the orientation.

After the second element is added, use the Flip Model Orientation on the Tools Tab to
flip the entire model flip between horizontal and vertical.

From Nodes and To Nodes values are automatically assigned by the software; they start
with node 10 and are incremented by 10 throughout the model. The element data set at
the beginning of the session carries forward from one element to the next. Any data
changes on the last element carry forward onto any new elements that are added. The
element data displayed belongs to the highlighted element in the vessel image.

1. Use the mouse to change the highlighted and displayed element by clicking on the
element of interest.

Data may be updated one element at a time but there are more efficient ways to
change an item through several elements; for example, if the circumferential weld
joint efficiency for the skirt (from node 10 to 20) is set at 0.7. If this value was not
changed to 1.0 on the bottom head as it was created, this (incorrect) value is carried
from one element to the next in the Build Mode to the top of the vessel element (such
as, From Node 50 and To Node 60). In this situation, it is easiest to change the data
on the bottom head element (20 to 30), and then click Share to "share" this item
through the elements in the list with From Node 30 through From Node 50. Certain
data is automatically "shared". Inside diameter, for example is automatically changed
for all elements (stopping at cones) attached to the element where the change
occurs. Some changes to the element data do not immediately appear on the vessel
image.

2. To refresh the image, press F5.

Creating a Heat Exchanger

Heat exchangers are very common vessels, but they can also be fairly complicated. The
following procedure illustrates how to create a heat exchanger in PV Elite.

[Link] 24/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Create the left side of the heat exchanger

To create the left side of your heat exchanger, follow these steps.

1. Launch PV Elite.

The General Input screen displays.

2. Select an ellipsoidal head by clicking Ellipse .

3. Click Flip Elements Orientation on the Home Tab to build the heat exchanger in
the horizontal orientation.

4. Enter the information for the head exactly as shown below. Check your input before
you move on. Remember to click on the text in the left column and then start typing.
The cursor automatically moves to the right column for you to begin typing. Pressing
[F1] displays the corresponding help information for that input.

The screen should then look exactly like this when you are finished with your input.

[Link] 25/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

5. When you are finished typing all the data, press Enter twice.

6. Click Cylinder to add a cylinder to the head.

The screen should then look exactly like this when you are finished with your input.

[Link] 26/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

7. Click ANSI/Bolted Flange to add a body flange to the right hand end of the
channel shell.

8. After adding the flange, enter all the values exactly as shown below.

[Link] 27/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

9. Under Additional Element Data, select Perform Flange Calculation to open the
Flange Input Dialog Box.

10. You must correctly dimension the flange. To do this, change the flange to a 24 inch
Class 150 flange, which will fit into the heat exchanger.

At the bottom of the Flange Input Dialog Box, select Is this a Standard Flange (No
calculation performed)?.

11. Select 150 as the Class.

12. Select 24 for the Nominal Size.

13. Click Obtain Dimensions!

The Flange screen is now set up for the 24 inch Class 150 dimensions and bolting.

14. Verify your screen looks like the following figure:

[Link] 28/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

15. Click OK.

16. Click Save to save your work. Use My First Model or something similar for the
file name.

17. Your model should look similar to this.

Enter tubesheet data

Up to this point, you have been using the normal PV Elite vessel building techniques for
non-heat exchanger pressure vessels. You are now ready to start modeling the heat
exchanger main elements, the tubesheets, tubes, and main shell that enclose the tube
bundle.

1. Click Tubesheet .

The Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input dialog displays.

You will now construct an ASME exchanger, which requires a large amount of input
data.

2. Select Fixed for Exchanger Type:

[Link] 29/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

3. Select the Tubesheet Properties tab.

4. For Tubesheet Type, select b Fixed Tubesheet, shell integral, extended as

flange.

5. Select Tubesheet Extended as Flange?

6. Select the Tube Data tab and enter the information as shown below.

7. Select the Load Cases tab and enter the pressures and temperatures for the heat
exchanger to complete the tube sheet and tubes data. You can enter multiple
combinations of pressures and temperatures for heat exchangers.

[Link] 30/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

8. Click OK.

9. Near the bottom-center of the window, select the 3D View tab.

Look at the 3D model on your screen, and it should resemble this figure.

There are only two rows of tubes displayed. Because of the intensive nature of 3D
graphics it is impractical to show hundreds of tubes.

Create the main shell

Notice that there is no cylindrical shell between the two tubesheets. PV Elite cannot
perform tubesheet analysis unless the shell is present because the thermal load from the
shell is needed to complete this analysis. You must add the shell between the tubesheets.

[Link] 31/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Before you do this, recall that that the tubes are 60 inches long in the Heat Exchanger
dialog. This is the distance between the tubesheets. So for a good match, the outer shell
must also be 60 inches long.

1. Click Cylindrical to add a cylindrical shell to your model. This shell is 60 inches or
5 feet long as discussed above. Verify your entries match those below:

2. Click Tubesheet again and go to the Tubesheet Type and Design Code tab.

3. Select the Main Shell check box, and then click OK.

Create the right side of the heat exchanger

All that remains is to add the body flange to the right end of the heat exchanger, then
another channel shell, and the final channel head.

[Link] 32/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1. Click ANSI/Bolted Flange to add a body flange to the right hand end of the main
shell.

2. After adding the flange, enter all the values exactly as shown below.

3. Under Additional Element Data, select Perform Flange Calculation to open the
Flange Input Dialog Box.

4. You must correctly dimension the flange to fit the heat exchanger.

At the bottom of the Flange Input Dialog Box, select Is this a Standard Flange (No
calculation performed)?.

5. Select 150 as the Class.

6. Select 24 for the Nominal Size.

7. Click Obtain Dimensions!

The Flange screen is now set up for the 24 inch Class 150 dimensions and bolting.

8. Verify your screen looks like the following figure:

[Link] 33/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

9. Click OK.

10. Click Flip Element Orientation so the flange is facing the correct direction.

11. Click Cylinder to add a cylinder to the flange.

The screen should then look exactly like this when you are finished with your input.

12. Select an ellipsoidal head by clicking Ellipse .

13. Type Right Head for the Element Description.

[Link] 34/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

14. Your model should look like this.

Enter additional details

1. For the remaining steps, add other details to the elements using the commands on
the Detail toolbar. You can add details such as saddle supports, nozzles, and loads.

Analysis
PV Elite can be used to confirm a safe design for a proposed or existing vessel. The
program also provides direct design capabilities with which the wall thickness of individual
elements is increased to meet the code requirements for internal and external pressure
and longitudinal stress from a variety of dead and live loads. Whether or not the program
changes wall thickness during the analysis is controlled through a Design/Analysis
Constraint specification under Design Modification. For more information see Design
Constraints Tab.

A simple analysis run (no design) occurs when the flags under Design Modification are
all unchecked. If any of these boxes are checked, the program automatically increases the
wall thickness until the constraint is satisfied. Your input in the resulting output report is
automatically updated to reflect any changes made during the analysis. In addition to wall
thickness, a fourth flag can be set - Select Stiffener Rings for External Pressure. In this

[Link] 35/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

case, rather than increasing the wall thickness, stiffener rings are located along the vessel
to satisfy the external pressure requirements. As with the wall thickness changes, these
stiffener rings are added to the model input for this analysis.

PV Elite analyzes each element to determine the required wall thickness for internal and
external pressure based on the Section VIII Division 1 rules, Division 2, PD 5500 or EN
13445 rules. The program then calculates the longitudinal stresses in the wall due to four
categories of vessel loads: pressure, deadweight, deadweight moments from vessel
attachments or applied loads, and moments due to the live loads - wind and earthquake.
These four categories are set for three different load conditions: empty, operating, and
hydrotest. The sensible combination of these various categories and conditions produce
the default set of 19 load cases that are found in the Design/Analysis Constraints
processor. For each load case, PV Elite will calculate the maximum longitudinal stress
around the circumference of the elements and compare these values to the allowable
stress for the material, both tensile and compressive. If stresses in the vessel wall exceed
the design limits, PV Elite proceeds according to the design modification settings in the
input.

After the software finishes a pass through the analysis, a check is made for any program
design modifications. If PV Elite changed any data, then the program automatically re-runs
the complete analysis to review the impact of the changes.

There are several additional analysis controls that should be reviewed here. These
controls, however, are more general in nature and are not defined for the individual job.
Instead, these seven computational control directives are set for all jobs executed in the
Data sub-directory. These controls are viewed and modified on the Tools tab, Set
Configuration Parameters , for more information, see Configuration.

Performing the Analysis

In the Analyze panel on the Home tab, are two options: Error Check Only and
Analyze . Use the Error Check Only option immediately after any questionable data is
entered. Analyze automatically performs an error check before the analysis starts.
Comments from an error check can be examined using Review Reports .

Errors must be corrected before the analysis can proceed.

As the analysis proceeds, PV Elite displays the step or component being analyzed. If any
Design Modification (Design Constraints Tab) were set, PV Elite resets the thickness to the
necessary value and exports these increased thicknesses to all output reports and in all
other calculations. For example, if the user-entered wall thickness of 1/2 inch is insufficient
for the load and the design flag is enabled, the program will calculate the required

[Link] 36/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

thickness (for example, 5/8 inch) and replace the user-entered input value (1/2) in the
output report with the calculated required thickness (here, 5/8). The program does not
change the original model data. PV Elite checks the element wall thicknesses for the
various pressure cases (internal, external, and hydrostatic) and then assemble the axial
and bending loads to construct each load case defined in the Global Design data. PV Elite
also calculates the longitudinal stress on both sides of the vessel (for example, both
windward and leeward for loads with wind) and compare the calculated stresses with the
allowable stresses, both tensile and compressive. PV Elite displays the windward or
leeward side stress, which is closest by ratio to the allowable limit, again either tension or
compression.

After the analysis is complete, the Review Reports processor displays the results of the
analysis on the screen.

Design and Analysis of Vessel Details

At this point in the analysis the vessel details have been defined only so that their weights
could be included in vessel calculations. With the structural analysis of the vessel complete
and the wall thickness set, vessel details can be evaluated.

To access the input processor for these vessel details, click Component Analysis on
the Home tab. This activates CodeCalc. The component selection is available on the
Home tab.

[Link] 37/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

WRC 107/537 Input Screen

WRC 107/537 Results

Analyzing Individual Vessel Components Details

PV Elite provides for the analysis of a variety of vessel components that are not included
in the overall vessel analysis: Appendix Y Flanges, Floating Heads, Lifting Lug, Pipe &
Pad, WRC 107/537 and 297, Thin Joints, Thick Joints, ASME Tubesheets, TEMA
Tubesheets, Halfpipe Jackets, Large Openings, and Rectangular Vessels.

[Link] 38/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

To access the input processor for these vessel details, click Component Analysis on
the Home tab. This activates CodeCalc. The component selection is available on the
Home tab.

Output Review and Report Generation

Output from PV Elite analysis is stored in a binary data file that has the same name as the
input file but with a ".T80" extension. Use Review Reports to review every report
contained in the output from input echo through stress reports.

Select the report to view from the Report List. Reports can be reviewed on the screen,
sent to a printer, or sent to a file for review later.

Each analysis module creates its own report in the output data file. Most of the reports take
the form of tables with the rows related to the elements and the columns holding the
values such as thickness, MAWP, and stress.

[Link] 39/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

These are some reports available from PV Elite. Depending on the type, position,
geometry and configuration settings the list of reports will vary.

Step 0 Vessel Element Error Checking

Cover Cover Sheet

Title Title Page

Step 1 Vessel Input Echo

Step 2 XY Coordinate Calculations

Step 3 Internal Pressure Calculations

Step 4 External Pressure Calculations

Step 5 Weight of Elements & Details

Step 6 ANSI Flange MAWP

Step 7 Natural Frequency Calculations

Step 8 Forces & Moments Applied to Vessel

Step 9 Wind Load Calculation

Step 10 Earthquake Load Calculation

Step 11 Wind and Earthquake Shear, Bending

[Link] 40/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Step 12 Wind Deflection

Step 13 Longitudinal Stress Constants

Step 14 Longitudinal Allowable Stresses

Step 15 Longitudinal Stresses Due to Load

Components

Step 16 Stress Due to Combined Loads

Step 17 Basering Calculations

Step 18 Center of Gravity Calculation

Cone 1-N Conical Sections

Nozl 1-N Nozzle Calculations

Step 20 Nozzle Schedule

Step 21 Nozzle Summary

Step 22 Vessel Design Summary

Recording the Model - Plotting the Vessel Image

At any point during the input process, a standard PCX file with the vessel image is
available. This file can then be incorporated into reports or printed directly (on all printers)
through most Microsoft Windows packages with graphics capabilities (such as Microsoft
Word or Paintbrush). The 3D graphic can also be plotted. Click on the background of the
3D View tab before pressing the print button.

[Link] 41/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The vessel graphic can also be sent directly to the printer using File > Preview/Print .

[Link] 42/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Using the PV Elite Comparison Utility

When a hot fix or service pack is released for PV Elite, you may wish to reanalyze your
files in the newer version of the software and compare the results with your original files.
The PV Elite Comparison Utility allows you to easily perform this task. This utility provides
an easy-to-read interface for visual comparisons, as well as the capability to export
comparison data to a Microsoft Excel file for reference or record keeping.

You must have Microsoft Excel installed to use the PV Elite Comparison Utility.

[Link] 43/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Create file folders

Before running the PV Elite Comparison Utility, you must create separate folders for your
original (benchmark) files and your reanalyzed (test) files.

1. Create two easily identifiable folders for your benchmark files and your test files in
Microsoft Windows Explorer.

2. Copy the PV Elite files you wish to compare into both the benchmark folder and the
test folder.

Set PVE_TESTING variable to TRUE

The PV Elite Comparison Utility uses PV Elite results (.pvr) files to perform the
comparison. However, you must create and set the PVE_TESTING environment variable
to TRUE for the software to leave the .pvr files in the directory after you analyze a PV Elite
job.

To set the environment variable:

1. In File Explorer, right-click on the computer node. Select Properties.

2. Select Advanced System Settings.

The System Properties dialog box opens.

3. On the Advanced tab, select Environment Variables.

4. Select New to create a new environment variable.

The New/Edit User Variable dialog box opens.

5. Type the Variable name and Variable value as shown below, and click OK.

6. Click OK in the Environment Variables dialog box.

7. Click OK in the System Properties dialog box.

[Link] 44/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Decompress benchmark files

Beginning in PV Elite 2015, the software compresses the various input, intermediate, and
output files into one .pv file. The PV Comparison Utility compares differences between PV
Elite models, by comparing the values of the intermediate .pvr files.

Use the PV Elite File Extraction Utility to decompress the .pv files in the benchmark files
folder and display the .pvr file in the folder.

1. Open the PV Elite File Extraction Utility.

You can open the utility from the PV Elite Program folder in Windows
Explorer, or from the Tools tab in the PV Elite application.

2. On the Home tab, click Browse > Browse for Folder.

The Browse for Folder dialog box displays.

3. Select the file folder containing the file(s) you want to extract and click OK.

4. In the File Type field, select the file type of the file(s) you want to extract.

5. In the Compressed Files pane, select the file(s) to extract.

Press and hold the CTRL key and click to select multiple files.

6. Click Extract to extract from a single file. Click Extract All to extract from multiple
files.

The extracted file(s) display in the Extracted Files pane.

Analyze models to create .pvr files

When a file is analyzed in PV Elite, a .pvr file is created, but it disappears if the file
compression is turned on. Before analyzing your test files in PV Elite, disable the file
compression, so the .pvr files remain in the folder after analysis. Perform an analysis in the
latest version of PV Elite for all the files in the test folder.

Perform these steps in the original version of PV Elite for any model in the
benchmark folder that does not have a .pvr file.

1. In PV Elite, click Tools > Set Configuration Parameters to open the Configuration
dialog box.

2. Select the Default Value Settings tab.

[Link] 45/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

3. Select the Do Not Compress the Input Files option to stop PV Elite from
compressing the input, intermediate and output files.

4. Drag and drop each test file from your test folder into the latest version of PV Elite.

5. Click the Analyze option to analyze the file.

PV Elite saves the results file (.pvr) file for the job you analyzed in the directory. You
can now compare this job with the comparable benchmark file.

6. Close the Output Processor.

7. Repeat these steps for each file in the folder.

8. When all the files have been analyzed, close the PV Elite application.

Perform file comparison

1. Locate and run the PV Elite Comparison Utility ([Link]) in the PV Elite
program directory.

2. Click Browse Bench Folder to browse to and specify the folder in which your
benchmark files are located.

Click Get Latest if you want the software to default to the last Bench folder you
compared.

3. Click Browse Test Folder to browse to and specify the folder in which your test files
are located.

Click Get Latest if you want the software to default to the last Test folder you
compared.

4. To perform a comparison of individual files in the PV Elite Binary Results Files list
in the left pane, click each individual file to move the file to the Results Pane on the
right. To compare all files in the Bench and Test folders, click Compare Files at the
bottom of the window.

The results of this comparison appear in the Results Pane to the right. Test files with
any difference to the benchmark files appear in red.

Review file comparison

Export the file comparison to Microsoft Excel to review the results.

[Link] 46/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1. Double-click on the failed comparison result, and the software opens an Excel file
with details about the differences between the two files compared.

2. To see results of all comparisons in more detail, click Excel Export .

The GlobalDiff tab shows all of the comparison results, including the paths to the two
folders that were compared, which files were different and which were identical, and the
number of differences between the files. The bottom of this tab shows all of the global
details of the comparison, such as the number of files tested, passed, and missing as well
as the time it took the comparison to run.

Each tab that follows the GlobalDiff tab corresponds to the file comparisons that did not
pass, which means the comparison between the bench and test files showed notable
differences. The tab name correlates to the file name. Refer to each file comparison tab to
see details about the comparison, such as the date and time the comparison was done,
the values in compared files that were different, and the percentages of difference between
the compared files.

The Percent Difference column denotes the amount of difference between the test and
the benchmark file. The following colors denote percentages of difference:

Light Pink - Less than 1 percent difference between the files

Dark Pink - 1 percent up to a 3 percent difference between the files

Red - 3 percent or greater difference between the files

[Link] 47/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

DXF File Generation Option

PV Elite can write out Data Interchange Files (3 all together) using File > Import/Export >
Export Vessel Geometry to R12 DXF File. This DXF file is a text file that contains
commands for generating a 2D CAD drawing of the vessel that is on a one to one scale.
The border and text are scaled by the diameter conversion constant and the scale factor
generated by the program or defined by you. Many popular drawing programs such as
AutoCad® and MicroStation® can read and process these files. The DXF files produced by
PV Elite are release 12 compatible. Any version of AutoCad including release 12 and after
should be able to read the DXF file.

Three files are produced: the vessel drawing, the nozzle schedule, and the Bill of Material.
The files are written in the folder where the input file for the vessel file is located. These
files are written at the end of the program's calculation execution. Nearly every individual
has his/her own way of drafting. A conscious effort was made not to be too specific. This
approach allows the drafter to take the vessel drawing file and edit it as necessary.

Setting Up the Required Parameters

Home tab: Auxiliary > Export to DXF File

Instructs PV Elite to generate DXF files during an analysis run. Optionally, you can use
File > Import/Export > Export Vessel Geometry to R12 DXF File to set this option. If the
scale factor is not set, the DXF Options dialog appears prompting for the scale factor and
any other necessary options. These options should be entered after the vessel has been
completely modeled because the scaling factor is based on the overall height and length of
the vessel. It is best to check the scaling factor at the conclusion of the data input and
before the model is analyzed.

Create default border

Select to put a border around the drawing. The border style differs based on the border
size. You can create your own border styles. The borders are located in the PV
Elite\System folder. They are named ANSI_A.txt and so forth. These text files are
essentially the core of ACAD Release 12 DXF files. See the user border creation section
for more information.

Create nozzle schedule

Select to create a Nozzle Schedule. The nozzle schedule contains information pertaining
to the size and thickness of nozzles, their mark number and the necessity of reinforcing.

Create bill of material

[Link] 48/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Select to generate a Bill of Material for the major components of the vessel, such as shells,
heads, and conical sections.

Do not show ID lines

Normally the DXF file will contain ID as well as OD lines for the major shell sections. If you
do not want to see the ID lines, then check this box.

Show dimensions

Select if you want tail dimensions for the major shell courses. The element diameters and
thicknesses are shown in the BOM.

Insert design data and general notes

Select if you want the software to include design data and general notes in the DXF file.

Drawing size

Select A, B, C or D. Each size has a different style.

Scale factor

Enter the scale factor. We recommend letting the program select this value by clicking
Compute and Insert Scale Factor. We then recommend rounding up to the nearest
typical scale factor.

User Border Creation

In order to do the following, you must use Windows Explorer, AutoCad, and Notepad.

1. Start AutoCAD and open your border. The border should be ANSI standard
dimensions (8½ by 11, and so forth) scaled for the non-printable area of the paper.

2. After the border drawing is open, save it as a release 12 DXF file.

3. After the file has been saved it will be necessary to edit it with a text editor such as
Notepad. Because the main drawing will have a DXF header, it will be necessary to
delete the one in the border drawing. The DXF header ends on about line 960 with
the word Entities. Delete through this line.

4. Next delete the last four lines in the file. This is the end of file marker.

5. Save the file with a txt extension.

[Link] 49/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

6. Next rename the file in the PV Elite\System folder that you will be replacing. We
suggest putting a new extension on it.

7. Save/Copy your border in the PV Elite\System folder and then rename it replacing
our default border. You should now have new ANSI_?.txt file in the PV Elite\System
subdirectory.

Review our border drawing text files before you start. Note that the border drawings must
not contain any block attributes. These are not supported in our current implementation.

DXF File Generated by PV Elite During Runtime

Home tab: Analyze > Review the DXF File

Opens the DXF file using drawing software installed on your computer that supports DXF
files. If this command is available, the DXF file for this job was created during the last run.
Clicking this command submits the file to Windows, which in turn launches your drawing
software. If the input is altered, the analysis must be run in order to generate a new DXF
file.

Use Export to DXF File to define the DXF settings to use.

[Link] 50/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

File Tab
Controls general operations of PV Elite files.

Open

Opens an existing .pvdb, .pvi, or .pv file.

Recent

Displays recently-opened files and folder. Select a file to open.

Save

Saves the open file.

Save As

Saves the open file with a new name.

Import/Export

Exports the open .pvdb or .pv file to a .pcx, .dxf, or .stp file.

Print Setup

Selects a printer and printer options.

Preview/Print

Prints the graphics in the open file.

Help

Displays help, getting started, contact information, and version number for PV Elite.

System Folder

Opens the folder where the PV Elite files are stored.

Backup Folder

Opens the folder where the model backups are saved. The software saves a backup of
your PV Elite files upon analysis.

Examples Folder

[Link] 51/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Opens the folder containing the delivered model examples.

Exit

Closes the software.

Open
File tab: Open

Activates the Open dialog box from which you can open a previously saved PV Elite file for
editing. You can also open one of the many example files delivered with PV Elite.

Open is also available on the quick access toolbar in the top-left corner of the PV Elite
window.

Save
File tab: Save

Saves the PV Elite file that you have open into the .pvdb format. When you save a file for
the first time, the Save As dialog box appears so that you can name the file and select a
folder location. Save is also available on the quick access toolbar in the top-left corner of
the PV Elite window.

Save As
File tab: Save As

Saves the open file with a different name or to a different folder location. The software
automatically saves files into .pvdb format.

Import/Export
File tab: Import/Export

Select one of the following:

Import a HTRI Model - This command is not available at this time.

Import a Project Template - Imports a PV Elite project template into the current file.

Export Vessel Picture to PCX File - Sends the vessel graphics to a .pcx file. This
file can be printed at a later date or added to other documents. The .pcx file is

[Link] 52/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

created in the same folder and with the same name as the .pvdb or .pv file.

Export Screen to PCX File - Sends a snapshot of the entire screen to a .pcx file.
The .pcx file is created in the same folder and with the same name as the .pvdb or
.pv file.

Export Vessel Geometry to R12 DXF File - Exports the vessel to a .dxf file. For
more information, see Setting Up the Required Parameters.

Export to STEP File - Exports the vessel to a .stp file. The .stp file is created in the
same folder and with the same name as the .pvdb or .pv file.

Print Setup
File tab: Print Setup

Selects a printer and defines printer options in the Print Setup dialog box.

Preview/Print
File tab: Preview/Print

Prints the model to a printer or to a PDF file. Options are available for print range, number
of copies, and other printing characteristics.

You must have access to a printer, either locally or over your network, before you
can use this command.

Exit
File tab: Exit

Closes the open file and exits the software. If you have changed data since the file was
last saved, or if you have not saved a new file, the Save As dialog box appears and the
software prompts you to save your changes.

[Link] 53/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Home Tab
The Home tab contains the most common commands that you use in PV Elite.

File Panel

Provides file management commands, such as Open, Save, and New.

Elements Panel

Provides commands for elements used to create a vessel, such as cylinders, spheres, and
cones.

Details Panel

Provides commands to add details to a vessel element, such as stiffeners, nozzles, forces,
moments, lining, half-pipe jackets, and tubesheets.

Input/Output Panel

Provides commands to add load and restraint information.

Utility Panel

Provides miscellaneous element commands, for functions such as insert, delete, update,
share, and flip.

Auxiliary Panel

[Link] 54/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Provides miscellaneous model commands for functions such as manipulating of the model,
creating drawings, and viewing properties.

Analyze Panel

Provides commands for analyzing the model.

Units/Code Panel

Provides commands for changing units and the design code.

File Panel
Contains commands on the Home Tab for creating, opening, and saving PV Elite files.

New

Creates a new .pvdb file.

Open

Opens an existing .pvdb, .pvi, or .pv file. The Open command is also available on the
Quick Access bar at the top.

Save

Saves the open file. The Save command is also available on the Quick Access bar at the
top.

New

Home tab: File > New

[Link] 55/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Creates a new PV Elite input file (.pvdb). You can also press Ctrl+N on the keyboard to
create a new input file.

You can:

Select a code (ASME Section VIII-Division 1, ASME Section VIII-Division 2, PD

5500, or EN 13445). The software automatically populates code-specific parameters
in the file.

Create an empty .pvdb file.

Select From Project Template to create a new (.pvdb) file from a PV Elite template
(.pvpt) file.

From Project Template

Home tab: File > New > From Project Template

Creates a new PV Elite input file (.pvdb) based on the project template that you select. The
software opens a window where you can browse and select any PV Elite template (.pvpt)
file.

You can specify a default folder for project templates in the configuration settings. For
more information, see Configuration.

Elements Panel
Provides commands for elements used to create a vessel, such as cylinders, spheres, and
cones. The Elements panel is available on the Home Tab.

Cylinder

Places a cylindrical shell.

Ellipse

Places an elliptical head.

Torisphere

Places a torispherical head.

[Link] 56/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Sphere

Places a spherical head or shell.

Cone

Places a conical head or shell segment.

Welded Flat Head

Places a welded flat head.

ANSI/Bolted Flange

Places a bolted body flange.

Skirt

Places a skirt support with base ring.

Rectangular Vessel Input

Opens the Rectangular Vessel Configuration Dialog, where you define the parameters for
a rectangular vessel.

The software does not require the complete construction of a vessel for analysis. Individual
elements or groups of elements may be defined and partially analyzed. Only complete
vessels with proper supports can be analyzed for dead weight and live loads.

All elements, except Skirt, can be used to create either horizontal or vertical vessels.

Models for vertical vessels are built by placing elements from bottom to top.

Models for horizontal vessels are built by placing elements from left to right.

Models for rectangular vessels are built entirely with Rectangular Vessel .

The vessel orientation is established with the first element. If starting with a skirt, it is a
vertical vessel. If starting with a head, the head can be flipped between a bottom head
(vertical vessel) and a left head (horizontal vessel) by clicking Flip Element Orientation
on the Utility Panel. After the second element is added to the model, the orientation is
fixed. Skirts are the only vessel supports that are modeled as elements. Other supports,
such as legs and lugs for vertical vessels and saddles, are modeled as details on the
elements. For more information, see Details Panel.

[Link] 57/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Rectangular Vessel Configuration Dialog

Home tab: Elements > Rectangular Vessel Input

Specifies parameters and performs stress calculations and maximum allowable working
pressure calculations for the rectangular, obround, and circular vessels described in the
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1, 2015, Appendix 13. The
software analyzes the following vessels:

Fig. 13-2 (a)(1) - Vessel with equal long-side and short-side thickness.

Fig. 13-2 (a)(2) - Vessel with differing long-side thickness.

Fig. 13-2 (a)(3) - Vessel with rounded corners.

[Link] 58/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Fig. 13-2 (a)(4) - Reinforced vessel.

Fig. 13-2 (a)(5) - Non-continuous reinforced vessel with rounded corners.

Fig. 13-2 (a)(6) - Non-continuous reinforced vessel with rounded corners.

[Link] 59/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Fig. 13-2 (a)(7) - Rectangular vessel with single stay plate/row of bars.

Fig. 13-2 (a)(8) - Rectangular vessel with two stay plates/rows of bars.

Fig. 13-2 (b)(1) - Obround vessel.

[Link] 60/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Fig. 13-2 (b)(2) - Reinforced obround vessel.

Fig. 13-2 (b)(3) - Obround vessel with single stay plate/row of bars.

Fig. 13-2 (c)(1) - Circular vessel with single diametral plate.

[Link] 61/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Analysis

The software first performs ligament efficiency calculations for those vessels with holes in
the side plates. The membrane and bending ligament efficiencies are used to adjust the
stress calculations at the mid-side of the plates. The ligament efficiency calculations are
based on section 13-6 and are performed for both uniform and multi diameter hole
patterns.

After the ligament efficiencies are determined, the software performs the individual stress
calculations. Membrane, bending, and total stress calculations are performed as
prescribed by the code in Sections 13-7 through 13-13. These stresses are compared to
their allowables, and a highest percentage of allowable calculation is performed.

The final calculation performed is the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP). The
software computes an MAWP for all three types of stresses (Membrane, Bending, and
Total). Additionally, depending on the specific geometry of those vessels stayed by bars,
an additional MAWP is computed according to Equation 2 of UG-47.

The software takes full account of the corrosion allowance and uses the corroded
condition for all dimensions in its calculations. The only exception is the reinforcement
calculations. The reinforcing member is assumed to be entered in its corroded state.

Vessel Tab (Rectangular Vessel Configuration)

Specifies general parameters for the rectangular vessel.

Quick Results

Displays the Quick Calculation Results dialog which contains analysis results.

Search

[Link] 62/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Searches the results report. Type text and press ENTER to find the first occurrence. Press
F3 to cycle through additional occurrences.

Description

Enter an alpha-numeric description for this item. This entry is optional, but strongly
encouraged for organizational and support purposes.

Design Internal | External Pressure

Enter the internal design pressure. For vessel type C1, this is the entry for P1.

If analyzing vessel type C1, be aware that the P1 value is associated with only
one of the two chambers. If both chambers are operating at the same pressure, then an
equal value must be entered for P2.

Design external pressure is available when required by the selected figure.

Design Internal Temperature

Enter the temperature associated with the internal design pressure. The software
automatically updates the materials properties for built-in materials when you change the
design temperature. If you entered the allowable stresses manually, you are responsible
for updating them for the given temperature.

Figure Designation

Specifies the figure designation of the type of rectangular vessel to be analyzed.

[Link] 63/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Figure Figure 13-2 from ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 Appendix 13

A1

A2

[Link] 64/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

A3

A4

A5

[Link] 65/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

A6

A7

Vessel with single central stay plate.

This type can also be used for vessels with

unequal compartments by using the maximum
dimension (h) of the two compartments.

A7-B Same as figurer A7 but with stay bars.

[Link] 66/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

A8

Vessel stayed by two stay plates.

This type can also be used for vessels with

unequal compartments by using the maximum
dimension (h) of the two compartments.

A8-B Same as figure A8 but with stay bars.

B1

[Link] 67/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

B2

B3

B3-B Same as figure B3 but with stay bars.

[Link] 68/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

C1

When you select EN 13445 as the Design Code on the Units/Code Panel:

Figure Figure from EN 13445-3, Section 15

15.5-1

[Link] 69/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

15.5-3

15.5-4

15.5-3cp

[Link] 70/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Min. Thick. of End Closure Plate/Vessel Head (t5)

Enter the minimum thickness of the end plate. If a valid thickness is entered, the software
analyzes the end plate according to UG-34. If the thickness value is entered as zero, or left
blank, no calculation is performed on the end plate.

Vessel Corrosion Allowance

Enter the allowance given for corrosion. The software adjusts the actual thickness and the
inside diameter of the vessel and adjusts the actual thickness and the outside diameter of
the stay plate/bar.

Some common corrosion allowance values are:

0.0625 - 1/16"

0.1250 - 1/8"

0.2500 - 1/4"

C-Factor for End Closure Plate/Vessel Head (UG-34)

Enter the C factor used in the equation to calculate the required thickness of welded end
plates. Typical values are 0.2 or 0.3. For more information, see UG-34.

Vessel Material

Specifies the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate
code.

1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog.

2. Select the material that you want to use from the list.

3. Click Select to use the material or click Back to select a different material.

Alternatively, you can type the material name as it displays in the material
specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds
in the material database with a matching name.

To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

[Link] 71/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Stay Plate/Reinforcing Material

Specifies the material name as it appears in the material specification of the appropriate
code.

1. Click to open the Material Database Dialog.

2. Select the material that you want to use from the list.

3. Click Select to use the material or click Back to select a different material.

Alternatively, you can type the material name as it displays in the material
specification. If you type in the name, the software retrieves the first material it finds
in the material database with a matching name.

To modify material properties, go to the Tools tab and select Edit/Add Materials.

Length of Vessel

Enter the length dimension of vessel. This entry is required for vessel type C1 and for the
external pressure calculations in vessel types A1 and A2.

Radius of Corner Section

Type the radius of the corner section. The software assumes each of the corner sections to
have equivalent radii.

Min. Thk. of 2nd Long-Side Plate (t22 if reqd)

Enter either the minimum thickness of the second long-side plate used to build the vessel
or the minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel. This option is only used in the
analysis of vessel type A2. Appendix 13 allows vessels of this type to have differing long-
side thickness.

This option is required if you are analyzing vessel type A2.

C-Factor (From UG-47 ASME)

Specify the attachment factor for braced and stayed surfaces. This factor is taken from
UG-47; the default value is 2.1.

[Link] 72/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Delta

Type the material parameter used to calculate pitch. The following materials are listed in
Appendix 13, Table 13-8(e):

Material (psi)1/2 (MPa)1/2

Carbon Steel 6000 498

Austenitic SS 5840 485

Ni-Cr-Fe 6180 513

Ni-Fe-Cr 6030 501

Aluminum 3560 296

Nickel Copper 5720 475

Unalloyed Titanium 4490 373

Pitch Dist. Between Reinforcing Members (L11)

Type the maximum pitch distance between reinforcing members. This value must be
greater than or equal to the width of the reinforcing member.

[Link] 73/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1 - Reinforcement width

2 - Reinforcement pitch

Short-Side Unreinforced Length Dim. (L11)

Enter the unreinforced length dimension for vessel A6. This dimension is L11 for the short
side.

Long-Side Unreinforced Length Dim. (L21)

Enter the unreinforced length dimension for vessel A6. This dimension is L21 for the long
side.

Min. Thick./Dia. of Stay Plate/Rod (t3)

Enter the minimum thickness of the stay plate or the diameter of the rod, if analyzing a
stayed vessel. This is a required entry when you are analyzing vessel types A7, A7-B, A8,
A8-B, B3, or B3-B.

Min. Thick./Dia. of Stay Plate/Rod (t4 if reqd)

Enter the minimum thickness of the stay plate, or the diameter of the rod, if analyzing a
stayed vessel. This is a required entry only when you are analyzing vessel types A8 or A8-
B.

Stay Plate Corrosion Allowance

Enter the appropriate corrosion allowance. The software adjusts the actual thickness and
the inside diameter of the vessel and adjusts the actual thickness and the outside diameter
of the stay plate/bar.

[Link] 74/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The stay plate/bar will be corroded twice to account for the fact that they are
exposed to fluid on both sides. Consequently, enter the corrosion allowance of only one
side.

Some common corrosion allowance values are:

0.0625 - 1/16"

0.1250 - 1/8"

0.2500 - 1/4"

Pitch Distance Between Bars

Type the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or
equal to the calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars.

Pitch Dist. Between Bars of Diameter t3

Type the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or
equal to the calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars.

Pitch Dist. Between Bars of Diameter t4

Type the maximum pitch distance between stay bars. This value must be greater than or
equal to the calculated maximum pitch of the stay bars.

Vessel Radius

Enter the inside radius of vessel type C1.

Pressure in 2nd Compartment

Type the internal pressure of the second compartment in vessel C1. You must enter an
internal design pressure that is less than or equal to P1. When the two compartments have
equivalent pressure, the value entered for P2 must equal the value entered for P1. If left
blank, a value of zero is used for P2.

Plates are Perforated (EN 13445)

Specifies that the plates are perforated to accommodate reinforcement. When selected,
the software uses the values of Hole Pitch, Long. | Diagonal, Diameter of Holes in Plate,

[Link] 75/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

and Angle Beta to calculate any effective reduction to the ligament efficiency due to the
spacing and pattern of the holes.

Diameter of Holes in Plate

Defines the diameter, d, of the holes in the perforation.

Hole Pitch, Long. | Diagonal

Defines the the longitudinal pitch distance, P, and the diagonal pitch distance, Ps, of the
holes in the perforation.

[Link] 76/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Angle Beta

Defines the angle, b, of the holes in the perforation.

Short Side Tab (Rectangular Vessel Configuration)

Specifies dimensions for the short sides of the rectangular vessel.

Quick Results

Displays the Quick Calculation Results dialog which contains analysis results.

Search

Searches the results report. Type text and press ENTER to find the first occurrence. Press
F3 to cycle through additional occurrences.

Short-Side Length Dimension (H, L1, L3, or 2R)

Enter the design length of the short side of the vessel. This dimension is dependent on the
vessel being analyzed as indicated in the following table:

A1 H - Inside length of long-side of vessel

A2 h - Inside length of long-side of vessel

[Link] 77/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

A3 L1 - Half-length of short-side minus the

corner radius

A4 H - Inside length of short-side of vessel

A5 L3 - Half-length of short-side of vessel

A6 L3 - Half-length of short-side of vessel

A7 h - Inside length of short-side of vessel

A7-B h - Inside length of short-side of vessel

A8 h - Inside length of short-side of vessel

A8-B h - Inside length of short-side of vessel

B1 2R - Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side

B2 2R - Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side

B3 2R - Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side

B3-B 2R - Inside Diameter of Rounded Short-side

C1 *** No Entry Required ***

Min. Thick. of Short-Side Plates (t1)

Enter the minimum thickness of the short-side plate used to build the vessel, or the
minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel. The short-side thickness value is a

[Link] 78/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

required entry for all vessel types.

When the code specifies a single thickness (A3 and C1), the short-side thickness
is used for both t1 and t2.

Short-Side Joint Efficiency Factor (Mid-Side)

Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for vessels with welded joints. This joint efficiency
value will be used to adjust the corner and the mid-side allowable stress values. The mid-
side joint efficiencies will not be used if there are holes on the side of the vessel. Instead,
the ligament efficiencies will be used to adjust the actual stress values. Typical values are:

1.00 Full Radiography

0.85 Spot X - Ray

0.70 No - Radiography

For help determining this value, refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12.

Corner Section Joint Efficiency Factor

Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for vessels with welded joints. This joint efficiency
value will be used to adjust the corner and the mid-side allowable stress values. The mid-
side joint efficiencies will not be used if there are holes on the side of the vessel. Instead,
the ligament efficiencies will be used to adjust the actual stress values. Typical values are:

1.00 Full Radiography

0.85 Spot X - Ray

0.70 No - Radiography

For help determining this value, refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12.

Type of Short-Side Reinforcement

Define the type of vessel side reinforcement. This option is available when you select any
code except EN 13445 as the Design Code on the Units/Code Panel.

None

No reinforcement.

[Link] 79/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Bar

The reinforcement is made of a bar.

To define the bar dimensions:

Click to open the Bar Selection dialog. Selecting a bar automatically fills the values for
Axial Thickness of Bar Stiffener and Radial Width of Bar Stiffener.

-OR-

Manually enter values for Axial Thickness of Bar Stiffener and Radial Width of Bar
Stiffener.

Section

The reinforcement is made of a structural cross-section.

To define parameters for the section, enter values for Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing
Member, Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Member, and Centroid Distance from Outside of
Vessel.

Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing Member

Type the cross-sectional area for the beam section which is being used as reinforcement.

Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Member

Type the moment of inertia for the beam section which is being used as a reinforcement in
the direction parallel to the surface of the vessel.

Centroid Distance from Outside of Vessel

Type the distance from the surface of the vessel to the centroid of the reinforcing ring. This
distance should be measured normal to the vessel surface.

Axial Thickness of Bar Stiffener

Enter the thickness of the bar stiffener.

[Link] 80/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Radial Width of Bar Stiffener

Type the width of the reinforcing member. Reinforcements cannot overlap, so this value
cannot be greater than the reinforcement pitch.

1 - Reinforcement width

2 - Reinforcement pitch

Length of Reinforcing Member (If Discontinuous)

For vessel type A5, this entry represents the entire length of the discontinuous
reinforcement. No entry is required for other vessel types. In all cases the program
includes the vessel wall in the calculation of the moment of inertia.

Type of EN Reinforcement

Specifies the type of reinforcement for the vessel side, according to EN 13445-3, Section
15. This option is available when you select EN 13445 as the Design Code on the
Units/Code Panel.

To define parameters for the selected section, enter the needed values for tw | tf | bf and
dw | hr | bof.

a1

[Link] 81/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

a2

a3

b1

b2

b3

[Link] 82/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

c1

c2

None

No reinforcement

tw | tf | bf

Specifies dimensional properties for the selected Type of EN Reinforcement.

tw Example

Web thickness

tf

Flange thickness

bf

Flange width to the inside of

the reinforcement cross-section

[Link] 83/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

dw | hr | bof

Specifies dimensional properties for the selected Type of EN Reinforcement.

dw Example

Web height

hf

Total reinforcement height

bof

Offset flange width to the inside of

the reinforcement cross-section

Threaded Holes in Short-Side Plates

If a short-side plate has uniform or multi-diameter holes, select Yes to define the pitch,
diameter, and depth parameters. The software performs ligament efficiency calculations to
adjust the calculated actual stress values.

You can define different threaded hole parameters for each short-side plate.

Center to Center Distance Between Holes

Enter the maximum pitch distance between holes in the side plates of the vessel being
analyzed. This pitch distance (P) is shown in the following illustration. This value must be
greater than the diameter of the hole

[Link] 84/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Diameter of Hole

Type the diameter (d0, d1, or d2) of the corresponding hole (#1, #2, or #3). If the hole is of
uniform diameter, then a value for d0 is the only required entry.

The values for d0, d1, and d2 must be entered in decreasing diameter size.

Depth of Hole

Type the depth (T0, T1, T2) of the corresponding hole (#1, #2, or #3). If the hole is of
uniform diameter, then a value for T0 is the only required entry.

The sum of the values for T0, T1, and T2 must equal to the entire side thickness.

Ligament Efficiencies em | eb

Enter ligament efficiencies for tube spacing.

[Link] 85/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Distance from Neutral Axis ci

When the plate has multi-diameter holes, specifies the distance from the neutral axis to the
inside surface of the vessel.

Distance from Neutral Axis co

When the plate has multi-diameter holes, specifies the distance from the neutral axis to the
outer surface of the vessel.

Long Side Tab (Rectangular Vessel Configuration)

Specifies dimensions for the long sides of the rectangular vessel.

The definitions for most long side properties are the same as short side properties
and are listed under Short Side Tab (Rectangular Vessel Configuration).

Quick Results

Displays the Quick Calculation Results dialog which contains analysis results.

Search

Searches the results report. Type text and press ENTER to find the first occurrence. Press
F3 to cycle through additional occurrences.

Long-Side Length Dimension (h, L2, L4, or 2R)

Enter the design length of the long side of the vessel. This dimension is dependent on the
vessel being analyzed as indicated in the following table:

A1 h - Inside length of long-side of vessel

A2 h - Inside length of long-side vessel

A3 L2 - Half-length of long-side minus the

corner radius

A4 h - Inside length of long-side of vessel

[Link] 86/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

A5 L4 - Half-length of long-side

A6 L4 - Half-length of long-side of vessel

A7 h - Inside length of long-side of vessel

A7-B h - Inside length of long-side of vessel

A8 h - Inside length of long-side of vessel

A8-B h - Inside length of long-side of vessel

B1 L2 - Half-length of long-side of vessel

B2 L2 - Half-length of long-side of vessel

B3 L2 - Half-length of long-side of vessel

B3-B L2 - Half-length of long-side of vessel

C1 *** No Entry Required ***

Min. Thick. of Long-Side Plates (t2)

Enter the minimum thickness of the long-side plate used to build the vessel, or the
minimum thickness measured for an existing vessel. The short-side thickness value is a
required entry for all vessel types.

According to Appendix 13, vessels A3 and C1 (Figure 20C and 20K, respectively)
are assumed to have equivalent long and short-side thicknesses. Thus, the long-side
thickness is not a required entry for these two vessel types.

[Link] 87/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Long-Side Joint Efficiency Factor (Mid-Side)

Enter the efficiency of the welded joint for vessels with welded joints. This joint efficiency
value will be used to adjust the corner and the mid-side allowable stress values. The mid-
side joint efficiencies will not be used if there are holes on the side of the vessel. Instead,
the ligament efficiencies will be used to adjust the actual stress values. Typical values are:

1.00 Full Radiography

0.85 Spot X - Ray

0.70 No - Radiography

For help determining this value, refer to Section VIII, Div. 1, Table UW-12.

Type of Long-Side Reinforcement

Define the type of vessel side reinforcement. This option is available when you select any
code except EN 13445 as the Design Code on the Units/Code Panel.

None

No reinforcement.

Bar

The reinforcement is made of a bar.

To define the bar dimensions:

Click to open the Bar Selection dialog. Selecting a bar automatically fills the values for
Axial Thickness of Bar Stiffener and Radial Width of Bar Stiffener.

-OR-

Manually enter values for Axial Thickness of Bar Stiffener and Radial Width of Bar
Stiffener.

Section

The reinforcement is made of a structural cross-section.

To define parameters for the section, enter values for Cross-Sectional Area of Reinforcing
Member, Moment of Inertia of Reinforcing Member, and Centroid Distance from Outside of
Vessel.

[Link] 88/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Threaded Holes in Long-Side Plates

If a long-side plate has uniform or multi-diameter holes, select Yes to define the pitch,
diameter, and depth parameters. The software performs ligament efficiency calculations to
adjust the calculated actual stress values.

You can define different threaded hole parameters for each long-side plate.

Details Panel
Contains commands on the Home Tab for details on vessel elements.

Details can only be specified on the currently selected element (see the Elements Panel
for more information on placing elements). Details, such as nozzles, insulation, operating
fluid, and platforms, define the vessel's weight information for load calculations.

Stiffening Ring

Add stiffening rings on the selected cylinder element.

Nozzle

Add nozzles on the selected cylinder or head element.

Weight

Add piping and miscellaneous weight added to the selected cylinder or head element.

Force and Moment

Add external forces and moments to the selected cylinder or head element.

Platform

Add a platform to the selected element.

Packing

Add packing to the selected element.

Saddle

Add saddles to the selected horizontal cylinder element.

Tray

Add a set of equally spaced trays to the selected vertical cylinder element.

[Link] 89/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lug

Add support lugs to the selected vertical cylinder element.

Legs

Add support legs to the selected vertical cylinder element.

Liquid

Add liquid data to the selected element.

Insulation

Add insulation to the selected element.

Lining

Add lining to the selected element.

Halfpipe Jacket

Add half pipe jackets to the selected cylinder element.

Tubesheet Analysis

Add a tubesheet to the selected element.

Add a Clip

Add a clip to the selected element.

Lifting Lug/Trunnion

Add lifting lugs or trunnions to the selected element.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Add a jacket or vapor/distribution belt to the selected element.

API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis

Add a flaw to the selected element.

Common Detail Parameters

The following fields appear in the dialog box for most details.

[Link] 90/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

From Node

Displays the From Node for the selected element. The From Node is the software-
generated node number describing the starting location of the element. The value cannot
be modified.

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

[Link] 91/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

[Link] 92/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Detail Description

Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is

[Link] 93/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Add a Detail
Details are assigned to elements using the commands on the Details panel on the Home
tab.

1. Select an element in the graphics view.

2. Click the command on the Details panel on the Home tab.

The dialog box for the command displays.

3. Enter the needed information, and click OK.

The detail is added to the element and displays in the graphics view.

Modify a Detail
To modify one or more existing details:

[Link] 94/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1. In the graphic view, click the element having the existing detail that you want to
modify.

2. Click the corresponding command on the Details panel.

The dialog box for the command displays.

3. If there is only one detail, make the needed changes, and click OK.

4. If there is more than one detail, click Previous or Go To Next to modify the needed
detail.

In the graphic view, you can also right-click a detail on the selected element to
open the dialog box for that detail.

Stiffening Ring
Home tab: Details > Stiffening Ring

Adds one or more stiffening rings to the selected cylinder element, and displays the EN
13445 Ring Dialog for the EN 13445 standard and the Stiffening Ring Dialog for all
other standards. A stiffening ring is a light stiffener such as a flat bar, tee, angle, or I-
section. A typical design uniformly distributes similar stiffeners along the cylinder.

Status

Displays the current ring number and the status of ring calculations at the bottom of the
dialog, such as inertia required, inertia available, and whether the ring meets
requirements.

As you define stiffening ring data, the software automatically calculates the required
inertias, except when the ring is at a cone-to-cylinder junction.

The maximum length between stiffeners is shown on the main window Status Bar
as Slen. When >>> displays, the element does not require a reinforcing ring for external
pressure purposes.

Previous Ring

If you created more than one ring on the element, click to go back to the previous ring.

Go To Next Ring

If you created more than one ring on the element, click to go to the next ring.

[Link] 95/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Add New Ring

Click to add a new ring to the shell or head element.

Delete

Deletes all data for the current ring.

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

New Ring Description / Detail ID

Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

[Link] 96/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

[Link] 97/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

[Link] 98/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Ring Material
Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Width of Ring in Contact w/Shell

Specifies the stiffening ring width, wi, at the shell.

This property is used by EN 13445.

[Link] 99/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Radius of Standing Flange (Rf)

Specifies the maximum radius of the stiffening ring, Rf.

This parameter applies only to EN 13445.

Thickness of Flange
Specifies the flange thickness of the stiffening ring, ef.

This parameter applies only to EN 13445.

Length Between Heavy Stiff, Lc

Specifies the distance between heavy stiffeners.

A heavy stiffener is a major structural component, such as a girth flange or a large

conventional stiffener. Heavy stiffeners are separate from the light stiffening rings created
by the Stiffening Ring Dialog.

Light stiffeners provide an economical design because the calculation of the

overall collapse pressure includes the resistance of the shell. Heavy stiffeners provide
simpler calculations but a less economical design because the shell resistance is not
considered.

This property applies only to EN 13445.

[Link] 100/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Ring Location
Select the location of the ring. Select ID if the ring is on the inside diameter of the cylinder.
Select OD if the ring is on the outside diameter of the cylinder. OD is the most common
selection.

Ring Type
Select Bar Type for a flat bar stiffener ring. Select Section Type for a more complex
structural cross-section.

For Bar Type, click Check "Standard" Bars. The Bar Selection dialog box displays,
where you select the flat bar size, and enter values for Axial Thickness and Radial
Width. Bar type stiffeners have a simple rectangular cross section and the software
calculates the ring properties based on the width and thickness of the ring. Most stiffeners
are bar type.

The software sizes a new bar ring based on a default thickness of 0.375 inches or the
element value entered for Bar thickness to use when designing new rings on the
Equipment Installation and Miscellaneous Options Dialog Box of the Load Cases tab.

For Section Type, select a standard cross-section in Choose a Section or click Section
Calculator to create a custom fabricated section. You need the following properties for the
section: Moment of Inertia, Cross Sectional Area, and Distance to Ring Centroid. The
software provides these values for standard cross-sections. You must enter the values for
a custom section, as defined in the AISC Steel Construction Manual.

Cone to Shell Junction Ring?

Select to attach the ring at the junction of the cone and cylinder elements. In this case, the
software does not design the ring for external pressure considerations, but considers it for
junction reinforcement according to App. 1-5 and 1-8 (Div. 1) or AD 360.3 (Div. 2).

[Link] 101/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Inside Diameter
Enter the inside diameter of the stiffening ring. This value is usually equal to the outside
diameter of the vessel shell (when OD is selected for Ring Location), except for the less
common case of a stiffening ring on the inside of the vessel (when ID is selected for Ring
Location).This value is used both to calculate the weight of the ring and the stiffness of
the ring for external pressure purposes. This entry is only available when Bar Type is
selected for Ring Type.

Thickness
Enter the axial thickness of the stiffening ring. This value is used to calculate the weight of
the ring and the stiffness of the ring for external pressure purposes. This entry is only
available when Bar Type is selected for Ring Type.

Outside Diameter
Enter the outside diameter of the stiffening ring. This value is usually greater than the
outside diameter of the vessel shell (when OD is selected for Ring Location), except for
the less common case of a stiffening ring on the inside of the vessel (when ID is selected
for Ring Location). This value is used to calculate both the weight of the ring and the
stiffness of the ring for external pressure purposes. This entry is only available when Bar
Type is selected for Ring Type.

Structural Database
Select the structural specification database to use for cross-sections. This entry is only
available when Section Type is selected for Ring Type.

Moment of Inertia
Displays the moment of inertia of the stiffening ring about its neutral axis from the
specification selected for Structural Database, when a standard section is selected for
Choose a Section. If you created a custom section using Section Calculator, enter a
value according to the selected specification. The software uses this value to determine
the adequacy of the ring for external pressure calculations, and for conical calculations
according to Appendix 1 of the ASME Code. This entry is only available when Section
Type is selected for Ring Type.

[Link] 102/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Cross Sectional Area

Displays the cross sectional area of the stiffening ring from the specification selected for
Structural Database, when a standard section is selected for Choose a Section. If you
created a custom section using Section Calculator, enter a value according to the
selected specification. This entry is only available when Section Type is selected for Ring
Type.

Distance to Ring Centroid

Displays the distance from the surface of the shell to the ring centroid from the
specification selected for Structural Database, when a standard section is selected for
Choose a Section. If you created a custom section using Section Calculator, enter a
value according to the selected specification. This entry is only available when Section
Type is selected for Ring Type.

Section Ring Height

Displays the depth of the cross-section from the specification selected for Structural
Database, when a standard section is selected for Choose a Section. If you created a
custom section using Section Calculator, enter a value according to the selected
specification. This entry is only available when Section Type is selected for Ring Type.

Welded Thickness to Shell for MDMT Calcs

Defines the fillet weld size at the base of the stiffening ring where the ring attaches to the
shell.

Section Name
Displays the section name from the specification selected for Structural Database, when
a standard section is selected for Choose a Section. If you created a custom section
using Section Calculator, enter a name. This entry is only available when Section Type
is selected for Ring Type.

Choose a Section
Select a section type and a section size:

[Link] 103/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

I - Beam
W Section

Channel

WT Section
MT Section
ST Section
(strong axis out)

Angle
(weak axis out)

Angle
(strong axis out)

Double Angle
(weak axis out)

Double Angle
(strong axis out)

WT Section
MT Section
ST Section
(weak axis out)

Ring Fillet Weld Leg Size

Enter the size of the leg of the ring fillet weld.

Ring Attachment Style

Select the type of fillet weld. Select Intermittent, Continuous, or Both.

[Link] 104/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Number of Rings to Add

Enter the number of rings to place on the cylinder element. The software resets this
number to 0 after you close the Stiffening Ring dialog box, so it is possible to add multiple
groups of rings.

The maximum length between stiffeners is shown on the Toggle Status Bar as
Slen. A Slen value of >>> means that this element does not require a reinforcing ring for
external pressure purposes.

Ring Spacing
Enter the ring spacing. The first ring is placed at the distance entered for Distance from
"From" Node. The rest of the rings are placed after the first ring by the Ring Spacing
increment. If you are adding one ring, a value is not needed. The software resets this
number to 0 after you close the Stiffening Ring dialog box, so it is possible to add multiple
groups of rings.

The maximum length between stiffeners is shown on the Toggle Status Bar as
Slen. This value is recommended for the ring spacing. A Slen value of >>> means that this
section does not require a reinforcing ring for external pressure purposes.

[Link] 105/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Nozzle
Home tab: Details > Nozzle

Opens the Nozzle Input/Analysis dialog, where you define a nozzle to add the selected
cylinder or head element. Nozzles add to the total dead weight of the vessel and are used
to evaluate the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) of the vessel and flange.

Nozzle Main Tab (Nozzle Input/Analysis Dialog Box)

Local Stress Analysis (WRC 107, 297 or Annex G) Tab (Nozzle Input/Analysis Dialog Box)

Nozzle Main Tab (Nozzle Input/Analysis Dialog)

Defines physical and weld parameters for the nozzle.

Common Detail Parameters

Previous Nozzle

If you created more than one nozzle on the element, click to go back to the previous
nozzle.

Go To Next Nozzle

If you created more than one nozzle on the element, click to go to the next nozzle.

Add New Nozzle

Click to add a new nozzle to the shell or head element.

[Link] 106/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Delete

Deletes all data for the current nozzle.

Plot

Click to open the Nozzle Graphics dialog. A cross-section view of the nozzle design is
shown.

Nozzle Orientation (Nozzle Main Tab)

Pad or Hub Properties (Nozzle Main Tab)
Additional Weld Data (Nozzle Main Tab)
Miscellaneous (Nozzle Main Tab)

Nozzle Attachment

Select the type of nozzle:

Inserted nozzle with reinforcing pad

Inserted nozzle without reinforcing pad

Abutting nozzle without reinforcing pad

Abutting nozzle with reinforcing pad

Integrally reinforced nozzle

Hub nozzle, type F connection

FVC Catalog

Select FVC Catalogue to open the FVC Catalog dialog and select a nozzle from the
Forged Vessel Connections catalog. See Forged Vessel Connectors | FVC

[Link] 107/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

<[Link]
fvc/> .

Nominal Diameter

Specifies the nominal nozzle diameter.

Flange Class

Specifies the nozzle pressure rating.

Connection Type

Specifies the nozzle connection type.

Overall Length Oal

Specifies the length from the surface of the vessel to the flange face.

Nozzle does not have a "Nut Relief"

Specifies that the nozzle does not have a nut relief. In this case, the nozzle has a nut stop
which prevents the nuts from turning.

Select Now

Loads the FVC nozzle data from the catalog into the main Nozzle Input dialog.

Coupling Lookup

Select Coupling Lookup to find coupling properties for the nozzle. Select the pressure
rating and the diameter, and then click Select Now.

Just Like

Select to place another nozzle just like an existing nozzle.

Nozzle Description

Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

[Link] 108/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

When using ASME VIII - 1, a special directive is available for small nozzles. If the
text directive #SN is placed anywhere in the description, the software calculates the areas
and MAWP of this nozzle connection. This directive overrides the global directive set in
Tools > Configuration. It may be necessary to use this directive when required by UG-36.
This paragraph in the code defines a small nozzle.

Nozzle Material

Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Schedule

Specify the thickness of the nozzle by selecting the schedule of the nozzle neck pipe.
Acceptable schedules are:

SCH 5S SCH 30

SCH 10 SCH 40

SCH 10S SCH 40S

SCH 20 SCH 60

SCH 30 SCH 80

SCH 40 SCH 80S

SCH 40S SCH 100

SCH 60 SCH 120

SCH 80 SCH 140

[Link] 109/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

SCH 5S SCH 160

SCH 10 SCH STD

SCH 10S SCH X-STG

SCH 20 SCH XX-STG

DIN schedules are also available.

All schedules of pipe might not have a corresponding diameter associated. In this
case, the software displays an error stating the thickness of the nozzle was not
found.

Diameter

Enter the actual diameter of the nozzle when Actual is selected for Thickness Basis.
Enter the nominal diameter, or click to select a diameter when Nominal or Minimum is
selected for Thickness Basis. Values are given in English units and must be multiplied by
the diameter conversion constant so that the software arrives at the correct diameter when
it calculates the English value of the diameter. Valid English-unit nominal diameters range
from 0.125 to 30.0 inches.

Dia. Basis

Select the type of diameter to use for the element. Select ID for the inside diameter. Select
OD for the outside diameter. ID and OD are available for all design codes.

The ASME code provides different equations for required thickness based on
whether the geometry is specified on ID or OD. By using the ID basis, the software
computes a thinner required thickness, Tr, for the nozzle, such as in high-pressure,
thick-wall geometries.

If you are modeling a cylinder with welded flat heads on either end, and the welded
flat heads sit just inside the cylinder shell, set Diameter Basis to ID and specify the
Inside Diameter value on the welded flat heads to be the same size as the Inside
Diameter of the cylinder. After you make these changes, if the flat head element still
displays as sitting on the cylinder shell (instead of inside of the shell), select Flip

[Link] 110/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Orientation twice. The software refreshes the model display to show the welded
flat head inside the cylinder shell.

Thickness Basis

Select the thickness basis:

Actual - The software uses the actual values entered for Diameter and Actual Thk.
Select this value if the nozzle is fabricated from plate.

Nominal - The software uses Diameter as the nominal diameter and looks up the
actual diameter. The software also looks up the nominal thickness based on the
selection for Schedule.

Minimum - The software uses Diameter as the nominal diameter and looks up the
actual diameter. The software also looks up the nominal thickness based on the
selection for Schedule. It then multiplies the nominal thickness by a factor of 0.875.

Total Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance. The software adjusts both the actual thickness and the
inside diameter for the corrosion allowance. For ASME VIII-1, if the nozzle has an external
corrosion allowance, add the external corrosion allowance to the internal corrosion
allowance and enter the total value.

Actual Thk

If you selected Actual for Thickness Basis, enter the minimum actual thickness of the
nozzle wall.

Nozzle Orientation (Nozzle Main Tab)

Defines orientation parameters for the nozzle.

Is this nozzle connected to another nozzle?

Select this option if the nozzle is connected to another nozzle.

Parent Nozzle

Select the parent nozzle for this nozzle.

[Link] 111/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

[Link] 112/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

[Link] 113/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Offset Dimension L

Enter the axial distance from the From Node to the centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is
located in a head, then enter the distance from the head centerline. This dimension should

[Link] 114/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

always be entered if it is not zero. This option is similar to Distance from "From" Node
and is available when the nozzle is on a head element.

Distance from Shell Surface

Enter the axial distance from the From Node to the centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is
located in a head, then enter the distance from the head centerline. This dimension should
always be entered if it is not zero. This option is similar to Distance from "From" Node
and is available when Is this nozzle connected to another nozzle? is selected.

Layout

Click to open the Nozzle Layout and Placement Dialog Box and set the nozzle
orientation independent of the coordinate system of the model.

Nozzle Layout and Placement Dialog Box

Provides an alternative and more versatile method of nozzle orientation. You are not
confined to having nozzles point in the directions of the coordinate system axes of the
model. For example, when using the standard parameters (such as Offset Dimension L
and Layout Angle) on the Nozzle Input/Analysis dialog box, hillside nozzles may only
point in the X, Y and Z directions:

[Link] 115/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

When using the Layout command and the Nozzle Layout and Placement dialog box, a
hillside nozzle can point in any direction by using Reference Angle alpha instead of
Layout Angle:

Nozzle Style

Select a nozzle orientation style:

[Link] 116/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Nozzle Style Cylinder Element Head Element

Radial Nozzle

Hillside Nozzle

Lateral Nozzle

Layout, Reference or Tilt Angle alpha

Enter the angle of the line to use as reference for Nozzle Offset Dimension L.

Nozzle Offset Dimension L

Enter the distance from the reference line to the centerline of the nozzle.

Nozzle "X" Dimension and Nozzle "Y" Dimension

For nozzles on heads, enter values for Nozzle "X" Dimension and Nozzle "Y"
Dimension to calculate Reference Angle alpha and Nozzle Offset Dimension L from

[Link] 117/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

the X-Y coordinate location. Nozzle locations on heads are often given in the X-Y
coordinate system.

Projection Dimension "Proj" or "hf"

For a radial or hillside nozzle, enter the projection from the centerline of the cylinder to the
end of the nozzle. The software calculates the projection ho.

For a nozzle on a cylinder:

For a nozzle on a head:

[Link] 118/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Hillside Nozzles

Hillside nozzles in heads are often arranged with flange faces level in the same plane. Due
to the curvature of the head, each nozzle has a different value for outside projection ho:

Because the value of Projection Dimension "Proj" is the same for each nozzle, this
arrangement is simple.

Click OK to save parameter values and return to the Nozzle Input/Analysis

dialog box with new orientation values displayed.

Layout Angle

Specifies the angle between the designated zero degree reference direction on the vessel
and the centerline of the nozzle at the point where it is attached to the shell.

For a horizontal vessel, the zero degree line is at 12:00 (looking at a clock); 90 degrees is
at 3:00. Entering these layout angles is important if the horizontal vessel has a liquid level
and the nozzles are being designed using Design P + Static Head, selected for
Nozzle/clip design pressure options on the Load Cases tab. For a vertical vessel, the
angle is more arbitrary. For purposes of rendering the graphics, the assumption is that the
zero degree line is at 3:00 and 90 degrees is 12:00.

The position of the zero degree reference direction (North, West or East) and the angular
rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) are set in Tools tab, Set Configuration
Parameters , Default Value Settings Tab (Configuration Dialog).

[Link] 119/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

If the new orientation is different from the orientation of the current model, the software
asks to update the model with the new settings. If the settings are updated, the weights
and areas of platforms must be recalculated:

Click Detail List . On the Detail Listing dialog box, click the Platform tab so that
platform data is visible. Click Platform Wind Area and Platform Weight to
recalculate.

Click Platform for each platform. Tab through the fields in the Platform dialog
box, causing the weight and area to be recalculated

The angular settings apply to nozzles, clips, legs, lifting lugs, support lugs, base
rings, platforms, weights and half-pipe jackets.

Examples

Default Orientation

Angle Position: North

Rotation Direction: Clockwise

[Link] 120/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Radial Nozzle

Select to specify a radial nozzle.

Angle or Lateral Nozzle

Select to specify an angled or lateral nozzle. Also enter a value for Centerline Tilt Angle,
and — if needed — for Cyl./Cone Offset Dimension L.

Centerline Tilt Angle

Enter the angle for a non-radial nozzle when Angle or Lateral Nozzle is selected.

[Link] 121/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Non-radial nozzles can be specified by entering the angle between the vessel and nozzle
centerlines and the offset from vessel centerline. This vessel-nozzle centerline angle can
vary from 0 to a limiting value depending upon specific geometry. For nozzles on top
heads, this value will generally range between 0 and 90 degrees. On bottom heads, this
value would be between 90 and 180 degrees:

[Link] 122/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The input specification for non-radial and non-hillside nozzles changed starting
with version 2008. The angle is measured between the centerline of the nozzle and the
centerline of the vessel. This value can be determined from an electronic drawing of the
model.

Cyl./Cone Offset Dimension L

Enter an offset dimension from the vessel centerline for hillside nozzles (neither Radial
Nozzle or Centerline Tilt Angle are selected) and angled nozzles (Centerline Tilt Angle
is selected).

Hillside nozzles and some tilted nozzles are subject to calculations to meet ASME area
requirements in both planes of reinforcement. In these cases, the software automatically

[Link] 123/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

checks area requirements in both planes using the corresponding lengths of the nozzle
opening. For integral construction, the Code F correction factor of 0.5 is automatically
applied in the hillside direction. If the connection is pad reinforced, a value of 1.0 is used.
The F factor is used to account for the fact that the longitudinal stress is one-half of the
hoop stress. The use of the F factor is limited to nozzles located on cylindrical and conical
sections under internal pressure.

Projection Outside

Enter the nozzle's pipe length between the vessel surface and bottom of the nozzle's
attached flange or cover. This length is used for weight calculations and for external
pressure calculations. The total pipe length (the Projection Dimension (Proj) or "hf") is
defined on the Nozzle Layout and Placement Dialog Box.

Projection Inside

Specifies the nozzle's pipe projection distance into the vessel. The software uses the
smaller of Projection Inside and Limits (Thickness) with no pad to calculate the area
available in the inward nozzle. You can safely define a large number such as six or twelve
inches if the nozzle continues into the vessel for a long distance.

For some nozzle types such as those shown in ASME VIII-1 UW-16.1 sketch K, the inside
projection is the distance from the inside surface of the vessel to the inside edge of the
nozzle. This distance must be less than the shell thickness.

When a jacketed vessel has a nozzle with inside projection, jacket calculations
use the shell parameters. When a nozzle does not have an inside projection, jacket
calculations place the nozzle on the jacket.

[Link] 124/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Limits (Diameter)

Enter the maximum diameter for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. For
example:

Where two nozzles are close together and the reinforcements overlap.

A vessel seam for which you do not want to take an available area reduction.

Limits (Thickness)

Enter the maximum thickness for material contributing to nozzle reinforcement. For
example, where a studding pad or nozzle stub do not extend normal to the vessel wall as
far as the thickness limit of the nozzle calculation.

Overriding Weight

Enter a weight if the nozzle is significantly different from a standard weight nozzle. The
weight overrides the software-calculated weight that is based on other entered values and
internal tables of typical weights.

[Link] 125/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Pad or Hub Properties (Nozzle Main Tab)

Pad Material

Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Pad Diameter / Width

Enter the diameter of the pad. The diameter of the pad is the length along the vessel shell,
not the projected diameter around the nozzle.

Alternatively, you can enter in the width of the pad. The software then calculates the pad
diameter.

Pad Thickness

Enter the thickness of the pad. Any allowances for external corrosion should be taken into
account for the pad thickness.

[Link] 126/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Groove Weld Depth

Enter the total depth of the groove weld between the pad and the nozzle neck. Most
groove welds are full penetration welds. The depth of the weld is the same as the
thickness of the pad. If the pad is attached with a partial penetration weld, enter the depth
of the partial penetration. If the pad is attached with a fillet weld, enter zero.

Weld Leg at Pad OD

Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the pad outside diameter and the shell.
If any part of this weld falls outside the diameter limit, only the part of the weld inside the
diameter limit is included in the available area.

[Link] 127/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

For VIII-1 split pads, multiply A5 by 0.75 per UG-37(h)

Select to indicate that, with ASME VIII-1 split pads, the software multiplies area A5 by .75
for every UG-37 (h) used. ASME VIII-1 Nozzle F Factor specifies the nozzle F factor in
paragraph UG-37 of ASME VIII-1.

Hub Thickness

Defines the thickness of the thicker part of the nozzle at the base, equal to (Nozzle OD at
the base - Nozzle ID at the base)/2. The value must be greater than 0.

1 - Hub Thickness

2 - Hub Height

3 - Bevel Height

4 - Shell Outer Surface

q - Bevel Angle

Hub Height

Defines the hub height, measured from the shell surface and equal to (overall length - nut
relief height - flange thickness - raised face dimension). The value must be greater than 0.

[Link] 128/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1 - Hub Thickness

2 - Hub Height

3 - Bevel Height

4 - Shell Outer Surface

q - Bevel Angle

Bevel Height

Defines the bevel height. The value must be greater than 0.

1 - Hub Thickness

2 - Hub Height

3 - Bevel Height

4 - Shell Outer Surface

q - Bevel Angle

Obtain ASME Bevel Angle

For a hub nozzle with a type F Nozzle Attachment, limits the bevel angle to:

30° for ASME VIII-1

45° for ASME VIII-2

The software recalculates Hub Height and Bevel Height based on the ASME limits.

[Link] 129/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1 - Hub Thickness

2 - Hub Height

3 - Bevel Height

4 - Shell Surface

q - Bevel Angle

Additional Weld Data (Nozzle Main Tab)

Nozzle to Shell Outside Fillet Weld Leg

Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the nozzle and the pad or the nozzle
and the outside shell.

Nozzle to Shell Inside Fillet Weld Leg

Enter the size of one leg of the fillet weld between the inward nozzle and the inside shell.

[Link] 130/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Nozzle to Shell Groove Weld Depth

Enter the total depth of the groove weld between the nozzle and the vessel. Most groove
welds are full penetration welds. The depth of the weld is the same as the thickness of the
pad. If the pad is attached with a partial penetration weld, enter the depth of the partial
penetration. If the pad is attached with a fillet weld, enter zero.

ASME VIII-1 Weld Type

Select one of the following ASME VIII Division 1 weld types:

(a), (b), (c), (d), (e), (f-1), (f-2), (f-3), (f-4), (g), (x-1), (y-1), (z-1) - For these weld detail
sketches, according to UW-16.1, the software does not perform the weld strength
calculation. In these cases, the code does not require weld strength/path calculations for
full penetration groove welds for pressure loadings.

(a-1), (i), (j), (k), (l), (q), (x-2), (y-2), (z-2) - For these weld types, the software performs the
additional weld size calculations according to UW-16(d)(1).

None - The software performs the calculation regardless of the type of weld.

[Link] 131/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Some sketches, such as UW-16.1 (k) or UG-40 (n), show that the nozzle does not
completely extend to the inner surface of the shell. In these cases, be sure to enter
the correct value for Projection Inside.

These options are only available when you select Division 1 as the Design Code.

Miscellaneous (Nozzle Main Tab)

Flange Class

Select the pressure rating class for the ANSI B16.5 or DIN flange, based on the pressure
rating class for the attached nozzle. Select 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, 2500, NP6,
NP10, NP24, NP40, NP63, NP100, or None.

Flange Grade

Specifies the flange material grade group. ASME B16.5-2003 and ASME B16.5-1996
flange grades are available.

ANSI B16.5 contains advisories on the use of some material grades. Review
those cautionary notes in the ANSI B16.5 code.

Table 1A List of Material Specifications (ASME B16.5-2003)

Material Group Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates

1.1 C-Si A 105

A 216 Gr. WCB A 515 Gr. 70
C-Mn-Si A 350 Gr. LF2
A 516 Gr. 70
A 537 Cl. 1
C-Mn-Si-V A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.1
3½ Ni A 350 Gr. LF3

C-Mn-Si A 316 Gr. WCC

1.2
A 352 Gr. LCC
C-Mn-Si-V
A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.2
2½Ni A 352 Gr. LC2 A 203 Gr. B
3½Ni A 352 Gr. LC3 A 203 Gr. E

A 352 Gr. LCB

1.3 C-Si A 515 Gr. 65
C-Mn-Si A 516 Gr. 65
2 ½Ni A 203 Gr. A
3 ½Ni A 203 Gr. D
A 217 Gr. WC1
C-½Mo
A 352 Gr. LC1

[Link] 132/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

C-Si A 515 Gr. 60

1.4
C-Mn-Si A 350 Gr. LF1 Cl. 1 A 516 Gr. 60

A 204 Gr. A
1.5 C-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F1
A 204 Gr. B

½C-½Mo
1.7 A 182 Gr. F2
Ni-½Cr-½Mo A 217 Gr. WC4
¾Ni-¾Cr-1Mo A 217 Gr. WC5

1¼Cr-½Mo
1.9 A 217 Gr. WC6 A 387 Gr. 11
1¼Cr-½Mo-Si A 182 Gr. F11 Cl.2
Cl.2

A 387 Gr. 22
1.10 2¼Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F22 Cl.3 A 217 Gr. WC9
Cl.2

1.11 Cr-½Mo A 204 Gr. C

1.13 5Cr-½Mo A 182 Gr. F5a A 217 Gr. C5

1.14 9Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F9 A 217 Gr. C12

A 387 Gr. 91
1.15 9Cr-1Mo-V A 182 Gr. F91 A 217 Gr. C12A
Cl.2

1Cr-½Mo A 182 Gr. F12 Cl.2

1.17
5Cr-½Mo A 182 Gr. F5

A 240 Gr. 304

A 182 Gr. F304 A 351 Gr. CF3
2.1 18Cr-8Ni A 240 Gr.
A 182 Gr. F304H A 351 Gr. CF8
304H

16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A 351 Gr. CF3M A 240 Gr. 316

A 182 Gr. F316
2.2 A 351 Gr. CF8M A 240 Gr.
A 182 Gr. F316H
18Cr-13Ni-3Mo 316H
A 182 Gr. F317
19Cr-10Ni-3Mo A 351 Gr. CG8M A 240 Gr. 317

A 240 Gr.
18Cr-8Ni A 182 Gr. F304L 304L
2.3
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A 182 Gr. F316L A 240 Gr.
316L

A 240 Gr. 321

A 182 Gr. F321
2.4 18Cr-10Ni-Ti A 240 Gr.
A 182 Gr. F321H
321H

[Link] 133/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

A 240 Gr. 347

A 182 Gr. F347 A 240 Gr.
2.5 18Cr-10Ni-Cb
A 182 Gr. F347H 347H
A 182 Gr. F348 A 240 Gr. 348
A 182 Gr. F348H A 240 Gr.
348H

A 240 Gr.
2.6 23Cr-12Ni
309H

A 240 Gr.
2.7 25Cr-20Ni A 182 Gr. F310
310H

A 240 Gr.
S31254
A 351 Gr.
20Cr-18Ni-6Mo A 240 Gr.
2.8 A 182 Gr. F44 CK3McuN
22Cr-5Ni-3Mo-N S31803
A 182 Gr. F51
25Cr-7Ni-4Mo-N A 240 Gr.
A 182 Gr. F53
24Cr-10Ni-4Mo-V S32750
A 351 Gr. CE8MN
25Cr-5Ni-2Mo-3Cu
A 351 Gr. CD4Mcu
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-W-Cb
A 351 Gr.
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-N-Cu-W
CD3MWCuN
A 240 Gr.
S32760

A 240 Gr.
23Cr-12Ni 309S
2.9
25Cr-20Ni A 240 Gr.
310S

A 351 Gr. CH8

2.10 25Cr-12Ni
A 351 Gr. CH20

2.11 18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 351 Gr. CF8C

2.12 25Cr-20Ni A 351 Gr. CK20

B 463 Gr.
3.1 35Ni-35Fe-10Cr-Cb B 462 Gr. N08020
N08020

B 162 Gr.
3.2 99.0Ni B 160 Gr. N02200
N02200

B 162 Gr.
3.3 99.0Ni-Low C B 160 Gr. N02201
N02201

67Ni-30Cu B 564 Gr. N04400 B 127 Gr.

3.4
67Ni-30Cu-S B 164 Gr. N04405 N04400

B 168 Gr.
3.5 72Ni-15Cr-8Fe B 564 Gr. N06600
N06600

[Link] 134/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

B 409 Gr.
3.6 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 564 Gr. N08800
N08800

B 333 Gr.
65Ni-28Mo-2Fe B 462 Gr. N10665 N10665
3.7
64Ni-29.5Mo-2Cr-2Fe-Mn-W B 462 Gr. N10675 B 333 Gr.
N10675

B 575 Gr.
N10276
B 443 Gr.
N06625
54Ni-16Mo-15Cr B 564 Gr. N10276 B 333 Gr.
3.8
60Ni-22Cr-9Mo-3.5Cb B 564 Gr. N06625 N10001
62Ni-28Mo-5Fe B 335 Gr. N10001 B 434 Gr.
70Ni-16Mo-7Cr-5Fe B 573 Gr. N10003 N10003
61Ni-16Mo-16Cr B 574 Gr. N06455 B 575 Gr.
42Ni-21.5Cr-3Mo-2.3Cu B 564 Gr. N08825 N06455
55Ni-21Cr-13.5Mo B 462 Gr. N06022 B 424 Gr.
55Ni-23Cr-16Mo-1.6Cu B 462 Gr. N06200 N08825
B 575 Gr.
N06022
B 575 Gr.
N06200

B 435 Gr.
3.9 47Ni-22Cr-9Mo-I8Fe B 572 Gr. N06002
N06002

B 599 Gr.
3.10 25Ni-46Fe-21Cr-5Mo B 672 Gr. N08700
N08700

B 625 Gr.
3.11 44Fe-25Ni-21Cr-Mo B 649 Gr. N08904
N08904

B 620 Gr.
N08320
26Ni-43Fe-22Cr-5Mo B 621 Gr. N08320
3.12 B 582 Gr.
47Ni-22Cr-20Fe-7Mo B 581 Gr. N06985
N06985
46Fe-24Ni-21Cr-6Mo-Cu-N B 462 Gr. N08367 A 351 Gr. CN3MN
B 688 Gr.
N08367

B 582 Gr.
49Ni-25Cr-18Fe-6Mo B 581 Gr. N06975 N06975
3.13
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu-Low C B 462 Gr. N08031 B 625 Gr.
N08031

B 582 Gr.
47Ni-22Cr-19Fe-6Mo B 581 Gr. N06007 N06007
3.14
40Ni-29Cr-15Fe-5Mo B 462 Gr. N06030 B 582 Gr.
N06030

B 409 Gr.
3.15 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 564 Gr. N08810
N08810

[Link] 135/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

B 536 Gr.
3.16 35Ni-19Cr-1¼Si B 511 Gr. N08330
N08330

3.17 29Ni-20.5Cr-3.5Cu-2.5Mo A 351 Gr. CN7M

Table 1A List of Material Specifications (ASME B16.5-1996)

Material Group Nominal Designation Forgings Castings Plates

C-Si A 105 A 515 Gr. 70

1.1 A 216 Gr. WCB
C-Mn-Si A 350 Gr. LF2 A 516 Gr. 70
A 216 Gr. WCC
C-Mn-Si-V A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.1 A 537 Cl. 1

C-Mn-Si
1.2 A 350 Gr. LF 6 Cl.2 A 352 Gr. LCC A 203 Gr. B
C-Mn-Si-V
A 352 Gr. LC2 A 203 Gr. E
21/2Ni
A 350 Gr. LF3 A 352 Gr. LC3
31/2Ni

C-Si A 515 Gr. 65

1.3 A 352 Gr. LCB
C-Mn-Si A 516 Gr. 65
21/2Ni A 203 Gr. A
31/2Ni A 203 Gr. D

C-Si A 515 Gr. 60

1.4 A 350 Gr. LF1 Cl. 1
C-Mn-Si A 516 Gr. 60

A 204 Gr. A
1.5 C-1/2Mo A 182 Gr. F1 A 217 Gr. WC1
A 204 Gr. B
A 352 Gr. LC1
A 204 Gr. C

C-1/2Mo
1.7 A 182 Gr. F2 A 217 Gr. WC4
1/2Cr-1/2Mo
A 217 Gr. WC5
Ni-1/2Cr-1/2Mo
3/4Ni-3/4Cr-1Mo

1Cr-1/2Mo A 387 Gr. 11

1.9 A 182 Gr. F12 Cl.2 A 217 Gr. WC6
11/4Cr-1/2Mo Cl.2
A 182 Gr. F11 Cl.2
11/4Cr-1/2Mo-Si

A 387 Gr. 22
1.10 21/4Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F22 Cl.3 A 217 Gr. WC9
Cl.2

A 182 Gr. F5
1.13 5Cr-1/2Mo A 217 Gr. C5
A 182 Gr. F5a

1.14 9Cr-1Mo A 182 Gr. F9 A 217 Gr. C12

[Link] 136/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

A 387 Gr. 91
1.15 9Cr-1Mo-V A 182 Gr. F91 A 217 Gr. C12A
Cl.2

A 240 Gr. 304

A 182 Gr. F304 A 351 Gr. CF3
2.1 18Cr-8Ni A 240 Gr.
A 182 Gr. F304H A 351 Gr. CF8
304H

A 240 Gr. 316

16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A 351 Gr. CF3M
2.2 A 182 Gr. F316 A 240 Gr.
18Cr-13Ni-3Mo A 351 Gr. CF8M
A 182 Gr. F316H 316H
19Cr-10Ni-3Mo A 351 Gr. CG8M
A 240 Gr. 317

A 240 Gr.
18Cr-8Ni A 182 Gr. F304L 304L
2.3
16Cr-12Ni-2Mo A 182 Gr. F316L A 240 Gr.
316L

A 240 Gr. 321

A 182 Gr. F321
2.4 18Cr-10Ni-Ti A 240 Gr.
A 182 Gr. F321H
321H

A 240 Gr. 347

A 182 Gr. F347 A 240 Gr.
2.5 18Cr-10Ni-Cb A 351 Gr. CF8C
A 182 Gr. F347H 347H
A 182 Gr. F348 A 240 Gr. 348
A 182 Gr. F348H A 240 Gr.
348H

A 240 Gr.
2.6 25Cr-12Ni A 351 Gr. CH8 309S

23Cr-12Ni A 351 Gr. CH20 A 240 Gr.

309H

A 240 Gr.
310S
2.7 25Cr-20Ni A 182 Gr. F310 A 351 Gr. CK20
A 240 Gr.
310H

A 240 Gr.
A 351 Gr. S31254
20Cr-18Ni-6Mo
2.8 A 182 Gr. F44 CK3McuN A 240 Gr.
22Cr-5Ni-3Mo-N
A 182 Gr. F51 A 351 Gr. CE8MN S31803
25Cr-7Ni-4Mo-N
A 182 Gr. F53 A 351 Gr. CD4Mcu A 240 Gr.
24Cr-10Ni-4Mo-V
A 182 Gr. F55 A 351 Gr. S32750
25Cr-5Ni-2Mo-3Cu
CD3MWCuN A 240 Gr.
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-W-Cb
S32760
25Cr-7Ni-3.5Mo-N-Cu-W

B 463 Gr.
3.1 35Ni-35Fe-20Cr-Cb B 462 Gr. N08020
N08020

[Link] 137/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

B 162 Gr.
3.2 99.0Ni B 160 Gr. N02200
N02200

B 162 Gr.
3.3 99.0Ni-Low C B 160 Gr. N02201
N02201

67Ni-30Cu B 564 Gr. N04400 B 127 Gr.

3.4
67Ni-30Cu-S B 164 Gr. N04405 N04400

B 168 Gr.
3.5 72Ni-15Cr-8Fe B 564 Gr. N06600
N06600

B 409 Gr.
3.6 33Ni-42Fe-21Cr B 564 Gr. N08800
N08800

B 333 Gr.
3.7 65Ni-28Mo-2Fe B 335 Gr. N10665
N10665

B 575 Gr.
N10276
B 443 Gr.
54Ni-16Mo-15Cr B 564 Gr. N10276 N06625
3.8
60Ni-22Cr-9Mo-3.5Cb B 564 Gr. N06625 B 333 Gr.
62Ni-28Mo-5Fe B 335 Gr. N10001 N10001
70Ni-16Mo-7Cr-5Fe B 573 Gr. N10003 B 434 Gr.
61Ni-16Mo-16Cr B 574 Gr. N06455 N10003
42Ni-21.5Cr-3Mo-2.3Cu B 564 Gr. N08825 B 575 Gr.
N06455
B 424 Gr.
N08825

Flange Material

Enter the name of the material. This software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. Alternatively, you can
click Matl... to select a material directly from the Material Database dialog box.

Flange Type

Select the flange type: Weld Neck, Long WN, Lap Joint, Slip On, Socket Weld,
Threaded, Studding Outlet, FFWn, FFSo, FFThrd, RTJWn, Clpg-Thrd, Clpg-Sw, or
None. This value is not used in the analysis, but is printed in reports.

[Link] 138/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Neglect Areas

Select how the area contributed by the shell or nozzle is handled. Some vessel design
specifications mandate that no credit be taken for the area contributed by the shell or
nozzle. Select one of the following:

A1 - Exclude the available area in the vessel wall.

A2 - Exclude available area in the nozzle wall.

A1 A2 - Exclude the available areas in both the vessel and nozzle walls.

ACWLD - Exclude the available area in the cover weld.

None - Include all areas.

Tapped Hole Area Loss

Specifies the area S to exclude when holes are tapped into studding outlets and other
similar connection elements. The traditional industry standard is to increase the area
required by the tapped hole area loss. This field is generic. It is up to you to determine the
lost area.

As an example, the table shows values for tapped area loss adapted from the Pressure
Vessel Design Manual:

ds (in) S (in2)

5/8 1.280

3/4 1.840

7/8 2.500

1 3.280

1 1/8 4.150

[Link] 139/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1 1/4 5.120

1 3/8 6.200

1 1/2 7.380

1 5/8 8.660

1 3/4 10.05

1 7/8 11.55

2 13.10

2 1/4 16.60

[Link] 140/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Nozzle Eff.

Enter the longitudinal seam efficiency of the nozzle neck. For nozzle wall thickness
calculations, the seam efficiency is always 1.0. For more information see the definition of E
in the ASME Code, paragraph UG-37, and Interpretation VIII-89-171 of the A-90 addenda.

In the 2015 edition of the ASME VIII-1 Code, it was made clear that for wall thickness
calculations, allowable stresses based on seamless material are to be used. For welded
pipe and tube material that refers to note G24 in ASME VIII-1, the stress values will be
divided by 0.85.

The nozzle material joint efficiency is used to reduce the area available in the nozzle wall
per figure UG-37.

Shell Eff.

Enter the joint efficiency of the shell seam. The seam efficiency is used in "area available"
calculations to reduce the area available in the shell. For shell wall thickness calculations,

[Link] 141/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

the seam efficiency is always 1.0. The software accounts for the case where the nozzle
passes through a weld by asking for the joint efficiency of the weld.

C Factor

Enter the PD 5500 C factor used in nozzle compensation calculations. This factor accounts
for the possibility of external loads. When external loads are negligible, the C factor should
not be more than 1.1. When the nozzle is connected to a piping system, where forces and
moments are considered, the C factor should not be greater than 1.0. For vessels
operating in the creep range, C should be less than or equal to 1.

Local Shell Thk.

If your vessel has insert plates, enter the thickness of the plate. Use this value for vessels
having insert plates that are thicker than the surrounding shell. This value is greater than
the course thickness of the shell. If the area immediately adjacent to the opening is
corroded to a greater degree or locally thinner than the rest of the shell, enter the thinner
value. The greater of this value and the element thickness is used in nozzle reinforcement
calculations.

User Tr

Enter the minimum required shell thickness tr, the actual thickness of the shell or head
minus the corrosion allowance. For some vessel designs, the nozzle reinforcement is
governed by bending and normal stresses in the local shell area. Under special conditions,
project requirements specify that full area replacement for nozzle reinforcement is
required. This value replaces the value that the software normally calculates for the
required thickness based on internal or external pressure.

Optionally, for vertical vessels, select Consider External Loads for Nozzle Tr in
the Nozzle Design Options section of the Load Cases tab. The software determines the
maximum thickness based on the highest stress ratio and uses that value for tr if it governs
over the required thickness based on internal or external pressure.

Blind Attached

Select if there is a blind on the nozzle flange. This is used only to determine the weight of
the nozzle. There is no structural effect.

[Link] 142/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Manway/Acs Ope?

Select if this is a manway, access, or inspection opening to bypass the UG-45 minimum
nozzle neck thickness requirement. In these cases, paragraph UG-45 states that the
minimum thickness requirement according to UG-45 is not required. This option is not
used for PD 5500.

Fatigue Calc?

Select to perform a fatigue analysis of the nozzle-to-shell weld. Along with specification of
Weld Class for PD 5500 and EN 13445 models, the number and magnitude of fatigue
pressure stress cycles must be specified in Fatigue Analysis on the Load Cases tab.

The table below provides descriptions for ASME VIII Division 2 and later fatigue curves.

Table Description

Fatigue Curve for Carbon, Low Alloy, Series 4XX, High

Table 3-F.1 Alloy, and High Tensile Strength Steels for Temperatures
Not Exceeding 700°F — suts £ 80 ksi

Fatigue Curve for Carbon, Low Alloy, Series 4XX, High

Table 3-F.2 Alloy, and High Tensile Strength Steels for Temperatures
Not Exceeding 700°F — suts = 115 ksi to 130 ksi

Fatigue Curve for Series 3XX High Alloy Steels, Nickel–

Chromium–Iron Alloy, Nickel–Iron–Chromium Alloy, and
Table 3-F.3
Nickel–Copper Alloy for Temperatures Not Exceeding
800°F

Fatigue Curve for Wrought 70–30 Copper–Nickel for

Table 3-F.4
Temperatures Not Exceeding 700°F — sys £ 18 ksi

Fatigue Curve for Wrought 70–30 Copper–Nickel for

Table 3-F.5
Temperatures Not Exceeding 700°F — sys = 30 ksi

[Link] 143/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Fatigue Curve for Wrought 70–30 Copper–Nickel for

Table 3-F.6
Temperatures Not Exceeding 700°F — sys = 45 ksi

Fatigue Curve for Nickel–Chromium–Molybdenum–Iron,

Table 3-F.7 Alloys X, G, C-4, and C-276 for Temperatures Not
Exceeding 800°F

Fatigue Curve for High Strength Bolting for Temperatures

Table 3-F.8
Not Exceeding 700°F - Maximum Nominal Stress £ 2.7SM

Fatigue Curve for High Strength Bolting for Temperatures

Table 3-F.9
Not Exceeding 700°F - Maximum Nominal Stress > 2.7SM

Weld Class

Select a weld class when Fatigue Calc? is selected. The weld classes, descriptions, and
illustrations are found in PD 5500 Annex C. Class C is the least severe, while Class W is
the most severe. This entry is only available for PD 5500 and EN 13445 models.

Piping Attached

Click to open the Drain Piping Input Dialog Box to set the nozzle piping coordinates.

Drain Piping Input Dialog Box

Specifies coordinates for the drain piping (nozzle) extending from the head element.

Piping Attached to this Nozzle?

Select to enable the drain piping input boxes on the dialog box.

Piping Exit Angle [Alpha]

Enter the angle (in degrees) at which the nozzle piping extends from the head. Use the
Plan View diagram to determine the layout angle. For nozzles on the bottom of the vessel,
the angle degrees increase in a clockwise direction. For nozzles on the top of the vessel,
the angle degrees increase in a counter-clockwise direction.

[Link] 144/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The Plan View diagram is a top view of the vessel. The dashed-line nozzle
indicates that the nozzle is on the bottom of the vessel.

Bend Radius Multiplier

Enter a value to indicate the amount of bend on the radius of the nozzle piping. The
greater the value you enter, the greater the bend of the piping.

Horizontal Run Length [xR]

Enter the length of the nozzle piping as indicated in the Plan View diagram.

Centerline Distance to Tangent [xL]

Enter the distance from the centerline of the nozzle piping to the tangent of the head
element as indicated in the Side View diagram.

Derate Flange MAWP if Externally Loaded?

Check this option to allow a particular nozzle ANSI flange to have its MAWP derated if
external loads are present. Use of the flange derating is up to the discretion and
experience of the designer. Select the ANSI Flange Pressure Reduction Options method in
the Load Cases tab under the Nozzle Design Options.

Quick Results

Displays a report of the nozzle results.

Local Stress Analysis Tab (Nozzle Input/Analysis Dialog)

Defines loading information for nozzle stress analysis. Local loads are entered for stress
analysis according to PD 5500. Local or global loads are entered for stress analysis
according to the WRC 107/537 and WRC 297 bulletins. The software also checks global
loads against ASME VIII-2 allowables. Loads are categorized as sustained, expansion,
and occasional.

In 2010 WRC bulletin 537 was released. The results of the local stress calculation
of this bulletin are effectively identical to that of WRC bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the dimensionless curves found in bulletin 107. Please
review the Forward in bulletin 537 for more information.

Calculation Method

[Link] 145/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Specifies the analysis method. Select PD 5500, WRC 107, WRC 297, EN 13445 Section
16, or No Calculation. The appropriate force,moment, and factor fields display for the
selected method. When you change the method, the software automatically converts loads
into the respective coordinate systems used by each method.

PD 5500 Annex G Analysis

WRC 107/537 Analysis - Local Load Convention
WRC 107/537 Analysis - Global Load Convention
WRC 297 Analysis
EN 13445 Section 16 Analysis

Load Convention System

Select Local to defined loads locally with respect to the vessel and the nozzle, having the
benefit of being independent of the orientation of the vessel. Select Global to use the
global coordinate system.

This option is only available when WRC 107/537 is selected for Calculation Method.

Loading

Click to select the loading project from the Excel load table workbook. Select Project A
Loadings or Australian User Loadings, EN User Loadings, or a user created loading
project.

CAESAR II

Click to import nozzle loads from a CAESAR II .C2 file. This command is only available
when Global is selected for Load Convention System and when CAESAR II is installed.
CAESAR II is a separately-purchased Intergraph product.

Node #

Enter the node number of the nozzle used in CAESAR II.

Computed Stress Intensities/Ratios at the Nozzle Edge and Pad Edge

Displays the calculated stress intensities and stress ratios for Vessel at Nozzle Edge,
Vessel at Pad Edge, and In Nozzle at Vessel. For example:

[Link] 146/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Fatigue Pressure/Cycle and Cyclic Temperature Dialog

Performs simplified fatigue analysis according to EN 13445 Section 17.

Quick Results

Click to see a report of local stress analysis quick results.

Nozzle Load Table

Click to open and edit a Microsoft Office Excel workbook with standard nozzle loads that
can be imported into the software. You can modify the nozzle loads for Project A,
Australian, and EN projects in this file, or create your own loading project. These loads are
typically listed in the specifications of many engineering companies. After the needed
nozzle loads are entered in the workbook, then these loads can be imported and applied to
a nozzle depending upon its size and rating. This saves time and reduces chances of
error. A default sample workbook is provided.

Theoretical Max Loads per Annex G.2.8

Displays the theoretical maximum loads according to PD 5500 Annex G.2.8.

Annex G.2.8 analysis is nearly identical to EN 13445 Section 16 Analysis with some
exceptions. This method calculates various stresses and combines them in a unity check
fashion. Calculations are made at the edge of the reinforcing pad (if any) and at the edge
of the nozzle. An equivalent thickness at the edge of the nozzle is computed when a
reinforcing element is present.

PD 5500 Annex G Analysis

Define values for the following options when you select PD 5500 for Calculation Method.
The software calculates stresses in cylindrical or spherical geometries with or without
reinforcing pads. Only stresses for round hollow nozzle geometries are calculated.

The example in PD 5500 Annex W does not calculate the membrane stress
at attachment edge; you must manually check the membrane stress when selecting the
wall thickness. In addition, the membrane stress calculated at the attachment edge,
according to Annex G, contains intensified stresses due to the presence of the hole.

Loads

Sustained loads (weight+pressure+forces) are used.

The following force/moment convention is used for PD 5500, Annex G:

[Link] 147/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Fr - Radial force
Fc - Shear force
Fl - Shear force
Mc - Moment, Fl axis
Ml - Moment, Fc axis
Mt - Torsional moment

Length "L"

Enter Rl, in the length of the vessel. For vessels without stiffeners or cones this is the
entire vessel length including heads. This value is used along with Tangent Offset
Distance to calculate the equivalent length for off center loading.

Tangent Offset Distance

Enter Dx, in the distance of the centerline of the nozzle from the left tangent line or
appropriate line of support. This value is used in conjunction with the Length "L" to
calculate the equivalent length for off center loading.

Allowable Stress Intensity Factors at Nozzle Edge

Factor for Membrane Stresses

Enter the stress intensity factor. This factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain
the allowable stress for the maximum membrane stress intensity. These stresses are in
rows 32, 33 and 34 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex W. This factor normally has
a value of 1.2 or lower at the edge of the reinforcement pad.

[Link] 148/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

This factor is higher than Factor for Membrane Stresses at pad edge.

This entry is only available when Print Membrane Stress at Nozzle Edge is
selected.

Factor for Membrane + Bend Stresses

Enter the stress intensity factor. This factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain
the allowable stress for the maximum membrane plus bending stress intensity. These
stresses are in rows 27, 28 and 29 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex G. This factor
normally has a value of 2.25 or lower. At the pad edge, this factor is normally 2.0.

Print Membrane Stress at Nozzle Edge

Select to calculate membrane stress at the attachment junction. You must also enter a
value for Factor for Membrane Stresses.

Allowable Stress Intensity Factors at Pad Edge

Factor for Membrane Stresses

Enter the stress intensity factor. This factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain
the allowable stress for the maximum membrane stress intensity. These stresses are in
rows 32, 33 and 34 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex W. This entry normally has a
value of 1.2 or lower at the edge of the reinforcement pad.

Factor for Membrane + Bend Stresses

Enter the stress intensity factor. This factor is multiplied by the allowable stress f to obtain
the allowable stress for the maximum membrane plus bending stress intensity. These
stresses are in rows 27, 28 and 29 in the printout samples in PD 5500 Annex G. At the
nozzle edge, this factor normally has a value of 2.25 or lower. At the pad edge, this factor
is normally 2.0.

WRC 107/537 Analysis - Local Load Convention

Define values for the following options when you select WRC 107/537 for Calculation
Method and Local for Load Convention System. Local has the benefit of being
independent of the orientation of the vessel. The software calculates stresses for
sustained, expansion, and occasional loads and compares stress intensities to allowables.

You can enter values in the following load sets:

[Link] 149/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Sustained - (SUS) Primary loads, typically weight + pressure + forces.

Expansion - (EXP) Secondary thermal expansion loads.

Occasional - (OCC) Irregularly occurring loads such as wind loads, seismic loads,
and water hammer.

The following WRC 107/537 force/moment convention is used for a cylindrical vessel:

P - Radial force
Vc - Circumferential shear force
Vl - Longitudinal shear force
Mc - Circumferential moment
Ml - Longitudinal moment
Mt - Torsional moment

The following WRC 107/537 force/moment convention is used for a spherical vessel:

P - Radial force
V1 - Shear force, B to A
V2 - Shear force, D to C
M1 - Moment, B axis
M2 - Moment, C axis
Mt - Torsional moment

Optionally, if you would like the most conservative results when a nozzle is on a
spherical head element, do not define the individual component values of V1, M1, V2, and
M2. You can instead use:

V1 = 0.5(V12 + V22), the resultant value of shear

M1 = 0.5(M12 + M22), the resultant value of moment

[Link] 150/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Occasional Press Difference

Enter the difference between the peak pressure of the system and the system design
pressure. The value is always positive or zero. This value is superimposed onto the
system design pressure to evaluate the primary membrane stress due to occasional loads.
The additional thrust load due to this pressure difference is accounted for in the nozzle
radial loading if you also select Include Pressure Thrust.

Include Pressure Thrust

Select to include the pressure thrust force (P*A) in the nozzle axial load.

Use Division 2 Stress Indices

Select to include the pressure stress indices described in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2 Table AD-
560.7. This value should only be used to perform a fatigue analysis. Check ASME VIII
Div.2 paragraph AD-160 s to see if the fatigue effect needs to be considered. These factors
are used for estimating the peak stress intensity due to internal pressure.

Peak stress intensity due to external loads is included in the analysis by selecting
Use Kn and Kb (to find SCF). For normal (elastic) analysis, do not select this option
or Use Kn and Kb (to find SCF).

The software does not perform the complete fatigue analysis of Section VIII Div.2
Appendix 4 and 5 rules. Instead, the value of peak stress intensity is reported for
fatigue effect comparison.

Use WRC 368

Select to compute pressure stresses in the shell and nozzle according to WRC 368. WRC
368 provides a method for calculating stresses in a cylinder-to-cylinder intersection (such
as cylinder-to-nozzle) due to internal pressure and pressure thrust loading.

Using WRC 368 with WRC 107/297 is not accurate for calculating the
combined stress from pressure and external loads. So, this option is only available
when the attachment type is round and when no external loads are specified.

Use Kn and Kb (to find SCF)

Select to include the WRC 107/537 Appendix B stress concentration factors (Kn and Kb) in
a fatigue analysis. This value should only be used to perform a fatigue analysis. Check

[Link] 151/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

ASME VIII Div.2 paragraph AD-160 s to see if the fatigue effect needs to be considered.
Also enter the needed value for Fillet Radius Nozzle or Fillet Radius Pad.

Peak stress intensity due to internal pressure is included in the analysis by selecting
Include Pressure Stress Indices per Div. 2?.

For normal (elastic) analysis, do not select this option or Use Division 2 Stress
Indices.

The software does not perform the complete fatigue analysis of Section VIII Div.2
Appendix 4 and 5 rules. Instead, the value of peak stress intensity is reported for
fatigue effect comparison.

Fillet Radius Nozzle

Enter the fillet radius between the nozzle and the vessel shell. The software uses this
value to calculate the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb according to Appendix B of
the WRC 107 bulletin. A value of 0 sets Kn and Kb to 1.0.

Fillet Radius Pad

Enter the fillet radius between the pad and the vessel shell. The software uses this value to
calculate the stress concentration factors Kn and Kb for the vessel/pad intersection,
according to Appendix B of the WRC 107 bulletin. A value of 0 sets Kn and Kb to 1.0.

WRC 107/537 Analysis - Global Load Convention

Define values for the following options when you select WRC 107/537 for Calculation
Method and Global for Load Convention System. Global has the benefit of using the
global coordinate system also used by other analyses. When you toggle between the
global and local convention systems, the software converts the loads. Options for the
global load convention are the same as for WRC 107/537 Analysis - Local Load
Convention, except as described below.

Direction Cosines

Displays the direction cosines as described below. You do not usually need to change
these values.

The following global convention system is used for a cylindrical vessel:

[Link] 152/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The vessel direction is +Y direction

The nozzle direction is +X direction (towards
the vessel)

Direction cosines of the vessel are:

VX - 0

VY - 1

VZ - 0

Direction cosines of the nozzle are:

NX - 1

NY - 0

NZ - 0

The following global convention system is used for a spherical vessel:

The direction of a spherical vessel is from

points B to A

The software uses these direction vectors to transfer the global forces and moments from
the global convention into the traditional WRC107 convention.

Optionally, if you would like the most conservative results when a nozzle is on a
spherical head element, do not define the individual component values of V1, M1, V2, and
M2. You can instead use:

V1 = 0.5(V12 + V22), the resultant value of shear

[Link] 153/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

M1 = 0.5(M12 + M22), the resultant value of moment

WRC 297 Analysis

Define values for the following options when you select WRC 297 for Calculation Method.
The software calculates stresses in cylindrical nozzles attached to cylindrical shells.

Loads

Sustained loads (weight+pressure+forces) are used.

The following force/moment convention is used for WRC 297:

P - Radial Force
Vc - Shear Force, D to C
Vl - Shear Force, B to A
Mc - Moment, B axis
Ml - Moment, C axis
Mt - Torsional moment

Stress Concentration Factors

Shell Stress Concentration Factor

Enter a value, typically between 1 and 3, for stress concentration due to weld quality and
dimensions in the immediate vicinity of the weld. The stress concentration factor:

Accounts for peak stresses - local stress risers in the immediate vicinity of vessel
welds due to factors such as sharp corners and lack of fillet weld radii. Peak stresses
are considered in fatigue analysis.

Applies to the stress calculations in the vessel and the nozzle on both the inside and
the outside of the vessel.

Is used in pressure stress calculations in the vessel on both the inside and outside of
the vessel.

Nozzle Stress Concentration Factor

[Link] 154/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Enter a value, typically between 1 and 3, for stress concentration due to weld quality and
dimensions in the immediate vicinity of the weld. The stress concentration factor:

Accounts for peak stresses - local stress risers in the immediate vicinity of vessel
welds due to factors such as sharp corners and lack of fillet weld radii. Peak stresses
are considered in fatigue analysis.

Applies to the stress calculations in the vessel and the nozzle on both the inside and
the outside of the vessel.

Is not used in pressure stress calculations.

Include Pressure Thrust

Select to include the pressure thrust force (P*A) in the nozzle axial load.

Use Division 2 Stress Indices

Select to include the pressure stress indices described in ASME Sec. VIII Div. 2 Table AD-
560.7. This value should only be used to perform a fatigue analysis. Check ASME VIII
Div.2 paragraph AD-160 s to see if the fatigue effect needs to be considered. These factors
are used for estimating the peak stress intensity due to internal pressure.

Peak stress intensity due to external loads is included in the analysis by selecting
Use Kn and Kb (to find SCF). For normal (elastic) analysis, do not select this option
or Use Kn and Kb (to find SCF).

The software does not perform the complete fatigue analysis of Section VIII Div.2
Appendix 4 and 5 rules. Instead, the value of peak stress intensity is reported for
fatigue effect comparison.

EN 13445 Section 16 Analysis

Define values for the following options when you select EN 13445 Section 16 for
Calculation Method. The software computes the stress concentration factors from graphs
based on the physical geometry or uses explicitly defined values.

Loads

Sustained loads (weight+pressure+forces) are used.

EN 13445 Section G uses the following force and moment conventions:

[Link] 155/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Fr - Radial force
Fc - Shear force
Fl - Shear force
Mc - Moment, Fl axis
Ml - Moment, Fc axis
Mt - Torsional moment

Weight
Home tab: Details > Weight

Adds piping and miscellaneous weight to the selected cylinder or head element. This is
weight that cannot be accounted for in other commands. The weight is a static mass, not
an applied force, but affects the natural frequency of the vessel and axial stress
calculations. Piping weight is modeled here. The area and mass of the piping are
considered in the same manner as a weight.

Previous Weight

If you created more than one weight on the element, click to go back to the previous
weight.

Go To Next Weight

If you created more than one weight on the element, click to go to the next weight.

Add New Weight

[Link] 156/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Click to add a new weight to the shell or head element.

Delete

Deletes all data for the current weight.

Common Detail Parameters

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

New Weight Description

Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

[Link] 157/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

[Link] 158/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

[Link] 159/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Layout Angle
Specifies the angle between the designated zero degree reference direction on the vessel
and the centerline of the nozzle at the point where it is attached to the shell.

For a horizontal vessel, the zero degree line is at 12:00 (looking at a clock); 90 degrees is
at 3:00. Entering these layout angles is important if the horizontal vessel has a liquid level
and the nozzles are being designed using Design P + Static Head, selected for
Nozzle/clip design pressure options on the Load Cases tab. For a vertical vessel, the
angle is more arbitrary. For purposes of rendering the graphics, the assumption is that the
zero degree line is at 3:00 and 90 degrees is 12:00.

The position of the zero degree reference direction (North, West or East) and the angular
rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) are set in Tools tab, Set Configuration
Parameters , Default Value Settings Tab (Configuration Dialog).

If the new orientation is different from the orientation of the current model, the software
asks to update the model with the new settings. If the settings are updated, the weights
and areas of platforms must be recalculated:

Click Detail List . On the Detail Listing dialog box, click the Platform tab so that
platform data is visible. Click Platform Wind Area and Platform Weight to
recalculate.

Click Platform for each platform. Tab through the fields in the Platform dialog
box, causing the weight and area to be recalculated

[Link] 160/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The angular settings apply to nozzles, clips, legs, lifting lugs, support lugs, base
rings, platforms, weights and half-pipe jackets.

Examples

Default Orientation

Angle Position: North

Rotation Direction: Clockwise

Offset from Element Centerline

Enter the distance of this weight from the centerline of vessel. The value is multiplied by
the weight to obtain a moment that used in stress calculations. For horizontal vessels, the
weight is added to the saddle loads and this value is not used.

[Link] 161/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Miscellaneous Weight
Enter the weight for items such as: an attached motor or other equipment, internal piping,
or external structural elements. This value is also used for seismic analysis.

Select the Active Cases for this Weight/Mass

Select the active case for the current weight/mass. You can select any combination of
empty, operating, and hydro test cases.

Is this a Welded Internal?

Select if the weight is for an item that is welded to the vessel during shop construction. The
weight is then added to the fabricated total weight, other weights that are functions of the
fabricated total weight, and the empty total weight.

Area of External Weight/Piping/Equipment

Enter the area to use for the wind load calculation.

Piping Detail
Select Is this a Piping Detail? to include the weight and moment of overhead pipelines on
vertical pressure vessels. Define the area and weight of the piping with the following
options:

Pipe Lookup - Click to open the Seamless Pipe Selection dialog box and select
values from the piping database for Pipe Schedule and Nominal Pipe Diameter.

Pipe Outer Diameter - Displays the OD for the pipe selected in Pipe Lookup. You
can also manually enter a value.

Pipe Thickness - Displays the nominal thickness for the pipe selected in Pipe
Lookup. You can also manually enter a value.

Fluid Specific Gravity - Enter the specific gravity of the contained fluid. This value is
usually 1.0.

Insulation Thickness - If the pipe is insulated, enter the thickness of the insulation.
If there is no insulation, enter 0.

Insulation Density - Enter the density of the pipe insulation to calculate the weight
of the insulation and the moment effect.

[Link] 162/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Compute Weight and Area - Click to calculate the pipe weight and area based on
the entered values.

After weights and offsets are entered, the software calculates the overturning moment due
to the eccentricity of the piping. In most designs, the piping is supported by means of
braces and clips at specified intervals. The element on which the piping weight is added
takes the applied load.

If piping is specified on a top head, the software attempts to graphically connect

the piping to the center-most nozzle.

Pipe Lookup

Click to open the Seamless Pipe Selection dialog box and select values from the piping
database for Pipe Schedule and Nominal Pipe Diameter.

Pipe Outside Diameter

Displays the OD for the pipe selected in Pipe Lookup. You can also manually enter a
value.

Pipe Thickness

Displays the nominal thickness for the pipe selected in Pipe Lookup. You can also
manually enter a value.

Fluid Specific Gravity

Enter the specific gravity of the contained fluid. This value is usually 1.0.

Insulation Thickness

If the pipe is insulated, enter the thickness of the insulation. If there is no insulation, enter
0.

Insulation Density (2)

Enter the density of the pipe insulation to calculate the weight of the insulation and the
moment effect.

[Link] 163/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Compute Weight and Area

Click to calculate the pipe weight and area based on the entered values.

Force and Moment

Home tab: Details > Force and Moment

Adds external forces and moments to the selected cylinder or head element. In most cases
these are operating loads imposed on the vessel, such as piping loads on nozzles.

Previous For/Mom

If you created more than one force/moment set on the element, click to go back to the
previous set.

Go To Next For/Mom

If you created more than one force/moment set on the element, click to go to the next set.

Add New For/Mom

Click to add a new force/moment set to the shell or head element.

Delete

Deletes all data for the current force/moment set.

Common Detail Parameters

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

New Force/Moment Description

Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

[Link] 164/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

[Link] 165/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

[Link] 166/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Applied Forces - X
Enter the force in each needed direction. For X, positive is from left to right. For Y, positive
is upward. For Z, positive is towards you. Forces perpendicular to the vessel are resolved

[Link] 167/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

into a single vector and applied with live load to create the worst load combination. Unlike
Weight, applied forces are not included in seismic analysis because force does not have
mass.

You should generally enter negative Y forces (downward) because these increase
the loads on the saddles and other supports.

Applied Forces - Y
Enter the force in each needed direction. For X, positive is from left to right. For Y, positive
is upward. For Z, positive is towards you. Forces perpendicular to the vessel are resolved
into a single vector and applied with live load to create the worst load combination. Unlike
Weight, applied forces are not included in seismic analysis because force does not have
mass.

You should generally enter negative Y forces (downward) because these increase
the loads on the saddles and other supports.

Applied Forces - Z
Enter the force in each needed direction. For X, positive is from left to right. For Y, positive
is upward. For Z, positive is towards you. Forces perpendicular to the vessel are resolved
into a single vector and applied with live load to create the worst load combination. Unlike
Weight, applied forces are not included in seismic analysis because force does not have
mass.

You should generally enter negative Y forces (downward) because these increase
the loads on the saddles and other supports.

Applied Moments - X
Enter the moment about each needed axis. For X, positive is from left to right. For Y,
positive is upward. For Z, positive is towards you.

Applied Moments - Y
Enter the moment about each needed axis. For X, positive is from left to right. For Y,
positive is upward. For Z, positive is towards you.

[Link] 168/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Applied Moments - Z
Enter the moment about each needed axis. For X, positive is from left to right. For Y,
positive is upward. For Z, positive is towards you.

Compute Stresses Due to Applied Loads

Select one or both of the following:

Compute Longitudinal Stresses BW normally added to the Wind Case - Forces

and moments act during wind analysis.

Compute Longitudinal Stresses BS normally added to the Seismic Case -

Forces and moments act during seismic analysis.

You must select at least one option.

Force/Moment Combination Method

Select the method for resolving forces and moments about the support point:

SRSS - All forces and moments act in the same direction. The software takes the
absolute value of the entered loads to determine the overall effect on the structure.
This method, while not technically correct, yields a conservative result for bending
stresses and support calculations.

Algebraic - Forces and moments act in their positive or negative directions. Loads
that oppose each other tend to cancel out. If you have an accurate account of the
external forces and moments, due to load conditions such as piping reactions, this
option provides more accurate and less conservative results. The software sums the
forces and moments in both the X and Z planes for vertical vessels. The greater of
the two moments is used in calculations of the stresses and moments at the support.

Packing
Home tab: Details > Packing

Adds packing data to the selected element.

Previous Packing

If you created more than one set of packing data on the element, click to go back to the
previous set.

[Link] 169/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Go To Next Packing

If you created more than one set of packing data on the element, click to go to the next
set.

Add New Packing

Click to add a new set of packing data to the shell or head element.

Delete

Deletes all data for the current set of packing data.

Common Detail Parameters

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

New Packing Description

Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

[Link] 170/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

[Link] 171/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

[Link] 172/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Height of Packed Section

Enter the height of the packed section along the element. This value is used to calculate
the weight of the packed section. For seismic calculations, the weight center of the packed
section is taken at half this height. In the rare case of a packed horizontal vessel, the value
is the length of the packed section.

Full
If the element is fully filled with packing material, click to calculate the values of Distance
from "From" Node and Height of Packed Section.

Density of Packing
Enter the density of the packing. The following table list typical densities in lbs/ft3:

[Link] 173/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Size (in.) Density (lb/ft3) Size (in.) Density (lb/ft3)

Ceramic Raschig Ring Carbon Raschig Ring

1/4 60.0 1/4 46.0

3/8 61.0 1/2 27.0

1/2 55.0 3/4 34.0

5/8 56.0 1 27.0

3/4 50.0 1 1/4 31.0

1 42.0 1 1/2 34.0

1 1/4 46.0 2 27.0

1 1/2 46.0 3 23.0

2 41.0 Carbon Steel Pall Ring

3 37.0 5/8 37.0

4 36.0 1 30.0

Carbon Steel Raschig Ring 1 1/2 26.0

1/4 133.0 2 24.0

[Link] 174/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

3/8 94.0 Plastic Pall Ring

1/2 75.0 5/8 7.25

5/8 62.0 1 5.50

3/4 52.0 1 1/2 4.75

1 39.0 2 4.50

1 1/2 42.0 3 4.50

2 37.0

3 25.0

Packing in place during the field hydrotest?

Select this option if the packing will be in place when the field hydrotest is performed.

Percent Volume Hold Up

Enter a percentage value between 0 and 100 for the amount of liquid that the packing
retains. Using this value and Liquid Specific Gravity, the software calculates the weight
of liquid trapped in the packing and adds the weight to the operating weight of the vessel.

Liquid Specific Gravity

Enter the specific gravity of the liquid trapped in the packing. For more information, see
Liquid Density. Using this value and Percent Volume Hold Up, the software calculates
the weight of liquid trapped in the packing and adds the weight to the operating weight of
the vessel.

[Link] 175/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

On a Head
Specifies that the vessel head contains packing.

This option displays on the Packing tab of the Detail Listing dialog.

Platform
Home tab: Details > Platform

Adds a platform to the selected element.

Previous

If you created more than one platform on the element, click to go back to the previous
platform.

Next Platform

If you created more than one platform on the element, click to go to the next platform.

Add Platform

Click to add a new platform to the shell or head element.

Delete

Deletes all data for the current platform.

Common Detail Parameters

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

New Platform Description

Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

[Link] 176/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Non-Circular Platform?
Specifies a rectangular platform. The behavior of Non-Circular Platform? depends on the
type of vessel element:

The option is selected by default and unavailable when you select a horizontal
cylinder. You can only create a rectangular platform on a horizontal cylinder.

The option is cleared by default and unavailable if the platform detail is added to a
vertical cylinder. You can only create a circular platform on a vertical cylinder.

The option is cleared by default and available when you select a top head element.
You can create a circular or rectangular platform on a top head.

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

[Link] 177/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

[Link] 178/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

[Link] 179/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Layout Angle
For a non-circular platform, enter the rotation angle through the centerline of the platform.
For example, on a non-circular top head platform:

Platform Start Angle

For a circular platform, enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the
vessel and the start angle of the platform.

Platform End Angle

For a circular platform, enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the
vessel and the ending angle of the platform.

[Link] 180/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Platform Railing Weight

Enter the weight of the platform railing in units of weight/length. This value is used as part
of calculating the weight of the platform.

Platform Grating Weight

Enter the weight of the platform deck grating or plate in units of weight/area. This value is
used as part of calculating the weight of the platform. To use standard weights, click
and select Open Lattice Grating or Checkered Floor Plate.

Platform Width
Enter the radial width of the platform. This dimension is used to calculate the weight of the
platform in conjunction with Platform Railing Weight and Platform Grating Weight.

Platform Height
Enter the height from the bottom of the platform to the top rail. Usually this distance is to
be no less than 42 inches. This dimension is used to calculate the wind area of the
platform in conjunction with Platform Width, Clearance, and Force Coefficient Cf.

Offset from End

For a non-circular top head platform, enter the offset as shown below. The software uses
the offset to calculate the distance to the center of the platform. This is then used as the
offset dimension to calculate the eccentric moment for the platform. This value is used in a
.DXF drawing of the vessel when Export is used.

[Link] 181/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Clearance
For circular platforms, enter the distance between the inside edge of the platform and the
outside surface of the cylindrical shell. The platform clearance is used to calculate the wind
area of the platform.

For a circular top head platform, enter 0.

Platform Length (Non-Circular)

For a non-circular top head platform, enter the long dimension of the platform.

[Link] 182/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Force Coefficient Cf
Enter the platform force coefficient Cf. This coefficient may be specified in a wind load
computation standard, such as Table 6-9 of ASCE7-95. The value is typically between 1.2
and 1.8. This factor is used to calculate the wind area of the platform in conjunction with
the Platform Height, Platform Width, and Clearance.

Platform Wind Area

Enter the tributary wind area of the platform. This value is typically the greatest span of the
platform perpendicular to the vessel multiplied by a nominal platform height of between 12
and 36 inches on the hand rails and other equipment on the platform.

To change the platform wind area calculation method, click Installation | Misc. Options
on the Load Cases Tab of the main window. The methods are:

a. The height times the width times the force coefficient (conservative).

b. One-half of the floor plate area times the force coefficient.

c. The height times the width times the force coefficient divided by three.

d. The projected area of the platform times the force coefficient divided by three. This
option yields the same results as option 3 for platforms that have a sweep angle of
greater than 180º.

Control Options
Select one or more of these options:

[Link] 183/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Do not include platform in analysis

Select to remove platform data from analysis.

User computes and enters the platform area

Select to manually enter a value in Platform Wind Area and override software platform
area calculations.

User computes and enters the platform weight

Select to manually enter a value in Platform and Ladder Weight and override software
platform weight calculations.

Ladder Layout Angle

Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel and the centerline
of the ladder.

Ladder Start Elevation

Enter the start elevation of the ladder. This value and Ladder Stop Elevation are used to
determine the overall length of the ladder. The software assumes that the top of the ladder
is attached to the platform.

Ladder Stop Elevation

Enter the stop elevation of the ladder. This value and Ladder Start Elevation are used to
determine the overall length of the ladder. The software assumes that the top of the ladder
is attached to the platform.

Ladder Unit Weight

Enter the unit weight of the ladder in units of weight/length. For example, in English units
this is typically the weight of a one-foot ladder section. The software does not differentiate
between a caged and a non-caged ladder, so the total weight of a ladder and cage must
be included in this value. The total ladder and platform weight at the platform elevation is
used in the calculations.

Is this a Caged Ladder?

Select if the ladder has a cage.

[Link] 184/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Platform and Ladder Weight

Enter the total weight of the platform, ladders, and associated hardware. This overrides
weight calculated automatically by the software.

Saddle
Home tab: Details > Saddle

Adds a saddle to the selected horizontal cylinder element. The size and location of the
saddles are important for Zick calculations of local stresses on horizontal vessels with
saddle supports. For proper Zick analysis, only two saddles may be defined; however, they
do not have to be symmetrically placed about the center axis of the vessel. If no saddles
are defined, dead load and live load calculations are not performed.

Previous Saddle

If you created more than one saddle on the element, click to go back to the previous
saddle.

Go To Next Saddle

If you created more than one saddle on the element, click to go to the next saddle.

Add New Saddle

Click to add a new saddle to the shell element.

Delete

Deletes all data for the current saddle.

Add Saddle Ring

Click to open the Stiffening Ring dialog to add a ring to the saddle.

Select Saddle

Click to display and then select a source for saddle dimension data. Saddle dimension
data is maintained in the [Link] Microsoft Excel workbook located in the PV Elite
System folder. After selecting the saddle data source, the software uses the value of the
inside or outside diameter from the General Input tab to populate the Saddle Dialog with
the saddle dimensions.

Same as First

[Link] 185/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Click to copy all data from the first saddle to the current saddle.

Saddle Data Table

Click to open and edit the [Link] Microsoft Excel workbook. Use this file to modify
data for the default saddle dimensions source (Moss) or create a new source. The saddle
dimension sources display when you click Select Saddle. Once a source is selected, the
dimension values automatically populate on the Saddle Dialog based upon the vessel's
diameter. This saves time and reduces chances of error.

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

Detail Description
Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

[Link] 186/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

[Link] 187/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

[Link] 188/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Saddle Width
Enter the width of the saddle support. This value does not include any wear pad on the
vessel side, and is used primarily for the Zick analysis of horizontal vessels on saddle
supports.

[Link] 189/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Saddle Dimension a
Enter the distance between the centerline of the saddle support and the tangent line of the
nearest head. This dimension is labeled A in most pressure vessel texts.

Centerline Dimension B
Enter the distance from the base of the saddle to the centerline of the vessel, referred to
as dimension B in some pressure vessel texts. This value is used to determine additional
saddle loads due to wind or seismic events.

[Link] 190/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Saddle Contact Angle

Enter the angle between the two contact points ("horns") of the saddle, measured from the
axial center of the vessel. This value typically ranges from 120.0º to 150.0º.

Wear Plate Width

Enter the width of the wear plate between the vessel and the saddle support. This value is
used primarily for the Zick analysis of horizontal vessels on saddle supports.

[Link] 191/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Wear Plate Thickness

Enter the thickness of the wear plate between the vessels and the saddle support. This
value is used primarily for the Zick analysis of horizontal vessels on saddle supports.

Wear Plate Contact Angle

Enter the angle contained from one edge of the wear plate to the other edge, measured
from the axial center of the vessel. Typically this value is approximately 130º.

[Link] 192/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Height of Section Ring

If a custom fabricated composite (usually T type) stiffener is used over the saddle
supports, enter the height from the shell surface to the top of the stiffener. This value will
be used to compute the stress at the tip of the stiffener. If a horizontal vessel does not
have stiffeners over the saddle supports, enter 0. If you selected a stiffener from the AISC
structural steel database in the Stiffening Ring dialog box, enter 0. In this case, the
software gets the ring height from the AISC database.

Friction Coefficient Mu
Enter the coefficient of friction mu between the base of the saddle and the supporting
foundation, piers or structure. A frictionless surface has a mu value of 0. Other typical
values are in the range of 0.3 to 0.5.

Moment Factor, Ftr

Enter the moment factor for calculating the saddle reaction force due to the wind or
earthquake transverse load. The recommended value is 3.

The value of 6 is conservative in that it assumes that the maximum edge load is uniform
across the entire base, when realistically it occurs only at the edge. A more accurate
method converts this triangular loading into a more realistic uniform load, leading to the
value of 3. The following figure shows an end view of a horizontal vessel with a transverse
load, simulating wind/seismic loading:

[Link] 193/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The saddle reaction load Fst (or Fwt for wind) due to the transverse load Ft is:

Fst (or Fwt) = (Saddle Moment Factor) * Ft * B / E

Dimension E at base
Enter the dimension of the baseplate that is less than the distance in contact with the
supporting surface. Dimension E addresses the saddle reaction force due to wind or
seismic force when the baseplate distance dimension has a different distance in contact
with the supporting surface. This entry is optional.

Tangent to Tangent Distance

Enter the length of the cylindrical shell measured from tangent line to tangent line for a
vessel with curved heads or from inner face to inner face for vessels with flat covers or
tubesheets. For most horizontal vessels comprised of dished ends and cylinders that are
not heat exchangers, PV Elite can determine this value and you can leave the value set to
zero. For vessels that have cones, tubesheets, and so forth, you must manually enter this
value.

Circ Eff over Saddle

Enter the circumferential efficiency in the plane of the saddle.

[Link] 194/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

When you create a shell by welding the ends together, there is a longitudinal weld. If that
weld is at the saddle, there are bending moment stress.

Circ Eff at Midspan

Enter circumferential efficiency at the mid-span.

When you create a shell by welding the ends together, there is a longitudinal weld. If that
weld is between saddles, there are bending moment stress.

Wear Plate and Shell Matls are the same?

Select if the wear plate and shell materials are the same.

Is this Saddle Welded to the Shell?

Select if the saddle is welded to the shell.

Perform Saddle Check?

Select to add rib, web, and baseplate data, and perform a structural analysis of the saddle.

Saddle Allowable Stress

Enter the saddle allowable stress. Alternatively, click Matl... to select a material directly
from the Material Database dialog box.

Material Yield Stress

Enter the yield stress for the saddles at their design temperature. Alternatively, click Matl...
to select a material directly from the Material Database dialog box.

E for Plates

Enter the modulus of elasticity E for the saddle material.

Baseplate Length

Enter the long dimension of the baseplate in the direction of the vessel diameter.

[Link] 195/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Baseplate Thickness

Enter the thickness of the baseplate.

Baseplate Width

Enter the short dimension (the width) of the baseplate.

Number of Ribs

Enter the number of ribs on one saddle, running parallel to the long axis of the vessel.

Rib Thickness

Enter the thickness of the rib supports.

[Link] 196/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Web Thickness

Enter the thickness of the web. The web is the vertical plate between the baseplate and
the wear plate, to which the ribs are attached.

Height of Center Web

Enter the height of the center web as it extends from the baseplate to the shell inside
diameter (ID). Think of this value as the column height of all material above the baseplate
to the inside of the pressure vessel, including the Wear Plate Thickness and the Shell
Thickness. The software uses this value to determine if the centerline of the saddle may
fail if the vessel fails at that specific location.

Web Location

Select the web location relative to the saddle baseplate and wear plate. Select Center,
Side - Left, or Side - Right.

Perform Anchor Bolts Calculations?

Select to add anchor bolt data, and perform anchor bolt and baseplate calculations. Enter
values for the options below.

[Link] 197/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

PV Elite performs anchor bolt calculations for horizontal vessel saddle supports
and skirt and leg baseplate supports. This analysis determines the uplift on the saddle
supports due to the external loads on the vessel. Loadings include defined forces and
moments and wind and seismic loads. If the vessel is in uplift, the required area of the
bolts is determined. More information on this analysis is found in the Pressure Vessel
Design Manual by Dennis R. Moss, 1997 and later editions. In addition to calculation of the
required bolt area, this method also calculates the required thickness of the baseplate due
to the applied bolt load. In some cases the bolt load controls the thickness of the saddle
baseplate.

Saddle Bolted to Steel Foundation?

Select if the saddles are bolted to a steel substructure.

Number of Bolts

Enter the total number of bolts to be used on the baseplate. The bolts are assumed to be
at the edge of the baseplate along the short side.

Num of Bolts in Tension

Enter the number of bolts in tension, generally the total number of bolts divided by two.

Edge Distance

Enter the distance from the edge of the baseplate to the centerline of the bolts along the
Baseplate Length.

[Link] 198/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Bolt Corrosion Allowance

Enter the bolt corrosion allowance (BCA). If the bolt corrosion allowance specified is a
"total", then divide it by two; otherwise this calculation will be overly conservative. When
dealing with bolt corrosion, the following equation is used to calculate the equivalent bolt
OD and corresponding reduced area of the bolt:

BOD = ( BLTAREA * 4.0 / Õ )1/2 - 2.0 * BCA

Bolt Material

Enter the bolt material. Alternatively, click Matl... to select a material directly from the
Material Database dialog box.

Bolt Allowable Stress

Enter the allowable stress of the bolt. If you select a material directly from the Material
Database dialog box for Bolt Material, the software provides the allowable stress at
ambient temperature. If you need the allowable at an elevated temperature (such as for an
insulated vessel), then you must enter the allowable stress at that temperature.

Thread Series

Enter the thread series identifier:

TEMA - 8 thread series, adapted from the TEMA Standard

TEMA Metric

UNC - Unified National Course Threads, adapted from Mark's Handbook

BS 3643

SABS 1700

[Link] 199/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

User Defined Root Area - Also enter a value for the root area of a single bolt in Bolt
Root Area. This information can be obtained from a standard engineering handbook.

Nominal Bolt Diameter

Select the nominal bolt diameter. In general this value ranges from 1/2 inch to 4 inches.

Bolt Root Area

For nonstandard or metric bolts, enter the root cross-sectional area of the bolt. If you have
entered a value for Bolt Corrosion Allowance, the software modifies the area of the bolt
using the equation described above.

Optional Moments for Saddle Analysis

According to definitions in ASME VIII-2 4.15.6, defines values for the following optional
moments:

Moment M1

Net-section maximum longitudinal bending moment at the saddle support. The moment is
negative when it results in a tensile stress at the top of the shell.

Moment M2

Net-section maximum longitudinal bending moment between the saddle support. The
moment is negative when it results in a tensile stress at the top of the shell.

The saddle analysis used in PV Elite can be either the method outlined in ASME VIII-2
paragraph 4.15.3 or PD 5500 Annex G. Both of these analyses are based on the original
method outlined in the September 1951 Paper by L.P. Zick, Stresses in Large Horizontal
Cylindrical Pressure Vessels on Two Saddle Supports. This paper first appeared in the The
Welding Journal Research Supplement. The basis of the analysis is a typical pressure
vessel with ellipsoidal, torispherical or hemispherical heads at either end, and cylindrical
sections in the middle. The two saddle supports are assumed to be equidistant from the
ends. With these assumptions, the bending moments between the saddles and over the
saddles can be calculated.

Unfortunately, the geometry of many vessels and exchangers do not fall in line with these
assumptions. As a result, the analysis of these vessels may produce moments that are not
correct with regard to the original Zick formulas. The software allows the optional input of
Moment M1 and Moment M2, as defined in ASME VIII-2 4.15.3, for both the operating

[Link] 200/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

and hydrotest conditions. If Moment M1 and Moment M2 are zero, moments are
calculated based on the design information provided in the Saddle dialog. If Moment M1
and Moment M2 are non-zero, these moment values are used, overriding the calculated
moments. Moment M1 and Moment M2 can be positive or negative.

According to ASME VIII-2, paragraph [Link], the moments are calculated for equidistant
saddles with a ≤ 0.25L. If the relationship between a and L is not maintained, the moments
should be calculated using an appropriate engineering beam type analysis method (such
as shear and moment diagrams). From ASME VIII-2 4.15.6:

a - Distance from the axis of the saddle support to the tangent line on the curve for a
dished head or to the inner face of a flat cover or tubesheet.

L - Length of the cylindrical shell measured from the tangent line for a vessel with
dished ends or from the inner face to inner face for vessels with flat covers or
tubesheets.

These overriding moments are only used in Division 2 saddle analysis and PD
5500 saddle analysis.

Moment M1 - Saddle

Net-section maximum longitudinal bending moment at the saddle support. The moment is
negative when it results in a tensile stress at the top of the shell.

Moment M2 - Saddle

Net-section maximum longitudinal bending moment between the saddle support. The
moment is negative when it results in a tensile stress at the top of the shell.

[Link] 201/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tray
Home tab: Details > Tray

Adds a set of equally spaced trays with a set liquid height to the selected element on a
vertical vessel.

Previous Tray Group

If you created more than one tray set on the element, click to go back to the previous set.

Go To Next Tray Set

If you created more than one tray set on the element, click to go to the next set.

Add New Tray Set

Click to add a new tray set to the element.

Delete

Deletes all data for the current tray set.

Set Default Tray Weight

Sets the value in Tray Weight Per Unit Area as the default weight for new trays added to
the model.

Common Detail Parameters

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

[Link] 202/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

New/Existing Tray Description

Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

[Link] 203/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

[Link] 204/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

[Link] 205/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Number of Trays
Enter the number of trays on the element.

Tray Spacing
Enter the vertical distance between trays.

Tray Weight Per Unit Area

Enter the unit weight of each tray in the set. Do not enter the total weight, because the
software multiplies the unit weight by the cross-sectional area of the element.

Support Ring and Bolting Bar Weight

Enter the support ring and bolting bar weight for each tray in the set.

Height of Liquid on Tray

Enter the height of the liquid on each tray.

Density of Liquid on Tray

Enter the density of the liquid on each tray. For more information, see Liquid Density.

Lug
Home tab: Details > Lug

Adds support lugs to the selected element on a vertical vessel. If no skirt or legs are
defined for a vertical vessel, the lowest set of lugs are used as the vessel support point for
dead load and live load calculations.

Delete

Deletes all data for the lug.

Common Detail Parameters

[Link] 206/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lug Type
Select the type of geometry for the support lug:

Simple geometry with gussets

Gusseted geometry with top plate

Gusseted geometry with continuous top

encirclement ring

[Link] 207/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

Detail Description
Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Lug Start Angle

Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel and the start angle
of the lug.

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

[Link] 208/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

[Link] 209/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

[Link] 210/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Lug Material
Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

[Link] 211/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Number of Lugs
Enter the number of support lugs around the periphery of the vessel at this location.

Dist. from OD to Lug MidPt (dlug)

Enter the radial distance from the wall of the vessel to the midpoint where the lug attaches
to the structural steel.

Force Bearing Width (wfb)

Enter the width of the structure that is in contact with the bottom lug support plate.

Radial Width of Bottom Ring (wpl)

Enter the distance that the bottom support plate extends from the OD of the vessel. This
value must be greater than or equal to Mean Width of Gussets (wgp).

Effective Force Bearing Length (lpl)

For lug types with a bottom plate and no continuous rings (Simple geometry with no
gussets and gusseted geometry with top plate in Lug Type), enter the distance between
gussets plus two times the gusset plate thickness.

For lug types with continuous top and bottom rings (Gusseted geometry with continuous
top encirclement ring in Lug Type), enter the length of the bottom plate located on a
support:

Thickness of Bottom Ring (tpl)

Enter the thickness of the bottom support plate.

Distance Between Gussets (dgp)

Enter the distance between the inside surfaces of the gusset plates.

[Link] 212/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Mean Width of Gussets (wgp)

Enter the mean gusset width, defined as the gusset width at the top plus the gusset width
at the bottom divided by two. The software uses this value to calculate the actual stresses
in the gusset plates.

Height of Gussets (tgp)

Enter the height of one gusset.

Thickness of Gussets (tgp)

Enter the thickness of the gusset plate.

Radial Width of Top Ring (wtp)

Enter the radial dimension from the OD of the shell to the edge of the plate. This value
should be less than or equal to Mean Width of Gussets (wgp).

Thickness of Top Ring (ttp)

Enter the thickness of the top support plate ring that sits above the gussets.

Weight of One Lug

Specifies or displays the weight of the support lug. If you manually enter a weight value,
PV Elite will re-calculate the weight if other design field values are changed in the Support
Lug Input dialog. Click Compute Weight to have PV Elite calculate the lug weight based on
the current design values and display that value here.

Perform WRC 107 Calculation

Select to perform the WRC 107 local stress analysis on a reinforcing pad for the lug. The
software calculates the stresses at the edge of the attachment and the edge of the pad.
Enter values for the width, length, and thickness options.

[Link] 213/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Pad Width
Specifies the pad width as measured along the circumferential direction of the vessel. The
pad width must be greater than attachment width.

Pad Length
Specifies the length of the pad as measured along the long axis of the vessel.

Pad Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the pad. Account for any allowances for external corrosion in the
pad thickness.

Bolt Material
Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

[Link] 214/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Type of Threads
Enter the thread series identifier:

TEMA - 8 thread series, adapted from the TEMA Standard

TEMA Metric

UNC - Unified National Course Threads, adapted from Mark's Handbook

BS 3643

SABS 1700

User Root Area - Also enter a value for the root area of a single bolt in Bolt Root
Area. This information can be obtained from a standard engineering handbook.

Nominal Bolt Diameter

Select the nominal bolt diameter. In general this value ranges from 1/2 inch to 4 inches.

Bolt Root Area

When User Root Area is selected for Type of Threads, enter the root cross-sectional
area of the bolt.

Compute Weight
Click to compute the weight of the lug based on the current design values. The calculated
weight displays in the Weight of One Lug box.

Legs
Home tab: Details > Legs

Adds support legs to the selected element. Legs can be created for a vertical vessel
without a skirt element.

Delete

[Link] 215/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Deletes all data for the legs.

Leg Input Parameters Tab (Leg Dialog Box)

Base Plate Parameters Tab (Leg Dialog Box)

Leg Input Parameters Tab (Leg Dialog Box)

Defines parameters for the legs and leg pads.

Common Detail Parameters

Delete

Deletes all data for the legs.

Leg Centerline Diameter

Enter the distance between the centerlines of two legs on opposing sides of the vessel. If
there are an odd number of legs (therefore, no two legs are opposing), then enter the
diameter of a circle drawn through the centerlines of the legs. Alternatively, click Compute
Centerline Diameter to calculate the value.

Leg Orientation

Select the orientation of the leg cross-section with respect to the centerline. Select:

Strong Axis - The strong axis is perpendicular to the vessel.

Weak Axis - The weak axis is perpendicular to the vessel.

Diagonal - The strong axis is diagonal to the vessel.

Number of Legs

[Link] 216/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Enter the number of legs. You must create at least three legs.

Overall Length of Legs

Enter the distance from the ground to the attachment point of the leg on the vessel.

Effective Leg Length "L"

Enter the effective leg length L, defined as the free length of the leg that is subject to
bending. This is the value that is used in the AISC formula kl/r. This value cannot be
explicitly calculated because there are numerous configurations of legs. If the value is
zero, the software conservatively uses the overall leg length as the effective leg length in
the calculation.

Leg Database

Select the structural specification database to use for leg cross-sections.

Section Identifier

Enter a section name in the format of the specification selected in Leg Database, or click
LookUp to open the Select a Leg Shape dialog box and select a section from the
database.

L - Equal angle

[Link] 217/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

L - Unequal angle

B/D - Double angles with large or small

sides back to back

C/HP/M/MC/S - Channels and other

miscellaneous channels

W - Wide Flanges

ST - Structural Tees

Leg Yield Stress

Enter the yield stress for the legs. Alternatively, click to select a material directly from
the Yield Stress Selection dialog box.

Effective End Condition "K"

Enter the effective end condition K. For pressure vessel legs, a value of 1.0 or 1.5 is
commonly used.

End Condition Theoretical K Recommended K

Fixed - Fixed 0.5 0.65

Fixed - Pinned 0.7 0.80

Fixed - Trans 1.0 1.20

Pinned - Pinned 1.0 1.00

[Link] 218/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Fixed - Rotates 2.0 2.10

Pinned - Rotates 2.0 2.00

Leg Start Angle

Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel and the start angle
of the first leg.

Occasional Load Factor

Enter a factor for irregularly occurring loads. The default value is 1.333.

Perform WRC 107/537 Analysis

Select to perform the WRC 107 local stress analysis on a reinforcing pad between a leg
and the vessel. The software calculates the stresses at the edge of the attachment and the
edge of the pad.

Pad Width

Enter the pad width as measured along the circumferential direction of the vessel. The pad
width must be greater than attachment width.

Pad Length

Enter the length of the pad as measured along the long axis of the vessel.

Pad Thickness

Enter the thickness of the pad.

[Link] 219/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Compute Centerline Diameter

Click to calculate the value for Leg Centerline Diameter based on the element OD,
Number of Legs, the cross-section selected for Section Identifier, and the Pad
Thickness for Perform WRC 107 Analysis.

Are the Legs Cross Braced?

Select if the legs are diagonally braced. Bracing the legs reduces bending and increases
the axial load in the legs.

Are these Pipe Legs?

Select to analyze pipe legs. Also enter values for Pipe Leg Inside Diameter and Pipe Leg
Outside Diameter.

Pipe Leg Inside Diameter

Enter the corroded pipe inside diameter. Alternatively, click to open the Seamless Pipe
Selection dialog box, and select a pipe schedule and nominal diameter.

Pipe Leg Outside Diameter

Enter the corroded pipe outside diameter. Alternatively, click to open the Seamless
Pipe Selection dialog box, and select a pipe schedule and nominal diameter.

This value must be greater than Pipe Leg Inside Diameter. The software uses
these values to calculate moment of inertia, section modulus and radius of gyration for the
legs. These values are used in the AISC unity check and natural frequency calculations.

Vessel Translates during Occasional Load?

Select to calculate a more conservative longitudinal moment when Perform WRC 107
Analysis is also selected.

Employ Directional Check for W and C Types

Select to indicate you want the software to perform an AISC unity check for the leg angles
with W and C types only. When selected, the software calculates additional results for
AISC H1-1 and H1-2 on the Leg Check report.

From Node

Displays the From Node for the selected element.

[Link] 220/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Leg Description

Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

[Link] 221/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

[Link] 222/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

[Link] 223/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Leg Centerline Diameter

Enter the distance between the centerlines of two legs on opposing sides of the vessel. If
there are an odd number of legs (therefore, no two legs are opposing), then enter the
diameter of a circle drawn through the centerlines of the legs. Alternatively, click Compute
Centerline Diameter to calculate the value.

Leg Orientation

Select the orientation of the leg cross-section with respect to the centerline. Select:

Strong Axis - The strong axis is perpendicular to the vessel.

Weak Axis - The weak axis is perpendicular to the vessel.

Diagonal - The strong axis is diagonal to the vessel.

Number of Legs

Enter the number of legs. You must create at least three legs.

Overall Length of Legs

Enter the distance from the ground to the attachment point of the leg on the vessel.

Effective Leg Length "L"

Enter the effective leg length L, defined as the free length of the leg that is subject to
bending. This is the value that is used in the AISC formula kl/r. This value cannot be
explicitly calculated because there are numerous configurations of legs. If the value is

[Link] 224/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

zero, the software conservatively uses the overall leg length as the effective leg length in
the calculation.

Leg Database

Select the structural specification database to use for leg cross-sections.

Section Identifier

Enter a section name in the format of the specification selected in Leg Database, or click
LookUp to open the Select a Leg Shape dialog box and select a section from the
database.

L - Equal angle

L - Unequal angle

B/D - Double angles with large or small

sides back to back

C/HP/M/MC/S - Channels and other

miscellaneous channels

[Link] 225/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

W - Wide Flanges

ST - Structural Tees

Leg Yield Stress

Enter the yield stress for the legs. Alternatively, click to select a material directly from
the Yield Stress Selection dialog box.

Effective End Condition "K"

Enter the effective end condition K. For pressure vessel legs, a value of 1.0 or 1.5 is
commonly used.

End Condition Theoretical K Recommended K

Fixed - Fixed 0.5 0.65

Fixed - Pinned 0.7 0.80

Fixed - Trans 1.0 1.20

Pinned - Pinned 1.0 1.00

Fixed - Rotates 2.0 2.10

Pinned - Rotates 2.0 2.00

Leg Start Angle

Enter the angle between the designated zero degree line of the vessel and the start angle
of the first leg.

[Link] 226/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Occasional Load Factor

Enter a factor for irregularly occurring loads. The default value is 1.333.

Perform WRC 107 Analysis

Select to perform the WRC 107 local stress analysis on a reinforcing pad between a leg
and the vessel. The software calculates the stresses at the edge of the attachment and the
edge of the pad.

Pad Width

Enter the pad width as measured along the circumferential direction of the vessel. The pad
width must be greater than attachment width.

Pad Length

Enter the length of the pad as measured along the long axis of the vessel.

Pad Thickness

Enter the thickness of the pad.

Compute Centerline Diameter

Click to calculate the value for Leg Centerline Diameter based on the element OD,
Number of Legs, the cross-section selected for Section Identifier, and the Pad
Thickness for Perform WRC 107 Analysis.

[Link] 227/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Are the Legs Cross Braced?

Select if the legs are diagonally braced. Bracing the legs reduces bending and increases
the axial load in the legs.

Are these Pipe Legs?

Select to analyze pipe legs. Also enter values for Pipe Leg Inside Diameter and Pipe Leg
Outside Diameter.

Pipe Leg Inside Diameter

Enter the corroded pipe inside diameter. Alternatively, click to open the Seamless Pipe
Selection dialog box, and select a pipe schedule and nominal diameter.

Pipe Leg Outside Diameter

Enter the corroded pipe outside diameter. Alternatively, click to open the Seamless
Pipe Selection dialog box, and select a pipe schedule and nominal diameter.

This value must be greater than Pipe Leg Inside Diameter. The software uses
these values to calculate moment of inertia, section modulus and radius of gyration for the
legs. These values are used in the AISC unity check and natural frequency calculations.

Vessel Translates during Occasional Load?

Select to calculate a more conservative longitudinal moment when Perform WRC 107
Analysis is also selected.

Employ Directional Check for W and C Types

Select to indicate you want the software to perform an AISC unity check for the leg angles
with W and C types only. When selected, the software calculates additional results for
AISC H1-1 and H1-2 on the Leg Check report.

Base Plate Parameters Tab (Leg Dialog Box)

Defines parameters for the leg base plates.

Perform Baseplate Analysis?

[Link] 228/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Select to place a baseplate on the bottom of each leg and analyze baseplate, bolt, and
foundation loads and enter values for the options below. The software assumes the leg is
attached symmetrically on the baseplate.

Length, B

Enter the length along the bolt side.

Width, D

Enter the width.

Thickness

Enter the thickness of the baseplate.

Material

Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Thread Series

Enter the thread series identifier:

TEMA - 8 thread series, adapted from the TEMA Standard

[Link] 229/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

TEMA Metric

UNC - Unified National Course Threads, adapted from Mark's Handbook

BS 3643

SABS 1700

User Root Area - Also enter a value for the root area of a single bolt in Root Area.
This information can be obtained from a standard engineering handbook.

Nominal Diameter

Click and select the nominal bolt diameter from the bolt table selected for Thread
Series. If you have a bolt that is outside of the bolt table ranges, enter the nominal size
and select User Root Area in Thread Series.

For TEMA bolts, the available bolt diameters are:

Bolt Size Bolt Root Area

(inches)

(in2) (cm2)

0 0 0

0.500 0.126 0.8129

0.625 0.202 1.3032

0.750 0.302 1.9484

0.875 0.419 2.7032

1.000 0.551 3.5548

1.125 0.728 4.6968

[Link] 230/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1.250 0.929 5.9935

1.375 1.155 7.4516

1.500 1.405 9.0645

1.625 1.680 10.8387

1.750 1.980 12.7741

1.875 2.304 14.8645

2.000 2.652 17.1096

2.250 3.423 22.0838

2.500 4.292 27.6903

2.750 5.259 33.9290

3.000 6.324 40.7999

3.250 7.487 48.3031

3.500 8.749 56.4450

3.750 10.108 65.2130

4.000 11.566 74.6192

[Link] 231/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

For UNC bolts, the available bolt diameters are:

Bolt Size Bolt Root Area

(inches)

(in2) (cm2)

0 0 0

0.500 0.126 0.8129

0.625 0.202 1.3032

0.750 0.302 1.9484

0.875 0.419 2.7032

1.000 0.551 3.5548

1.125 0.693 4.4710

1.250 0.89 5.7419

1.375 1.054 6.8000

1.500 1.294 8.3484

1.625 1.535 9.9032

1.750 1.744 11.2516

[Link] 232/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1.875 2.041 13.1677

2.000 2.3 14.8387

2.250 3.021 19.4903

2.500 3.716 23.9741

2.750 4.619 29.7999

3.000 5.621 36.2644

3.250 6.721 43.3612

3.500 7.918 51.0838

3.750 9.214 59.4450

4.000 10.608 68.4386

This information is adapted from Jawad and Farr, Structural Analysis and Design
of Process Equipment, pg 425.

Corrosion Allowance

Enter the bolt corrosion allowance. The software uses this value to corrode the radius of
the root area and calculate a corroded root stress area based on the nominal bolt size and
bolt table. This area is then used in the remainder of the bolt load/stress calculations.

The software calculates the required area of the bolt. If the bolt corrosion allowance is
greater than zero, the software adds the corrosion allowance and recalculates the
diameter based on the new required area:

[Link] 233/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Corroded Bolt Root Diameter = (4 * New Bolt Area/Pi)1/2 - 2 * Bolt Corrosion

AllowanceNumber per Baseplate

Enter the number of bolts per baseplate. In most cases, this should be an even number,
but for angle legs, the value can be [Link] software assumes that the bolts are located
along Length, B. The required size of the bolt and the baseplate thickness are looked up
from a table in the Pressure Vessel Design Manual and Pressure Vessel Handbook. There
are no calculations for one bolt.

Number in Tension

Enter the number of bolts in tension under wind, earthquake, and horizontal loads, defined
as the number of bolts along one Length, B side (three bolts in the examples above). If
these load cases are not needed, no value is required.

Distance from Edge to Bolt

Enter the dimension z from the edge of the leg to the centerline of the bolts, measures
along the Width, D side.

Material

Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Root Area

When User Root Area is selected for Thread Series, enter the root cross-sectional area
of the bolt.

Nominal Compressive Strength

Defines the following for the concrete to which the base is bolted:

[Link] 234/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

F'c

The nominal ultimate compressive stress of the concrete. This value is F'c in Jawad and
Farr or FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.

Fc

The allowable compressive stress of the concrete

The steel-to-concrete modulus of elasticity ratio, Eplates/Ec.

Average Values of Properties of Concrete Mixes (adapted from Brownell and Young)

fc
Water Content f'c
Allowable n
(US Gallons 28-day Ultimate
Compressive Modular Ratio
per 94 lb Compressive
Strength = 0.45*f'c (Es/Ec)
Sack of Cement) Strength (psi)
(psi)

7.5 2000 800 15

6.75 2500 1000 12

6 3000 1200 10

5 3750 1400 8

According to Jawad and Farr, Ec is equal to 57000 multiplied by the square root of
f'c psi. The modulus of elasticity of steel is assumed to be 30 x 106.

Perform Baseplate Analysis?

Select to place a baseplate on the bottom of each leg and analyze baseplate, bolt, and
foundation loads and enter values for the options below. The software assumes the leg is
attached symmetrically on the baseplate.

[Link] 235/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Length, B

Enter the length along the bolt side.

Width, D

Enter the width.

Thickness

Enter the thickness of the baseplate.

Material

Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Thread Series

Enter the thread series identifier:

TEMA - 8 thread series, adapted from the TEMA Standard

[Link] 236/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

TEMA Metric

UNC - Unified National Course Threads, adapted from Mark's Handbook

BS 3643

SABS 1700

User Root Area - Also enter a value for the root area of a single bolt in Root Area.
This information can be obtained from a standard engineering handbook.

Nominal Diameter

Click and select the nominal bolt diameter from the bolt table selected for Thread
Series. If you have a bolt that is outside of the bolt table ranges, enter the nominal size
and select User Root Area in Thread Series.

For TEMA bolts, the available bolt diameters are:

Bolt Size Bolt Root Area

(inches)

(in2) (cm2)

0 0 0

0.500 0.126 0.8129

0.625 0.202 1.3032

0.750 0.302 1.9484

0.875 0.419 2.7032

1.000 0.551 3.5548

[Link] 237/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1.125 0.728 4.6968

1.250 0.929 5.9935

1.375 1.155 7.4516

1.500 1.405 9.0645

1.625 1.680 10.8387

1.750 1.980 12.7741

1.875 2.304 14.8645

2.000 2.652 17.1096

2.250 3.423 22.0838

2.500 4.292 27.6903

2.750 5.259 33.9290

3.000 6.324 40.7999

3.250 7.487 48.3031

3.500 8.749 56.4450

3.750 10.108 65.2130

[Link] 238/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

4.000 11.566 74.6192

For UNC bolts, the available bolt diameters are:

Bolt Size Bolt Root Area

(inches)

(in2) (cm2)

0 0 0

0.500 0.126 0.8129

0.625 0.202 1.3032

0.750 0.302 1.9484

0.875 0.419 2.7032

1.000 0.551 3.5548

1.125 0.693 4.4710

1.250 0.89 5.7419

1.375 1.054 6.8000

1.500 1.294 8.3484

1.625 1.535 9.9032

[Link] 239/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1.750 1.744 11.2516

1.875 2.041 13.1677

2.000 2.3 14.8387

2.250 3.021 19.4903

2.500 3.716 23.9741

2.750 4.619 29.7999

3.000 5.621 36.2644

3.250 6.721 43.3612

3.500 7.918 51.0838

3.750 9.214 59.4450

4.000 10.608 68.4386

This information is adapted from Jawad and Farr, Structural Analysis and Design
of Process Equipment, pg 425.

Corrosion Allowance

Enter the bolt corrosion allowance. The software uses this value to corrode the radius of
the root area and calculate a corroded root stress area based on the nominal bolt size and
bolt table. This area is then used in the remainder of the bolt load/stress calculations.

The software calculates the required area of the bolt. If the bolt corrosion allowance is
greater than zero, the software adds the corrosion allowance and recalculates the

[Link] 240/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

diameter based on the new required area:

Corroded Bolt Root Diameter = (4 * New Bolt Area/Pi)1/2 - 2 * Bolt Corrosion Allowance

Number per Baseplate

Enter the number of bolts per baseplate. In most cases, this should be an even number,
but for angle legs, the value can be [Link] software assumes that the bolts are located
along Length, B. The required size of the bolt and the baseplate thickness are looked up
from a table in the Pressure Vessel Design Manual and Pressure Vessel Handbook. There
are no calculations for one bolt.

Number in Tension

Enter the number of bolts in tension under wind, earthquake, and horizontal loads, defined
as the number of bolts along one Length, B side (three bolts in the examples above). If
these load cases are not needed, no value is required.

Distance from Edge to Bolt

Enter the dimension z from the edge of the leg to the centerline of the bolts, measures
along the Width, D side.

Root Area

When User Root Area is selected for Thread Series, enter the root cross-sectional area
of the bolt.

Nominal Compressive Strength

Defines the following for the concrete to which the base is bolted:

F'c

The nominal ultimate compressive stress of the concrete. This value is F'c in Jawad and
Farr or FPC in Meygesy. A typical entry is 3000 psi.

Fc

The allowable compressive stress of the concrete

[Link] 241/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The steel-to-concrete modulus of elasticity ratio, Eplates/Ec.

Average Values of Properties of Concrete Mixes (adapted from Brownell and Young)

fc
Water Content f'c
Allowable n
(US Gallons 28-day Ultimate
Compressive Modular Ratio
per 94 lb Compressive
Strength = 0.45*f'c (Es/Ec)
Sack of Cement) Strength (psi)
(psi)

7.5 2000 800 15

6.75 2500 1000 12

6 3000 1200 10

5 3750 1400 8

According to Jawad and Farr, Ec is equal to 57000 multiplied by the square root of
f'c psi. The modulus of elasticity of steel is assumed to be 30 x 106.

Liquid
Home tab: Details > Liquid

Adds liquid data to the element. Normally, Liquid is used on the bottom head of the
vessel. Each element is then filled with the appropriate amount of liquid. We recommend
that you model the entire vessel before adding liquid data.

Delete

Deletes all data for the liquid.

Full

Click to calculate the values of Distance from "From" Node and the value of Height in
this Element, assuming that the element is completely filled with the defined liquid.

Fill Elements Now

[Link] 242/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Click to fill the vessel to the level specified by Height from Datum. If the height is greater
than the vessel height, the vessel is completely filled. The software assigns detail ID
values using the Liquid Density. To use this command effectively, all elements in the
vessel model should be created first.

Common Detail Parameters

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

Detail Description
Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

[Link] 243/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

Lug

[Link] 244/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance

[Link] 245/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Specific Gravity
See Liquid Density.

Liquid Density
Enter the density or specific gravity of the liquid. Typical specific gravities and densities are
shown below. The densities should be converted if you use another units system.

Name Specific Gravity Density (lb/ft3)

Ethane 0.3564 22.23

Propane 0.5077 31.66

N-butane 0.5844 36.44

Iso-butane 0.5631 35.11

N-Pentane 0.6310 39.35

Iso-Pentane 0.6247 38.96

N-hexane 0.6640 41.41

[Link] 246/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

2- 0.6579 41.03
methypentane

3- 0.6689 41.71
methylpentan
e

2,2- 0.6540 40.78

dimethylbutan
e

2,3- 0.6664 41.56

dimethylbutan
e

N-heptane 0.6882 42.92

2- 0.6830 42.59
methylheptan
e

3- 0.6917 43.13
methylheptan
e

2,2- 0.6782 42.29

dimethylpenta
ne

2,4- 0.6773 42.24

dimethylpenta
ne

[Link] 247/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1,1- 0.7592 47.34

dimethylcyclo
pentane

N-octane 0.7068 44.08

Cyclopentane 0.7504 46.79

Methylcyclope 0.7536 46.99

ntane

Cyclohexane 0.7834 48.85

Methylcyclohe 0.7740 48.27

xane

Benzene 0.8844 55.15

Toluene 0.8718 54.37

Alcohol 0.7900 49.26

Ammonia 0.8900 55.50

Benzine 0.6900 43.03

Gasoline 0.7000 43.65

Kerosene 0.8000 49.89

[Link] 248/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Mineral Oil 0.9200 57.37

Petroleum Oil 0.8200 51.14

Water 1.0 62.4

Height in this Element

Enter the height or length of the liquid on this element. This value is used only to calculate
the weight of the liquid section. For seismic calculations, the weight center of the liquid
section is taken at half this height. The value is also used to calculate the operating
pressure at all points below the liquid.

Height from Datum

Enter the height or length of the liquid from the datum line to the operating or design level.
Normally, Liquid is used on the bottom head of the vessel. Each element is then filled
with the appropriate amount of liquid. It is best to model the entire vessel before adding
liquid data. If a value is entered that is greater than the height of the vessel, the software
completely fills the vessel.

[Link] 249/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Insulation
Home tab: Details > Insulation

Adds insulation to the element.

Delete

Deletes all insulation data.

Full

Click to calculate the values of Distance from "From" Node and the value of Height/Length
of Insulation, assuming that the element is fully covered by the defined insulation.

All

Click to cover the entire vessel with insulation. The software assigns detail ID values using
the defined insulation values. To use this command effectively, all elements in the vessel
model should be created first.

Common Detail Parameters

[Link] 250/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

Detail Description
Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

[Link] 251/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

[Link] 252/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

[Link] 253/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Bottom of the jacket.

Height/Length of Insulation
Enter the height or length of the insulation on the element. This value is used only to
calculate the weight of the insulation. For seismic calculations, the weight center of the
insulated section is taken at half this height. If you have insulation on a horizontal vessel,
the value is the length of the insulated section.

The only software distinction between insulation and lining is that insulation is on
the OD of the element, while lining is on the ID of the element. Use Insulation to add
OD fireproofing, and Lining to add ID fireproofing.

Thickness of Insulation
Enter the thickness of the insulation or fireproofing.

Density of Insulation
Enter the density of the insulation, such as the following typical densities:

Material Type Density

(lbs/ft3)

Calcium Silicate 22.5

Foam Glass 16.0

Mineral Wool 14.0

Glass Fiber 11.0

Asbestos 30.0

Careytemp 18.0

[Link] 254/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Kaylo 10 22.0

Perlite / Celo-temp 1500 23.0

Polyurethane 4.0

Styrofoam 3.0

Type of Insulation
Enter a description for the type of insulation.

Lining
Home tab: Details > Lining

Displays the Lining/Cladding Dialog, where you define parameters for lining and cladding
for the element.

Delete

Deletes all lining data.

Full

Click to calculate the values of Distance from "From" Node and the value of
Height/Length of Lining, assuming that the element is fully covered by the defined lining.

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

Detail Description
Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

[Link] 255/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

[Link] 256/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

[Link] 257/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Height/Length of Lining
Enter the height or length of the lining on this element. This value is used only to calculate
the weight of the lined section. For seismic calculations the weight center of the lined

[Link] 258/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

section will be taken at half this height. If you have a lining in a horizontal vessel, the value
is the length of the lined section.

The only software distinction between insulation and lining is that insulation is on
the OD of the element, while lining is on the ID of the element. Use Insulation to add
OD fireproofing, and Lining to add ID fireproofing.

Thickness of Lining
Enter the thickness of the lining or fireproofing.

Density of Lining
Enter the density of the insulation, lining, or packing, such as the following typical lining
densities:

Material Type Density

(lbs/ft3)

Alumina Brick 170.0

Fire Clay 130.0

High Alumina 130.0

Kaolin 135.0

Magnesite 180.0

Silica 110.0

Insulating Fire Brick 40.0

Concrete 140.0

[Link] 259/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Cement 100.0

Also see Density of Insulation.

Is this welded in metallic cladding or overlay material?

Specifies that welded-in cladding is used. The cladding weight is included in weight
categories such as empty, operating, shop, and erected.

Halfpipe Jacket
Home tab: Details > Halfpipe Jacket

Adds half-pipe jackets to the shell on the selected cylinder element, according to ASME
Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix EE or ASME Section VIII, Division 2, Part 4.11.6.

Half pipe jackets are commonly made by rolling and forming flat bar in a specific radius
and helical curvature that matches that of the parent shell course. These jackets are used
to heat or cool the contents inside of the vessel. For vessels that are under cyclic service,
it is advised that the jacket be attached by both a fillet and full penetration groove weld.

PV Elite performs required thickness and maximum allowable working pressure (Mawp)
calculations for cylindrical shells with half-pipe jackets attached. The analysis is based on
ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Paragraph EE-1, Appendix EE or ASME Section VIII,
Division 1, Part 4.11.6. The analysis is only valid for the cylindrical geometries shown in
Figure EE-4.

[Link] 260/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Additionally, only nominal pipe sizes from 2 to 4 can be used. Although there are no charts
for sizes 2.5 and 3.5, the software accepts these sizes and performs iterations between
the given charts. If the half-pipe is a nonstandard pipe size, or has a formed radius, the
actual radius is used in the calculations.

The software takes full account of corrosion allowance. Actual thickness values and
corrosion allowances are entered, and the software adjusts thicknesses and diameters
when making calculations for the corroded condition.

Delete

Deletes all jacket data.

Quick Results

Displays a report of half pipe jacket analysis results.

Common Detail Parameters

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

Jacket Description
Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

[Link] 261/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

[Link] 262/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

[Link] 263/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Length Along Shell of Jacket Section

Enter the distance that the jacket extends along the length of the shell section. This value
cannot be greater than the specified length of the shell course.

[Link] 264/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Pitch Spacing
Enter the distance between centers of adjacent half-pipes.

Shell Corrosion Allowance in Jacket

Enter the internal corrosion allowance of the half-pipe jacket.

Start Angle
Enter the start angle.

Jacket Design Temperature

Enter the design temperature of the jacket.

Jacket Design Pressure

Enter the design pressure of the fluid inside the jacket.

[Link] 265/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Jacket Material
Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Jacket Corrosion Allowance

Displays the corrosion allowance for the pipe that you selected in Pipe. You can also
manually enter a value.

Pipe
Click to open the Seamless Pipe Selection dialog box and select values from the piping
database for Jacket Corrosion Allowance and Minimum Jacket Thickness.

Minimum Jacket Thickness

Displays the thickness for the pipe that you selected in Pipe. You can also manually enter
a value.

Inside Radius of Formed Jacket

Enter a value for a jacket formed from bar or plate. This value is only used if Formed
Radius Type is selected for Nominal Pipe Size.

Nominal Pipe Size

Select the nominal pipe size of the jacket. Select 2 inch, 3 inch, or 4 inch to use sizes
recognized by Appendix EE. Select 2.5 inch or 3.5 inch to interpolate from Appendix EE
graphs. Select Formed Radius Type for a non-standard jacket, and also enter a value for
Inside Radius of Formed Jacket.

[Link] 266/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Contents Specific Gravity

Enter the specific gravity of any fluid contained within the jacket.

Enter the density or specific gravity of the liquid. Typical specific gravities and densities are
shown below. The densities should be converted if you use another units system.

Name Specific Gravity Density (lb/ft3)

Ethane 0.3564 22.23

Propane 0.5077 31.66

N-butane 0.5844 36.44

Iso-butane 0.5631 35.11

N-Pentane 0.6310 39.35

Iso-Pentane 0.6247 38.96

N-hexane 0.6640 41.41

2- 0.6579 41.03
methypentane

3- 0.6689 41.71
methylpentan
e

2,2- 0.6540 40.78

dimethylbutan
e

[Link] 267/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

2,3- 0.6664 41.56

dimethylbutan
e

N-heptane 0.6882 42.92

2- 0.6830 42.59
methylheptan
e

3- 0.6917 43.13
methylheptan
e

2,2- 0.6782 42.29

dimethylpenta
ne

2,4- 0.6773 42.24

dimethylpenta
ne

1,1- 0.7592 47.34

dimethylcyclo
pentane

N-octane 0.7068 44.08

Cyclopentane 0.7504 46.79

Methylcyclope 0.7536 46.99

ntane

[Link] 268/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Cyclohexane 0.7834 48.85

Methylcyclohe 0.7740 48.27

xane

Benzene 0.8844 55.15

Toluene 0.8718 54.37

Alcohol 0.7900 49.26

Ammonia 0.8900 55.50

Benzine 0.6900 43.03

Gasoline 0.7000 43.65

Kerosene 0.8000 49.89

Mineral Oil 0.9200 57.37

Petroleum Oil 0.8200 51.14

Water 1.0 62.4

Tubesheet Analysis
Home tab: Details > Tubesheet Analysis

Opens the Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input dialog, where you can add a heat exchange
tubesheet to the element.

[Link] 269/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

To build and analyze shell and tube heat exchangers, you must understand the modeling
techniques involved:

First, define and design the pressure envelope or exterior components of the
exchanger first, including all covers, flanges and cylinders. Verify that the design
pressures and temperatures are correctly specified.

Tubesheets are frequently paired to cylinders or flanges. Click on the front end flange
element just to the left of the tubesheet for proper definition, then click Tubesheet
Analysis to define the assembly. Enter data on each tab of the Heat Exchanger
Tubesheet Input dialog. The software dynamically adds or removes tabs depending
on the type of exchanger selected. For example, an exchanger with a floating head
requires more input and displays more tabs than a U-tube type exchanger.

Tubesheets that are either completely integral or integral on the channel side are
attached to the channel cylinder. These tubesheets must have a value for Distance
from "From" Node to define the length of that cylinder because they start at the end
of the channel cylinder.

Verify that the 3D graphic looks like the needed geometry. Use the transparency
feature to see inside of the exchanger. The software does not draw all tubes to
improve performance.

Examples are located in the PV Elite installation folder.

Delete

Deletes all tubesheet data.

HTRI In

Select to open a .dbo HTRI output file.

Tubesheet Type and Design Code Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box)
Tubesheet Properties Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box)
Tube Data Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box)
Expansion Joint Data Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box)
Load Cases Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box)
Floating TubeSheet Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box)
Spherical Cover/Backing Ring Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog Box)

Tubesheet Type and Design Code Tab (Heat Exchanger

[Link] 270/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tubesheet Input Dialog)

General Exchanger Data

Tubesheet Analysis Method

Displays the standard to use for analysis:

TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association

ASME - ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Section UHX or ASME Section VIII, Division
2, Part 4

The option selected in Design Code determines whether the software uses
Division 1 or Division 2.

PD 5500 - Pressure Vessel Code, Section 3.9, Flat Heat Exchanger Tubesheets

EN 13445

Exchanger Type

Select the type of heat exchanger.

U-Tube has only one tubesheet. The tubes are bent in the form of a "U." The bundle
can removed for maintenance, but the inside of the tube is harder to clean because
of the bend.

Fixed has two tubesheets that are fixed at each end of the exchanger and are
connected to each other by straight tubes. Both the tubesheets are stationary, so
differential thermal expansion can develop between the shell and the tubes. An
expansion joint is sometimes required to absorb the thermal growth.

You must select a fixed type of tubesheet exchanger to perform finite

element analysis (FEA) on expansion joints.

[Link] 271/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Floating has one tubesheet that is fixed (stationary) and one that is free to move.
Because one tubesheet floats, any differential thermal expansion between the shell
and tubes is absorbed. This category of exchangers is the most versatile and also
the costliest. Tubes can also be cleaned easily compared to U-tube exchangers.

Expansion Joint Type (if any)

Select the expansion joint type.

No Joint - The exchanger type has no expansion joint type.

Thin Bellows Type - The joint is comprised of a thin bellows that is very flexible and
has low stiffness. Analysis is performed according to ASME Appendix 26 for thin
bellows expansion joint type.

Thick Joint Type (Flanged and Flued) - The joint is comprised of a number of shell
elements that are added together to form the expansion joint. A thick joint is stiffer
than the thin joint and its stiffness must be taken into account. Analysis is performed
according to Appendix 5 guidelines, TEMA or Kopp & Sayre Method. You can also
perform finite element analysis (FEA) on thick expansion joints. For more
information, see Finite Element Analysis (FEA) on ASME or TEMA Expansion Joints
(PV Elite).

Click Vacuum Pressures and Report Options for this Load Case to open the
Report Print Options dialog box, then select Print Intermediate Results for Expansion
Joint Calculations.

[Link] 272/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

ASME or EN 13445

Floating Exchanger Type

Select the type of floating exchanger, as defined in Division 1 and Division 2 of the ASME
code:

Exchanger with an Immersed Floating Head

Exchanger with an Externally Sealed Floating Head

Exchanger with an Internally Sealed Floating Head

Tubesheet/Shell Junction Stress Reduction Option

[Link] 273/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Select the option used to reduce the possible over stress at the junction of the tubesheet
and the integral cylinder. If the U-tube tubesheet is welded to the shell then the integral
cylinder is the shell cylinder and if the tubesheet is welded to the channel then it is the
channel cylinder. The U-tube stress reduction options are displayed below:

Increase Tubesheet Thickness

Increase Integral Cylinder Thickness - Increase for the shell, or channel, or both.

Increase Cylinder and Tubesheet Thickness - Increase for both the tubesheet and
the integral cylinder.

Perform Elastic-Plastic Calculation - Performing the elastic-plastic calculation at

that junction is recommended if all prerequisites are satisfied. For example, the
equipment is not operating in the temperature creep range where time-dependent
properties affect material allowables.

TEMA

TEMA Exchanger Notation

For a TEMA analysis, select a value for each of the three options. The order of the options
is:

1 - Front End

2 - Shell Type

3 - Rear End

The nomenclature for each option is according to the conventions in TEMA page 2, figure
N-1.2:

[Link] 274/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Front End Shell Type Rear End

TEMA Exchanger Class

For a TEMA analysis, select one of the classes of exchangers, R, C, or B. The class is
determined by the severity of service and is discussed in the TEMA code, paragraph RCB-
1.1. The calculation method is the same for all classes, but each class has its own design
restrictions. Verify the correct class to use for your application.

[Link] 275/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The computed MAWP for pressure testing is based on pressure cases

only

Specifies that the software considers only design load cases 1, 2, and 3 when determining
the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) used to calculate hydrotest pressure.
The software ignores load cases that involve thermal expansion because the heat
exchanger is cold when it is tested.

Tubesheet Properties Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input

Dialog)

Description

Enter a description.

Dist. from "From" Node

Enter the distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Tubesheet Type

Select the type of tubesheet to analyze, according to ASME classifications. The available
selections change depending on the Exchanger Type selected on the Tubesheet Type
and Design Code tab.

Fixed tubesheet exchangers are subject to loads arising from differential thermal
expansion between the tubes and the shell. They have stationary tubesheets on both
sides. Fixed tubesheet exchangers are classified by ASME:

[Link] 276/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Configurations Description

Tubesheet integral with both shell and

A
channel

Tubesheet integral with shell, gasketed with

B channel, with tubesheet extended as a
flange

Tubesheet integral with shell, gasketed with

C channel, with tubesheet not extended as a
flange

Tubesheet gasketed with both shell and

D
channel

U-Tube exchangers are classified either as integral with the shell, channel, both, or
gasketed on both sides, according to ASME classifications:

Configurations Description

Tubesheet integral with both shell and

A
channel

Tubesheet integral with shell, gasketed with

B channel, with tubesheet extended as a
flange

Tubesheet integral with shell, gasketed with

C channel, with tubesheet not extended as a
flange

[Link] 277/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tubesheet gasketed with both shell and

D
channel

Tubesheet integral with channel, gasketed

E with shell, with tubesheet extended as a
flange

Tubesheet integral with channel, gasketed

F with shell, with tubesheet not extended as a
flange

Floating tubesheet exchangers have a stationary tubesheet and a floating

tubesheet, according to ASME classifications:

Configurations Description

A Tubesheet integral

Tubesheet gasketed and extended as a

B
flange

Tubesheet gasketed and not extended as a

C
flange

D Tubesheet internally sealed

Some ASME tubesheet configurations are shown below:

Tubesheet is integral with the shell and is gasketed on the channel side and is not
extending as a flange

[Link] 278/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tubesheet is integral with the shell and is gasketed on the channel side and is
extending as a flange

Tubesheet is gasketed on both the shell and the channel sides and is not extended
as a flange. In an alternative arrangement the tubesheet is extending as a flange.

[Link] 279/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tubesheet is integral with both the shell and the channel. This is a fixed tubesheet
exchanger, as a flanged and flued expansion joint is used to reduce the differential
thermal expansion, between the tubes and the shell.

The following tubesheet attachment types are used:

Outside Diameter

Enter the outside diameter of the tubesheet.

Stepped Tubesheet

The Stepped Tubesheet Effective Diameter Calculation dialog box allows you to define
the dimensions of a stepped tubesheet in accordance with Part UHX-10(b) of the ASME

[Link] 280/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

code. As you enter the tubesheet dimensions, the status bar at the bottom of the dialog
displays computed results including the effective tubesheet diameter which will be used in
the ASME tubesheet calculations.

This option is only available if Tubesheet Extended as Flange? is selected.

Is this a stepped tubesheet

Select to indicate that the tubesheet is stepped.

Flat on tube side

Select to indicate that the tubesheet is flat on the tube side.

Step 1 (Tube Side)

Select to define the dimensions for the first step of the tubesheet on the tube side.

Step 1 Diameter (dt1)

Enter the diameter of the first step on the tube side of the tubesheet.

Step 1 Depth (ht1)

Enter the depth of the first step on the tube side of the tubesheet.

Step 2 (Tube Side)

Select to define the dimensions for the second step of the tubesheet on the shell side.

Step 2 Diameter (dt2)

Enter the diameter of the second step on the tube side of the tubesheet.

Step 2 Depth (ht2)

Enter the depth of the second step on the tube side of the tubesheet.

[Link] 281/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Flat on Shell Side

Select to indicate that the tubesheet is flat on the shell side.

Step 1 (Shell Side)

Select to define the dimensions for the first step of the tubesheet on the shell side.

Step 1 Diameter (ds1)

Enter the diameter of the first step on the shell side of the tubesheet.

Step 1 Depth (hs1)

Enter the depth of the first step on the shell side of the tubesheet.

Step 2 (Shell Side)

Select to define the dimensions for the second step of the tubesheet on the shell side.

Step 2 Diameter (ds2)

Enter the diameter of the second step on the shell side of the tubesheet.

Step 2 Depth (hs2)

Enter the depth of the second step on the shell side of the tubesheet.

Tubesheet Thickness

Enter the tubesheet thickness in an uncorroded condition. If it is a re-rate, then the actual
measured thickness is typically used.

Corr. Allow. Shell Side / Channel Side

Enter the corrosion allowance on the shell side (the inner face of the tubesheet), and the
corrosion allowance on the channel side (the outer face of the tubesheet facing the
channel side).

[Link] 282/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Depth of Groove in Tubesheet (if any)

Enter the depth of a groove in the tubesheet, used to locate the channel partition plate and
its gasket. If there is no groove, such as in a single pass exchanger, this value is 0.

Weld Leg at Back of Tubesheet (if any)

If the tubesheet is welded to shell and/or channel, then enter the fillet weld length at the
back of the tubesheet.

Tubesheet Assembly is Down/Left?

Select if a horizontal U-tube exchanger is modeled with the tube bundle facing left and the
tubesheet on the right or for a vertical U-tube exchanger.

Tubesheet Extended as Flange?

Select if the tubesheet is extended as a flange, so that it is subject to the bolt load from the
mating flange.

This option must be selected for Stepped Tubesheet to be enabled.

Thickness of Extended Portion

When Tubesheet Extended as Flange? is selected, enter the thickness of the portion of
the tubesheet that is extended for bolting.

[Link] 283/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tfr/T Ratio for U-Tubesheets (optional)

When Tubesheet Extended as Flange? is selected, enter the ratio of the required
thickness of the tubesheet flanged extension to the tubesheet, if reducing the required
thickness of the flanged extension is required. The ratio should be less than 1.0 and more
than 0.2. The default value is 1.0. This value is used in TEMA RCB 7.1342 for U-tube
tubesheet exchangers. This entry is optional.

Bolt Load Transferred to Tubesheet?

When Tubesheet Extended as Flange? is selected, also select this option if the bolt load
is transferred to the tubesheet, extended as the flange. Do not select this option if the
tubesheet is gasketed with both the shell and channel flanges. Otherwise, the tubesheet
can still be extended, but the bolt load is not transferred to the tubesheet extension.
Carefully consider all possible cases, such as the hydrotest. When this option is not
selected, the required thickness of tubesheet extension is not calculated.

UnTubed Lane Area

Enter the total area of all the untubed lanes on the tubesheet. If there is no pass partition
lane then the value is 0. This value is only needed for ASME code analysis. In a single
pass exchanger, this area is UL1 * Do:

The area is UL1 * Do

The maximum limiting value of is 4*Do*p.

Do - Equivalent diameter of outer limit circle

p - Tube pitch

UL1 - Distance between innermost tube

hole centers (width of pass partition lane)

[Link] 284/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Use Full Bolt Load during Tubesheet Analysis?

Select to allow the full bolt load to be used during the Tubesheet Analysis. This load is
obtained by computing the Flange Design Bolt Load using the area of the bolt itself
instead of (Am + Ab) / 2 , which is the area of the bolt (Ab) plus the required bolt area (Am).
Using the full bolt load accounts for any abuse the flange joint might experience during
service.

Backing Ring Thickness

Enter the actual thickness of the backing ring. This value is needed when a tubesheet is
clamped and gasketed on one side by a backing ring or device. For doubly-split rings, this
is the thickness of each piece:

Backing Ring ID / OD

Enter the inside and the outside diameters of the backing ring.

G Dimension for Backing Ring

Enter the effective diameter G, defined as the mid-point of the contact between the
backing flange and the tubesheet. When a tubesheet is clamped and gasketed on one
side by a backing ring or device, the effective diameter of the gasket between the backing
ring and the tubesheet is needed.

[Link] 285/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Is There a Shell Band?

Select if there is a shell band. The shell might have thicker courses at either end, called
shell bands. Shell bands give added strength to the shell to tubesheet region:

Shell Thickness Adjacent to Tubesheet

Enter the thickness of the shell bands ts1.

[Link] 286/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Shell Band Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance for the shell band.

Shell Band Length Adjacent to Tubesheet, Front End L1

Enter the front end length l1 for the shell band.

Shell Band Length Adjacent to Tubesheet, Rear End L1'

Enter the rear end length l1' for the shell band.

Also specify the shell band material on the Load Cases Tab (Heat Exchanger
Tubesheet Input Dialog).

How are Tubesheets Clamped

Select the method of clamping for a fixed or a floating tubesheet, as defined by PD 5500,
Figure 3.9-6:

Stationary Tubesheet Floating Tubesheet

Simply Supported Simply Supported

Simply Supported Clamped

Clamped Simply Supported

Clamped Clamped

[Link] 287/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

If either shell or channel is welded to a U-

tubesheet, then:

The U-tubesheet is simply supported

if:

The U-tubesheet is clamped if:

Tube Bundle Pullout Force

Enter the axial force that is required to pull out the tube bundle. This force is transferred to
the saddles. You must enter a value greater than zero to generate a tube bundle pullout
saddle analysis.

Tube Bundle Pullout Force Impact Factor

Enter the factor to scale the Tube Bundle Pullout Force value. The impact factor value
should be greater than or equal to 1.

For units with removable tube bundles, supports should be designed to withstand
a pulling force equal to one and a half times the weight of the tube bundle. This is
according to the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer’s Association (TEMA). Hence, the Tube
Bundle Pullout Force Impact Factor value would normally be between 1 and 2.

Apply Force to Fixed Saddle Only?

Select this option to apply the Tube Bundle Pullout Force value to only the fixed saddle. A
saddle is considered to be fixed if no value is specified for Friction Coefficient Mu in the
Saddle dialog. If this box is unchecked, then both saddles are subjected to the Tube
Bundle Pullout Force.

Tube Data Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog)

[Link] 288/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Number of Holes / Pattern

Enter the total number of tube holes drilled in one of the tubesheets. Also select the hole
pattern: Square, or Triangular. The code expects the holes to be fairly evenly spaced over
the entire area of the tubesheet without large areas that are not drilled.

For a square rotated pattern, select Square. For a triangular rotated pattern,
select Triangular.

Wall Thickness Corrosion Allowance

Enter the wall thickness of the exchanger tubes, and the corrosion allowance to which the
tubes are subjected. Typical tube thicknesses are below:

Tube O.D.
B.W.G. Thickness Thickness
inches
gage inches mm
(mm)

22 0.028 0.711

1/4 24 0.022 0.559

(6.35) 26 0.018 0.457

27 0.016 0.406

[Link] 289/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

18 0.049 1.245

3/8 20 0.035 0.889

(9.53) 22 0.028 0.711

24 0.022 0.559

16 0.065 1.651

1/2 18 0.049 1.245

(12.7) 20 0.035 0.889

22 0.028 0.711

5/8 12 0.109 2.769

(15.88)
13 0.095 2.413

14 0.083 2.108

15 0.072 1.829

16 0.065 1.651

17 0.058 1.473

18 0.049 1.245

[Link] 290/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

19 0.042 1.067

20 0.035 0.889

10 0.134 3.404

11 0.120 3.048

12 0.109 2.769

13 0.095 2.413

3/4 14 0.083 2.108

(19.05) 15 0.072 1.829

16 0.065 1.651

17 0.058 1.473

18 0.049 1.245

20 0.035 0.889

7/8 10 0.134 3.404

(22.23)
11 0.120 3.048

12 0.109 2.769

[Link] 291/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

13 0.095 2.413

14 0.083 2.108

15 0.072 1.829

16 0.065 1.651

17 0.058 1.473

18 0.049 1.245

20 0.035 0.889

1 8 0.165 4.191

(25.4)
10 0.134 3.404

11 0.120 3.048

12 0.109 2.769

13 0.095 2.413

14 0.083 2.108

15 0.072 1.829

16 0.065 1.651

[Link] 292/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

18 0.049 1.245

20 0.035 0.889

7 0.180 4.572

8 0.165 4.191

10 0.134 3.404

11 0.120 3.048

1-1/4 12 0.109 2.769

(31.75) 13 0.095 2.413

14 0.083 2.108

16 0.065 1.651

18 0.049 1.245

20 0.035 0.889

1-1/2 10 0.134 3.404

(38.10)
12 0.109 2.769

14 0.083 2.108

[Link] 293/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

16 0.065 1.651

11 0.120 3.048

2 12 0.109 2.769

(50.8) 13 0.095 2.413

14 0.083 2.108

10 0.134 3.404

2-1/2
12 0.109 2.769
(63.5)

14 0.083 2.108

10 0.134 3.404

3
12 0.109 2.769
(76.2)

14 0.083 2.108

10 0.134 3.404

2-1/2
12 0.109 2.769
(63.5)

14 0.083 2.108

3 10 0.134 3.404

[Link] 294/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

(76.2)
12 0.109 2.769

14 0.083 2.108

Outside Diameter / Pitch

Enter the outside diameter and the pitch of the tubes. The tube pitch is the distance
between the centers of the adjacent tubes.

Length of Expanded Portion of Tube

Enter the length of tube that is expanded into the tubesheet hole. This value may not
exceed the full thickness of the tubesheet to avoid failure of the tube at the inner tubesheet
face and is usually 80% to 90% of the tubesheet thickness.

[Link] 295/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

In most cases, tubes are not fully expanded through the thickness of the tubesheet. There
is a typical distance of a few millimeters that is not expanded.

Select the Use Alternate Tube Expansion Dimensions check box, to enable the
Expansion Start Dimension from Channel Side and Min. Distance from the Shell Side
the Expansion should Stop fields in which to enter the dimensions.

When given the dimensions, the expanded length of the tube in the tubesheet can be
computed in cases involving both the corroded and uncorroded conditions.

The dimensions are measured from the face of the tubesheet in the new condition.

Radius to Outermost Tube Hole Center

Enter the distance from the center of the tubesheet to the centerline of the tube furthest
away.

[Link] 296/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Distance Between Innermost Tube Centers

Enter the maximum distance between the tube innermost centers when a partition plate is
installed, because the innermost lanes of tubes may be further apart than the general tube
pitch in the remainder of the tubesheet. This is the maximum distance between the tube
innermost centers. If there is no partition plate, this value is 0.

Straight Tube Length

Enter the straight length of the tubes, based on the selection for Straight Tube Length
Measured Between.

Straight Tube Length Measured Between

Select the method of tube length measurement. Select Inner Faces or Outer Faces.

[Link] 297/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Perimeter of Tube Layout (if needed)

Enter the total linear length of the outermost tubes. This value is only required if the
software is calculating the punching shear stress. Otherwise, the value is 0.

Area of Tube Layout (if needed)

Enter the area defined by the tube layout, including all the tubes in the tube bundle.

[Link] 298/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Number of Tubes Immersed

Enter the number of tubes that lie below the operating liquid level in a partially filled heat
exchanger.

Tube Layout Assistant

Helps you determine the number of tubes that will fit in a layout configuration for a heat
exchanger tubesheet. The utility is available from:

The Tube Data Tab, opened from Tubesheet Analysis in PV Elite.

[Link], found in the [Program Folder]\Intergraph CAS\PV Elite\[Version

Number] folder.

The distance from the center of the tubesheet to the outermost tube center and the total
number of tubes is calculated. As you change options on the Layout Pattern tab, the
layout graphics dynamically update in the right panel. For example:

[Link] 299/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The outermost tube center distance is used in tubesheet stress analysis.

Tie rods that are located in tube positions are not considered.

Layout files are saved with the .tsd extension. You can import a layout file into PV
Elite.

Layout Pattern Tab

Units

Select Imperial (in) or Metric (mm). You can switch units at any time.

Partitions

Partition Layout

Select the partition plate layout within the shell:

- Horizontal partitions only. With this layout, Number of Horizontal Partitions can
have values from 0 to 8.

For a tubesheet with no partitions, select this option and set Number of
Horizontal Partitions to 0.

- Horizontal partitions with an interior vertical partition. With this layout, Number of
Horizontal Partitions can have values from 2 to 8.

[Link] 300/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

- Horizontal partitions with a full vertical partition. With this layout, Number of
Horizontal Partitions can have values from 2 to 8.

Number of Horizontal Partitions

Type or select the number of horizontal partitions.

Partition Thickness

Type the thickness of the partition plates.

Partition Clearance

Type the clearance distance between tubes and the partition plates.

Symmetrical (Mirror) Layout

Select for a symmetrical tube layout.

Tubes

Tube Pattern

Select the needed tube pattern. Select Square, Square Rotated, Triangular, or
Triangular Rotated.

Tube Boundary (OTL)

Enter the outer tube limit (OTL) diameter of the shell. Tubes cannot be placed beyond the
OTL.

Tube Outer Diameter

Enter the un-corroded outside diameter of each tube.

Tube Pitch

Enter the distance between tube centers.

[Link] 301/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Nozzle

Nozzle Clearance (Top, Bottom, Left, Right)

Enter the dimension that a nozzle projects inside the surface of the exchanger shell. Note
that all dimensions can be specified. This allows for side and vertical entry nozzles.

Nozzle Clearance (Top)

Enter the distance that a nozzle projects vertically and from the top of the surface of the
exchanger shell.

Nozzle Clearance (Bottom)

Enter the distance that a nozzle projects vertically and from the bottom of the surface of
the exchanger shell.

Nozzle Clearance (Left)

Enter the distance that a nozzle projects horizontally and from the left of the surface of the
exchanger shell.

Nozzle Clearance (Right)

Enter the distance that a nozzle projects horizontally and from the right of the surface of
the exchanger shell.

Shell

Shell Inside Diameter

Enter the inside diameter of the shell.

[Link] 302/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Import Layout Results

Imports results saved in the Tube Layout Assistant, and fills in values for basic tube data
from the results.

Max. Dist. from Tubesheet to 1st Tube Support

Enter the maximum distance between two tube supports. Supports, often called baffles,
are along the heat exchanger, and are in addition to the tube support provided by each of
the tubesheets. The software uses the maximum unsupported length to determine the
buckling stress in the tubes. Carefully examine the design of the exchanger, and enter the
maximum possible unsupported length. For the example below, a is the distance between
a baffle and a tubesheet, while c, d, and e are the distances between baffles.

Max. Dist. bet. 2 Tube Supports

Enter the maximum distance from the tubesheet to the first tube support (baffle). This is
the maximum of the a distances shown above.

End Condition k

Enter the tube end condition value k, as defined in the TEMA, ASME, and PD 5500 codes.
Each code uses different values, so verify that you use a value for the code defined for
your model.

[Link] 303/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

'k' Value

Condition
TEMA / ASME PD 5500

Between two tubesheets 0.60 0.50

Between tubesheet and

0.80 0.707
baffle

Between two baffles 1.00 1.00

Max Unsupported Len SL

Enter l x k as the effective buckling length of the tubes between supports.

Tube Hole Diameter, dh

Enter the diameter of the holes drilled in the tubesheet. The tube hole diameter should be
slightly larger than the outside diameter of the tube. This provides a clearance that is
closed as the tube is expanded in the hole.

Number of Grooves in Hole

Enter the number of grooves machined into the tube hole.

[Link] 304/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Fillet Weld Leg Size (if any)

Enter the fillet weld size, if used when the tube is welded to the tubesheet, as defined in
ASME VIII Div 1, UW-20. The weld may be fillet-only, groove-only, or both, as shown
below.

Groove Weld Leg Size (if any)

Enter the groove weld size, if used when the tube is welded to the tubesheet, as defined in
ASME VIII Div 1, UW-20. The weld may be fillet-only, groove-only, or both, as shown
below.

[Link] 305/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Design Strength (not for fixed TS types)

Enter the design strength axial load Fd, according to ASME Code paragraph UW-20. This
value is used to determine the minimum acceptable fillet/groove weld size that connects
the tube to the tubesheet. The design strength should not be greater than the tube strength
(Ft), defined as Pt(do - t)Sa.

Because U-tube tubesheet exchangers do not experience differential thermal

expansion between the tubes and the shell, the axial load on the tubes cannot be
easily calculated. You can specify your own value for the actual load (required design
strength) for U-tube exchangers. This value is optional for fixed and floating
tubesheet exchangers.

For partial strength tube-to-tubesheet welds on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers,

the higher of the actual tube-to-tubesheet load and the entered design strength is
used to size the welds.

For full strength tube-to-tubesheet welds on fixed/floating tubesheet exchangers, the

tube strength (Ft) is used to size the welds.

[Link] 306/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tube Weld Joint Type

Select the type of tube/tubesheet weld, as defined in ASME UW-20:

Full Strength - The design strength is equal to or greater than the maximum
allowable axial tube strength.

Partial Strength - Design strength is based on the actual tube-tubesheet axial load.

Seal/No Weld - The weld is used to seal and has no strength value, so no
calculations are performed.

Tube Joint Type

Select the weld joint type, as defined by TEMA and ASME using ASME 2021 Section VIII,
Division 1 Table A-2, Efficiencies fr

Joint fr fr
Type Description (Test) (No Test)

Welded only, total weld size

a 1.00 ...
(0.7af +ag) ³ t

Welded only, total weld size

b .70 ...
(0.7af +ag) < t

c Brazed, examined 1.00 .80

d Brazed, not fully examined 0.50 .40

Welded, total weld size (0.7af

e 1.00 .80
+ag) ³ t and expanded

f Welded, total weld size (0.7af .95 .75

+ag) < t, expanded, and

[Link] 307/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

enhanced with two or more

grooves

Welded, total weld size (0.7af

g +ag) < t, expanded, and .85 .65
enhanced with a single groove

Welded, total weld size (0.7af

h +ag) < t, expanded, and not .70 .50
enhanced

Expanded, enhanced with two

i .90 .70
or more grooves

Expanded, enhanced with

j .80 .65
single groove

k Expanded, not enhanced .60 .50

For PD 5500, select the weld joint type as defined by Table 3.9-3, Efficiencies and Joint
Types:

Joint Type
Description fr

a Welded with min throat thk. >= tube thk. .80

b Welded with min throat thk. < tube thk. .55

Expanded and welded with min throat thk.

c .80
>= tube thk.

[Link] 308/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Expanded and welded with min throat thk.

d .55
< tube thk.

e Expanded only .50

f Explosion expanded/welded .80

Allowable Joint Load Method

Select the joint allowable load method.

ASME APP. A

Applicable for fixed and floating tubesheet heat exchangers, covering many types of tube-
tubesheet joints, such as welded, brazed and expanded.

The PD 5500 method for determining the tube-tubesheet joint allowable is similar
to this method.

ASME UW-20

Applicable for full strength and partial strength tube-tubesheet welds.

None

Is Tube-Tubesheet Joint Tested

Select if the tube/tubesheet joint is tested and qualified for ASME. Tested joints get an
increase in their strength value.

Is Tube Weld Inset (ASME UW-20)

Select to perform calculations according to Sketch f or Sketch e of ASME UW-20.

ASME Tube Jt. Reliability Factor

Displays the reliability factor value after a value for Tube Joint Type is selected.

[Link] 309/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Compute Po & Pt

Select to compute the Po and Pt expansion values as found in Appendix A (VIIII - Division
1) and Annex 4-C (VIII - Division 2).

Tube Expansion, Po

Enter the pressure (Po) exerted on the outside of the tube after it has expanded. This
value is only required for a Tube Joint Type of f, g, h, i, j, and k.

Differential Thermal Expansion, Pt

Enter the interface pressure (Pt) between the tube and the tubesheet due to differential
thermal growth. This value is only required for a Tube Joint Type of f, g, h, i, j, and k.

The ASME code provides formulas to calculate Po and Pt pressures. This

proposal attempts to provide formulas so these values can be calculated. It is recognized
that other methods might exist. However, because these are non-mandatory requirements,
we believe developing calculation formulas benefits the designer community, even though
the designers can opt for other methods. If you do not have a good method to establish
values of interface pressures, enter 0. Zero tells the software to ignore the effects of
interface pressures on the joint allowable. If you enter 1 as an approximation for both of
these pressures, then the joint allowable doubles.

Is This a Welded Tube (Not Seamless)?

Select if the tubes are of welded construction.

[Link] 310/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Specific Gravity of the Operating Liquid in the Tubes

Enter the specific gravity of the fluid in the tube channel side.

Click to Enter Baffle Information

Opens the Baffle, Tie Rod, and Spacer Data Dialog. You can separately choose to define
and include baffle, tie rod, and spacer parameters in the heat exchanger analysis. The
software then calculates weights and centers of gravity.

Baffle, Tie Rod, and Spacer Data Dialog

Include Baffles in Analysis

Specifies the inclusion of baffle weights and centers of gravity in the heat exchanger
analysis.

Baffle Data

Type of Baffles
Outside Diameter of Baffle Plate
Diameter of Baffle Holes
Baffle Thickness
Distance between Baffles
Distance from Tubesheet to First Baffle
Number of Baffles
Number of Holes in Baffle
Percent Baffle Cut (i.e. 25%) / Percent Area Cut (i.e. 45%)
Baffle Material

Tie Rod Data

Spacer Data

Type of Baffles

Segmental

[Link] 311/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Specifies alternating baffle segments.

Double Segmental

Specifies alternating double and center baffle segments.

Outside Diameter of Baffle Plate

Specifies the diameter of the baffle.

Diameter of Baffle Holes

Specifies the diameter of each baffle hole to accommodate the tubes in the heat
exchanger bundle.

[Link] 312/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Baffle Thickness

Specifies the thickness of the baffle material.

Distance between Baffles

Specifies the spacing between baffles.

Distance from Tubesheet to First Baffle

Specifies the distance from the tubesheet to the first baffle.

Number of Baffles

Specifies the number of baffles along the heat exchanger bundle.

Number of Holes in Baffle

Specifies the number of holes in each baffle to accommodate the tubes in the heat
exchanger bundle.

[Link] 313/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Percent Baffle Cut (i.e. 25%) / Percent Area Cut (i.e. 45%)

For segmental baffles, specifies the amount of the cut in each baffle to allow fluid to flow
across the baffle, defined as the percentage of the shell inside diameter that is not covered
by the baffle. 25% is a typical value.

For double segmental baffles, specifies the amount of the cut on each side of the baffle to
allow the fluid to flow around the baffle, defined as the percentage of the shell inside area
that is not covered by the baffle. 45% is a typical value.

Baffle Material

The software contains a database with most of the materials in ASME Code, Section II,
Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also includes materials for PD 5500 and EN
13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog Box.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog Box and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Tie Rod Data

Include Tie Rod Information

Specifies the inclusion of the tie rod weights and centers of gravity in the heat exchanger
analysis.

Include Tie Rod Information is available after you select Include Baffles in
Analysis.

Number of Tie Rods

Specifies the number of tie rods.

[Link] 314/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tie Rod Outside Diameter

Specifies the tie rod outer diameter.

Tie Rod Length

Specifies the tie rod length. The length must be greater than the distance between the
outermost baffles and less than the distance between the tubesheets.

Tie Rod Material

The software contains a database with most of the materials in ASME Code, Section II,
Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also includes materials for PD 5500 and EN
13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog Box.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog Box and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Spacer Data

Include Spacer Information

Specifies the inclusion of the spacer weights and centers of gravity in the heat exchanger
analysis.

Include Spacer Information is available after you select Include Baffles in

Analysis.

Spacer Outside Diameter

Specifies the spacer outer diameter.

[Link] 315/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Thickness of Spacer

Specifies the thickness of the spacer material.

Spacer Material

The software contains a database with most of the materials in ASME Code, Section II,
Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also includes materials for PD 5500 and EN
13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog Box.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog Box and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Expansion Joint Data Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input

Dialog)
Expansion joints are selected in Expansion Joint Type (if any) on the Tubesheet Type
and Design Code tab. Two types are available:

Thin Joint is comprised of a thin bellows that is very flexible and has a low stiffness. Below
are examples designed according to ASME Appendix 26:

[Link] 316/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Thick Joint or Flanged/Flued Expansion Joint is comprised of a number of shell elements

that are added together to form the joint. A thick joint is stiffer than the thin joint, and its
stiffness must be taken into account.

If you have installed the Paulin Research Group third party software,
NozzlePRO™, you can also perform finite element analysis (FEA) on some thick
expansion joint properties. For more information, see Finite Element Analysis (FEA) on
ASME or TEMA Expansion Joints (PV Elite).

Below are typical combinations of flexible shell elements for a thick expansion joint,
showing one-half of a convolution and using TEMA nomenclature:

[Link] 317/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Perform App. 26 Stress and Life Cycle Calculations for the Bellows?

Select if Thin Bellows Type is selected for Expansion Joint Type (if any) on the
Tubesheet Type and Design Code tab. Then click >> to define the thin joint according to
ASME Appendix 26 analysis. For more information, see Thin Joint Options.

Number of Flexible Shell Elements

Enter the number of flexible shell elements for a thick joint. One convolution has two
flexible shell elements:

Dist. from "From" Node

Enter the axial or longitudinal distance from the flange node (if there is a flange) or from
the cylinder element node to which the tubesheet is attached to the start of the expansion
joint:

[Link] 318/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Design Option

Select Existing to enter the stiffness characteristics of the expansion joint. Use this option
if you do not want to analyze the expansion joint itself but are just specifying its spring rate
to be used in the tubesheet calculations. For example, you are purchasing the expansion
joint from the manufacturer, who has already analyzed the joint. Select Analyze to
calculate the stiffness characteristics (spring rate) and the stresses in the joint. You must
also select Analyze to perform finite element analysis on an expansion joint.

Set Defaults

Click to set the dimension starting points for the expansion joint design.

Enter values for the following options to define thick joint characteristics:

[Link] 319/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Expansion Joint ID

Expansion Joint OD

Wall thickness (te)

Corrosion Allowance

Knuckle Offset Dimension Inside (fa)

Knuckle Offset Dimension Outside (fb)

Knuckle Radius Inside (ra)

Knuckle Radius Outside (rb)

Shell Cylinder Length (Li)

Desired Cycle Life

Enter the number of cycles needed for the life of the expansion joint.

User Input Spring Rate Corroded

Enter a value for thin joints and for thick joints when Existing is selected for Design
Option.

User Input Spring Rate Uncorroded

Enter a value for thin joints and thick joints when Existing is selected for Design Option.

Thick Expansion Joint Calculation Method

Select TEMA, Kopp and Sayre or FEA.

Select FEA to perform finite element analysis using the third party NozzlePRO software on
your expansion joint. When you select FEA, the software activates several inputs for the
analysis. FEA expansion joint analysis assumes one convolution or two flexible shell
elements.

You must have installed the third-party NozzlePRO software (from Paulin Research
Group) before running PV Elite.

[Link] 320/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The software displays the FEA option in the Thick Expansion Joint Calculation
Method box when you have selected a thick expansion joint using a fixed tubesheet
type. For more information on the process for FEA, see Finite Element Analysis
(FEA) on ASME or TEMA Expansion Joints (PV Elite).

Elastic Modulus optional (computed if zero)

Type a value that is in the range of 1.5e7 to 3.2e7 psi (or 1.034e8 to 2.2e8 kPa). If you
specify a value outside of this range, the software changes the value to zero.

When you select to perform finite element analysis on an expansion joint, the software
activates this input and the values you specify here determine what stress calculations the
software uses and displays on the ASME TS Calc or TEMA TS Calc output reports.

Poisson's Ratio

Type the Poisson's ratio value for the expansion joint material. For most steels, this value
is close to 0.3. You can find Poisson's ratio values in material reference standards. When
you select to perform a finite element analysis on an expansion joint, the software
activates this input. The values you specify here determine what stress calculations the
software uses and displays on the ASME TS Calc or TEMA TS Calc output reports.

FEA Runtime Options

Select an option that indicates the type of finite element analysis calculation performed for
the expansion joint. The software activates this input and the values you specify here
determine what stress calculations the software uses and displays on the ASME TS Calc
or TEMA TS Calc output reports.

Perform ASME Combinations - Indicates that the software performs all seven of the
Unfired Heat Exchanger (ASME) combination calculations, including:

Displacements due to tubeside pressure

Shellside pressure + shellside displacements

Shellside pressure + shellside displacements + tubeside displacements (both

pressures)

Thermal displacements only

Displacements due to tubeside pressure plus thermal displacements

Shellside pressure + shellside displacements plus thermal displacements

[Link] 321/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Shellside pressure + shellside displacements + tubeside displacements (both

pressures) plus thermal displacements

Calculate Stiffnesses Only - Includes only stiffnesses.

Calculate Thermal Displacements Only - Includes displacements.

Calculate Shellside Pressures Only - Includes displacements due to shellside pressure.

Calculate Tubeside Pressures Only - Includes displacements due to tubeside pressure.

Outer Cylinder Specification

Enter values for the following options to define outer cylinder characteristics:

Is there an Outer Cylinder?

Outer Cylinder Material

Outer Cylinder Thickness (to)

Outer Cylinder Corrosion Allowance

Outer Cylinder Length (lo)

Outer Cylinder Design Temperature

Thin Joint Options

Thin expansion joints are analyzed according to ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix
26 of the Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Life cycle and stress analysis is performed.

Enter values for the dimensions corresponding to your joint shape:

Dimension Description Sketch

Cross sectional metal area

Af
of one reinforcing fastener

[Link] 322/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Inside diameter of bellows

Db
convolution

Mean diameter of bellows

Dm
convolution

Cross sectional diameter of

Dr
the reinforcing ring

Forming method factor.

Use 1.0 for expanding
mandrel or roll forming. Use
Kf
0.6 for hydraulic,
elastomeric, or pneumatic
tube forming.

Bellows collar length. For the

toroidal bellows, Lc is
Lc determined by dividing the
collar cross section area with
the collar thickness.

Length from attachment weld

to the center of the first
Ld
convolution for externally
attached bellows

Effective length of one

Lf
reinforcing fastener

Maximum distance across

the inside opening of a
Lg
toroidal convolution,
considering all movements

[Link] 323/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Effective reinforcing collar

Lr length, calculated by

Overall length of reinforcing

Lrt
collar

Effective shell strength,

calculated by
Ls

Minimum required shell

Lsm
length having thickness, t

Lt End tangent length

Distance between toroidal

Lw
bellows attachment welds

q Convolution pitch

Mean radius of toroidal

r
bellows convolution

Bellow nominal thickness of

t
one ply

tc Collar thickness

w Convolution depth

[Link] 324/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

delta Q

Enter the differential thermal expansion between the tubes and shell divided by the
number of convolutions. If this value is 0, it is calculated during the analysis. If you are
evaluating this joint by clicking Quick Results , you need to calculate delta Q and enter
that value. In this case, resetting the value to 0 before exiting the dialog box is
recommended. A non-zero positive value will be used by the software regardless of what
was actually computed for delta Q. This entry is optional.

Finite Element Analysis (FEA) on ASME or TEMA Expansion Joints (PV

Elite)

Using the PV Elite interface with Paulin Research Group's NozzlePRO software, you can
perform FEA while designing thick expansion joints from within PV Elite. FEA lets you
calculate more precise date for certain properties of expansion joints.

Complete the following steps to perform finite element analysis (FEA) on thick expansion
joints in PV Elite. You can perform FEA on expansion joints for ASME, TEMA, EN 13445,
and PD 5500 tubesheets.

You must have installed NozzlePRO from Paulin Research Group to perform FEA
on expansion joints in PV Elite.

1. Open PV Elite .

2. Open an existing or create a new heat exchanger job in PV Elite.

From the Home tab, you can select New and specify a file type for your new
file (such as ASME Section VII-Division 1 or PD 5500). The software opens a new
file with many of the inputs already pre-set for the type of file you selected.

3. Click Tubesheet Analysis from the Details panel on the Home tab.

The Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input dialog box opens.

4. Specify the Tubesheet Analysis Method and Exchanger Type, and then set the
Expansion Joint Type to Thick Type (Flanged and Flued).

5. On the TubeSheet Properties tab, select a fixed Tubesheet Type (such as Fixed
Tubesheets, gasketed both sides).

6. On the Expansion Joint Data tab, specify the Design Option as Analyze.

7. Specify the Thick Expansion Joint Calculation Method as FEA.

[Link] 325/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The software enables several inputs applicable for finite element analysis and
disables inputs that are unnecessary to the expansion joint calculations.

8. Specify the Elastic Modulus, Poisson's Ratio (for FEA), and FEA Runtime
Options. The values you specify in these fields determine what stress calculations
the software uses and displays on the ASME TS Calc or TEMA TS Calc output
reports. The ASME and TEMA tubesheet modules use TEMA 9th edition standard for
thick expansion joint FEA calculations.

9. Click Analyze. After the analysis completes, refer to the Expansion Joint Stress
Summary (PRG) section on the output report.

The Expansion Joint Stress Summary (PRG) appears at the bottom of the ASME
TS Calc or TEMA TS Calc reports. The FEA Runtime Option you select determines
which results appear in the stress summary of the reports.

Load Cases Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input Dialog)

Specifying load cases in addition to the design case enables the software to perform
calculations for different combinations of pressures and temperatures, ensuring that all the
possible conditions are considered. Examples of additional cases are: shut-down, start-up,
and upset. For each load case, values can be entered as needed for:

Shell - The shell between the tubesheets.

Channel - The channel at the ends of the exchanger.

Tubes - The exchanger tubes.

Tubesheet - The tubesheet. For fixed and floating tubesheets, it is one of the pair.

Shell Band - The thicker shell courses at either end of the main shell next to
tubesheet.

Enter 0 for any options that are not needed.

Number of cases to process

Select the number of load cases to run. You can specify up to eight different load cases.

Active Load Case

Click the up and down arrows to cycle through the load cases.

For each active load case, enter values as needed for the following:

[Link] 326/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Case Description

Enter a description.

Minimum Pressures and Report Options for this Load Case

Click to open the Report Print Options Dialog Box.

Maximum Design Pressure

Enter the maximum design pressures for the shell side and for the channel side.

Maximum Operating Pressure for ASME

For an ASME exchanger, enter the maximum operating pressures for the shell side and
channel side.

These values are used to determine Ps and Pt.

Psox, max = max. (0, maximum shell side operating pressure for operating condition x)

Ptox, max = max. (0, maximum tube side operating pressure for operating condition x)

Minimum Operating Pressure for ASME

For an ASME exchanger, enter the minimum operating pressures for the shell side and
channel side.

These values are used to determine Ps and Pt.

Psox, min = min. (0, minimum shell side operating pressure for operating condition x)

Ptox, min = min. (0, minimum tube side operating pressure for operating condition x)

Design Temperature

Enter the design temperatures for the shell, channel, tubes, and tubesheet.

Use Operating Metal Temperatures (ASME)

For ASME, select, and then enter the operating temperatures for the shell, channel, tubes,
and tubesheet. UHX-13.4(b) Elastic moduli, yield strengths, and allowable stresses are
taken at design temperatures. For cases involving thermal loading (loading cases 4, 5, 6,
and 7), you can use the operating temperatures instead of the design temperatures (see
UG-20).

Material

[Link] 327/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Enter the name of the material for tubes, tubesheet and, shell bands. This software
contains a database with most of the materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A,
1B, and 3. Alternatively, use Database Lookup and Properties.

Mean Metal Temperature Along Length

Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell and tubes.

Metal Temperature at Tubesheet Rim

Enter the actual temperature of metal at the outer rim of the tubesheet, where the tubes
are in the outer rows, for the shell, channel, and tubesheet.

Database Lookup and Properties

Click Tubes, Tubesheet, and Shell Band to select a material for each directly from the
Material Database Dialog. The selection is then entered into Material. To modify the
material properties, click • • • to open the Material Properties Dialog. Doing so only
changes the properties for this analysis. It does not modify the database.

Modulus of Elasticity

User-Defined Values

Select to enter your own modulus of elasticity values, overriding the material properties
from the design code selected for analyzing the exchanger.

Modulus at Temperature

Enter the modulus of elasticity at the design temperature.

Modulus at Mean Metal Temp Along Length

Enter the modulus of elasticity at the actual metal temperature.

Modulus at Mean Metal Temperature

Enter the modulus of elasticity for the actual metal temperature at the channel.

Modulus at Ambient Temperature

Enter the modulus of elasticity at ambient temperature.

Coefficient of Thermal Expansion (alpha values)

User-Defined Values

[Link] 328/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Select to enter your own coefficient of thermal expansion values, overriding the material
properties from the design code selected for analyzing the exchanger.

Alpha at Mean Metal Temp Along Length

Enter the actual metal temperature for the shell, tubes, and shell band.

Alpha at Metal Temp at Tubesheet Rim

Enter the actual temperature of metal at the outer rim of the tubesheet where the tubes are
in the outer rows.

Differential Pressure Design?

Select to perform the analysis only for the difference between the shell side pressure and
the tube side pressure.

Differential Design Pressure

Enter the differential pressure when Differential Pressure Design? is selected. If you do
not enter a value, the software uses the effective pressures dictated by the code. This
entry is optional.

Is the Exchanger Operating in the Creep Range (skip EP, use 3S for Sps)?

Select if the exchanger is operating in high-temperature creep range. This option only
applies if the method used to analyze the heat exchanger is ASME.

Use 3f for local allowable stress close to the tubesheet for integral configuration
pressure only cases?

Uses up to three times the allowable stress for the pressure-only load cases (EN 13445,
Section [Link]).

Without this option, the software uses 1.5f as the allowable stress.

Exchanger subject to cyclic or dynamic reactions due to pressure or thermal

variations? (see UHX-13.8)

Calculates the effect of radial thermal expansion adjacent to the tubesheet, according to
UHX 13.8 (fixed tubesheet heat exchangers) or UHX 14.6 (floating tubesheet heat
exchangers).

Perform MDMT calculation for this case (see ASME)

Calculates the minimum design metal temperature for the selected Active Load Case.

[Link] 329/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Expansion Joint Material

The software contains a database with most of the materials in ASME Code, Section II,
Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also includes materials for PD 5500 and EN
13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog Box.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog Box and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Report Print Options Dialog Box

Sets options for analysis result reports of each load case.

Select the following as needed:

For ASME fixed/stat. tubesheets, print intermediate results in tabular form

Print intermediate results for expansion joint calculations

For TEMA and PD 5500 run multiple load cases - Runs the following load cases
for fixed tubesheets:

Load Load Case Description

Case #

Corroded Uncorroded

1 Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca

2 Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca

3 Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca

[Link] 330/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

4 Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca

5 Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca

6 Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca

7 Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca

8 Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca

Shell-side / Channel-side Vacuum Pressures

Enter positive values. For example, for full atmospheric vacuum condition enter a value of
15.0 psig. If no value is entered, then 0 psi is used.

Set detailed printout options for the currently selected load case

When you want to see detailed equations and intermediate calculations in the results,
select the corroded and uncorroded load cases. For all other load cases, the software
generates summarized, tabular results.

For ASME tubesheets, the following load cases are run for fixed and floating tubesheet
exchangers:

Load Load Case Description

Case #

Corroded Uncorroded

1 Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca

2 Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca

3 Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca

[Link] 331/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

4 Fvs + Fvt + Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt + Th - Ca

5 Fvs + Pt + Th + Ca Fvs + Pt + Th - Ca

6 Ps + Fvt + Th + Ca Ps + Fvt + Th - Ca

7 Ps + Pt + Th + Ca Ps + Pt + Th - Ca

For ASME stationary tubesheet configuration "d" and ASME floating tubesheet
configurations "B", "C" and "D", the design is based only on load cases 1, 2 and 3.

The following load cases are performed for ASME U-tube tubesheet exchangers:

Load Load Case Description

Case #

Corroded Uncorroded

1 Fvs + Pt - Th + Ca Fvs + Pt - Th - Ca

2 Ps + Fvt - Th + Ca Ps + Fvt - Th - Ca

3 Ps + Pt - Th + Ca Ps + Pt - Th - Ca

For all ASME exchangers, if vacuum pressures are specified, then an additional load case
is run:

[Link] 332/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Load Load Case Description

Case #

Corroded Uncorroded

8 Fvs + Fvt - Th + Ca Fvs + Fvt - Th - Ca

Additionally, if Differential Pressure Design? is selected on the Load Cases tab, then
only certain load cases are run.

Fvt, Fvs - User-defined Shell-side and Tube-side vacuum pressures or 0.0.

Ps, Pt - Shell-side and Tube-side Design Pressures.

Th - With or Without Thermal Expansion.

Ca - With or Without Corrosion Allowance.

Floating TubeSheet Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet Input

Dialog)
Description

Enter the description for the floating tubesheet. The description appears on the final report.

Floating Tubesheet Type

Select the type of floating tubesheet to analyze, according to ASME:

(a) Floating tubesheet, integral

(b) Floating tubesheet, gasketed, extended as flange

(c) Floating tubesheet, gasketed, no extended, w/backing device

(d) Floating tubesheet, internal sealed

[Link] 333/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Outside Diameter

Enter the outside diameter of the tubesheet.

Tubesheet Thickness

Enter the tubesheet thickness in uncorroded condition. If it is a re-rate, then the actual
measured thickness is typically used.

Corr. Allow. Shell Side / Channel Side

Enter the corrosion allowance on the shell side (the inner face of the tubesheet), and the
corrosion allowance on the channel side (the outer face of the tubesheet facing the
channel side).

Depth of Groove in Tubesheet (if any)

Enter the depth of a groove in the tubesheet, used to locate the channel partition plate and
its gasket. If there is no groove for example in a single pass exchanger, this value is 0.

[Link] 334/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tubesheet Extended as Flange?

Select if the tubesheet is extended as a flange, so that it is subject to the bolt load from the
mating flange.

Thickness of Extended Portion

When Tubesheet Extended as Flange? is selected, enter the thickness of the portion of
the tubesheet that is extended for bolting.

Bolt Load Transferred to Tubesheet?

When Tubesheet Extended as Flange? is selected, also select this option if the bolt load
is transferred to the tubesheet, extended as the flange. Do not select if the tubesheet is
gasketed with both the shell and channel flanges. Otherwise, the tubesheet can still be
extended, but the bolt load is not transferred to the tubesheet extension. Carefully consider
all possible cases, such the hydrotest. When this option is not selected, the required
thickness of tubesheet extension is not calculated.

[Link] 335/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Integral Channel Properties for ASME Floating Configuration A

These properties are needed for floating heat exchangers with the floating tubesheet
welded to head.

Channel Thickness tc

Channel Design Temperature

Channel Material - Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database
with most of the materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The
software also includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the
analysis but does not modify the database.

In ASME nomenclature this is Configuration A:

Exchanger with an Immersed Floating Head:

Exchanger with an Externally Sealed Floating Head:

[Link] 336/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Exchanger with an Internally Sealed Floating Head:

Spherical Cover/Backing Ring Tab (Heat Exchanger Tubesheet

Input Dialog)

Description

Enter the description for the spherical cover. The description appears on your final report.

Design Temperature

Enter the design temperature for each head. This temperature is used to interpolate the
material allowable tables and external pressure curves.

Type of Floating Head

Select the type of floating head or spherically dished cover, corresponding to Figure 1-6 of
ASME, Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1:

[Link] 337/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

b - Solid thick head, spherically dished.

c - Thin dished head, continuous across

flange face.

d - Spherical cap welded to flange ID.

None

d is the most common type of head

used for heat exchanger floating heads.

Flange and Gasket Information

Opens the Flange and Gasket Information dialog, where you define flange, gasket, and
bolt data for the selected floating head type.

Inside Crown Radius (L)

Enter the inside crown radius, usually roughly equal to the flange ID. This value may be
any dimension greater than the inside radius of the flange.

Head Thickness (t)

Enter the minimum thickness of the actual plate used to build the floating head or spherical
cap, or the minimum thickness measured for an existing floating head or spherical cap.

Head Internal Corrosion Allowance

Enter the corrosion allowance on the concave side of the head. The software adjusts the
thickness and the diameter for the evaluation of allowable pressure. The allowance is also
added to the required thicknesses. Some common corrosion allowances are:

0.0625 - 1/16"

0.1250 - 1/8"

0.2500 - 1/4"

[Link] 338/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Head External Corrosion Allowance

The software adjusts the thickness and the diameter for the evaluation of allowable
pressure. The allowance is also added to the required thicknesses.

Flange Thickness (tf)

Enter the through thickness of the flange. For type c spherical caps, this includes the
thickness of the head.

Slotted Flange

Select if the flange has slotted bolt holes for quick opening. A slotted flange has bolt holes
extending radially to the outer edge of the flange. The software automatically adjusts for
this condition; you do not have to change the flange outside diameter.

Full Face Gasket Option

Specifies whether a full face gasket is used for the flange. Gaskets for full face flanges are
usually of soft materials such as rubber or an elastomer, so that the bolt stresses do not
exceed allowables during gasket seating. The software adjusts the flange analysis and the
design formula to account for the full face gasket.

ASME Sec. VIII Div. 1 does not cover the design of flanges for which the gasket extends
beyond the bolt circle diameter. The software uses the design method from the Taylor
Forge Flange Design Bulletin.

Codes such as EN 13445 and PD 5500 have explicit rules for flanges with full
face gaskets. Consult the appropriate code.

Program Selects

The software automatically selects a full face gasket flange only when the gasket ID and
OD dimensions match the flange ID and OD dimensions (except for a blind flange).
Otherwise

[Link] 339/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Full Face Gasket

Specifies a full face gasket flange. Use this option when the gasket ID or OD dimensions
do not match the flange ID or OD dimensions, but the gasket extends beyond the bolt
circle diameter.

Not a Full Face

Specifies that the flange gasket is not full face.

[Link] 340/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Head Material Name

Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Flange Material Name

Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Floating Head Factors (Spherical Cover/Backing Ring Tab)

Compute "F" even if the pressure is 0

Select to calculate the factor F in the floating head even when the internal pressure is
zero. F is a direct function of the internal pressure. If the internal pressure is 0, then F is
equal to 0. However, a conservative interpretation of the code always calculates F
regardless of the case being analyzed. Typically, the flange-bolt-up case is in question
because there is no internal pressure when bolting up the unit, so this option is not
selected. Select this option only for a conservative calculation.

[Link] 341/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Distance from Flange Centroid to Head Centerline (hr)

Enter the distance hr from the flange centroid to the intersection of the head centerline and
the flange. Enter the value in the corroded condition. The value is positive if it is above the
flange centroid, and negative if it is below the flange centroid. This distance is used in the
code calculation but not when Perform Soehren's Calc is selected (where Q is used).
See the illustration below.

Distance from Flange Top to Flange/Head Intersection

Enter the distance from the top of the floating head flange to the intersection of the dished
head and the flange in the uncorroded condition, and then click Compute. The software
considers the corrosion allowance, calculates hr in the corroded condition, and places its
value in Distance from Flange Centroid to Head Centerline (hr). Other than for this
purpose, this value is not used by the software.

Compute

If Distance from Flange Top to Flange/Head Intersection is known, you can enter it (in
the uncorroded condition) and click Compute. The software considers the corrosion
allowance, calculates hr in the corroded condition, and places its value in Distance from
Flange Centroid to Head Centerline (hr).

[Link] 342/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Perform Soehren's Calc

Select to perform Soehren's calculation, a more detailed analysis of the interaction

between the spherical cap and the flange. The stresses calculated are frequently
acceptable for heads or flanges that are slightly less thick than required by the normal
code rules. This analysis can only be done for type d floating heads. Par. 1-6(h) of the
code allows this type of analysis.

Dim Q

Enter the distance Q from the flange bolting face to the intersection of the attached head
inside diameter and the flange. Q is used in the Soehren's calculation, but not in the code
calculation (where hr is used). See the illustration above.

Backing Ring Data (Spherical Cover/Backing Ring Tab)

Is There a Backing Ring?

Select if a backing ring is used. A backing ring is a second flange used to sandwich the
tubesheet of a floating head heat exchanger.

Backing Ring Material

Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Backing Ring Inside Diameter

Type the inside diameter of the backing ring. This value is usually slightly larger than the
inside diameter (ID) of the flange.

[Link] 343/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

1 - Backing Ring OD

2 - Backing Ring ID

3 - Backing Ring

4 - Floating Head

5 - Tubesheet

Adapted from Figure RCB 5.141, TEMA standards

Backing Ring Outside Diameter

Type the outside diameter of the backing ring. This value is usually slightly smaller than the
outside diameter (OD) of the flange.

1 - Backing Ring OD

2 - Backing Ring ID

3 - Backing Ring

4 - Floating Head

5 - Tubesheet

Adapted from Figure RCB 5.141, TEMA standards

Backing Ring Thickness

Enter the actual through thickness of the backing ring. For doubly split rings (when 2 is
selected for Number of Splits in Backing Ring), this is the thickness of each piece.

[Link] 344/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Number of Splits in Backing Ring

Select the number of splits in the ring, if any, for loose-type flanges. Select 0, 1, or 2. Split
flanges are typically ring-type flanges. A split is used when the flange must be completely
removable from the vessel.

Ring with a single split:

When the flange is split into two pieces by a single split, the split is along the
diameter, and the design bending moment for the flange is multiplied by 2.0.

Ring with a double split:

A ring with two splits has two stacked rings, with each half split along the diameter.
The software analyzes each ring as if it were a solid flange (without splits) using 0.75
times the design bending moment. Backing Ring Thickness is the thickness of
each piece. The thickness of the total ring is twice this value. The pair of rings is
assembled so that the splits in one ring are at 90º from the splits in the other ring.

[Link] 345/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

For TEMA vessels, backing ring equations are found in Section RCB 5.141 of the
TEMA standard.

Add a Clip
Home tab: Details > Add a Clip

Adds a clip to the vessel. In the dialog, enter clip support information on cylinders as well
as elliptical, torispherical and spherical heads. Clips are used to carry load, such as from
piping, ladders, and platforms. These loads, along with pressures, cause local stress at the
clip support location. WRC 107/537 is used to calculate the local stresses and compare
them to the allowables.

Sustained, expansion, and occasional loads on the clip must be determined from a
separate analysis and entered. Clips supporting piping generally have loads in all
categories, while platform clips generally have only sustained and occasional loads.

From Node

Displays the From Node for the selected element.

Description of Clip

Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Distance from "From" Node

Enter the distance from the From Node to the center of the clip.

[Link] 346/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Layout Angle

Enter the angle between the designated zero degree reference direction on the vessel
drawing and the centerline of the clip at the point where it is attached to the shell, following
the same conventions used for a nozzle. For more information, see Layout Angle.

Is the Clip Circular?

Select if the clip has a circular cross-section.

Clip Parameters

Circumferential Length (C11)

Enter the length that the clip extends around the circumference of the cylinder element.
For spherical head elements that can be analyzed using this method, the clip must be
square in cross-section.

Longitudinal Length (C22)

Enter the length that the clip extends along the length of the cylinder element. For
spherical head elements that can be analyzed using this method, the clip must be square
in cross-section.

Thickness

Enter the distance that the pad extends radially from the shell surface or reinforcing pad.
The thickness is not used to calculate stresses, but is used to calculate the weight and
draw the 3D image.

When Is the Clip Circular? is selected, the clip parameters are Clip Outside
Diameter, Clip Outside Projection, and Wall Thickness.

Pad Parameters

Reinforcing pad used?

Select if there is a pad under the clip.

Circumferential Length (C11p)

Enter the length that the pad extends around the circumference of the cylinder element.
For spherical head elements that can be analyzed using this method, the pad must be
square in cross-section.

Longitudinal Length (C22p)

[Link] 347/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Enter the length that the pad extends along the length of the cylinder element. For
spherical head elements that can be analyzed using this method, the pad must be square
in cross-section.

Thickness

Enter the distance that the pad extends radially from the shell surface. The thickness is not
used to calculate stresses, but is used to calculate the weight and draw the 3D image.

When Is the Clip Circular? is selected, the pad parameters are Pad Diameter
and Thickness.

Fatigue Parameters

Use Kn and Kb

Select to use the Kn and Kb parameters, based on the fillet radius for the clip or pad and
used for fatigue analysis.

Clip Fillet Radius

Enter the clip fillet weld radius. See Appendix B in the WRC 107/537 bulletin for
illustrations and more information.

Pad Fillet radius

Enter the pad fillet weld radius. See Appendix B in the WRC 107/537 bulletin for
illustrations and more information.

Local Attachment Loads at the Shell Surface

You can enter values in the following load sets:

Sustained - (SUS) Primary loads, typically weight + pressure + forces.

Expansion - (EXP) Secondary, self-limiting thermal expansion loads.

Occasional - (OCC) Irregularly occurring, short-term loads, such as wind loads,

seismic loads, and water hammer.

These local loads are used to analyze the stresses at the base of the clip in the shell. They
are not used by the software to produce a global bending moment over the entire vessel
cross section (Use Force and Moment to do this). The positive orientation of the loads
is shown below. These loads are generally calculated, given as defaults or calculated by a
stress analysis program such as CAESAR II.

[Link] 348/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The following force/moment convention is used for a square or circular clip on a

cylindrical element:

P - Radial force
Vc - Circumferential shear force
Vl - Longitudinal shear force
Mc - Circumferential moment
Ml - Longitudinal moment
Mt - Torsional moment

The following force/moment convention is used for a square or circular clip on a spherical
vessel:

P - Radial force
V1 - Shear force, B to A
V2 - Shear force, D to C
M1 - Moment, B axis
M2 - Moment, C axis
Mt - Torsional moment

[Link] 349/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Previous

If you created more than one clip on the element, click to go back to the previous clip.

Go To Next Clip

If you created more than one clip on the element, click to go to the next clip.

Add New Clip

Click to add a new clip to the element.

Delete

Deletes all data for the current clip.

Lifting Lug/Trunnion
Home tab: Details > Lifting Lug/Trunnion

Opens the LIfting Lug/Trunnion Input dialog for adding lifting lugs and trunnions to the
selected vessel. Lugs and trunnions are placed in groups of two and display in the model.
You can create:

Flat-type lugs on vertical vessels, generally place near the top head.

[Link] 350/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Perpendicular, ear-type lugs for horizontal vessels.

Trunnions for vertical and horizontal vessels.

[Link] 351/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The software calculates the reactions and stresses on each lug/trunnion group and the
stress in the welds.

Delete

Deletes all data for the lug or trunnion.

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

Is this a Trunnion?
Select this option to place a trunnion. Clear this option to place a lifting lug.

Lifting Lug/Trunnion Description

Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Layout Angle
Enter the angle between the designated zero degree reference direction on the vessel
drawing and the centerline of the lug or trunnion at the point where it is attached to the

[Link] 352/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

shell, following the same conventions used for a nozzle. For more information, see Layout
Angle on the Nozzle Orientation (Nozzle Main Tab).

Distance from "From" Node

Defines the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to a location on the detail:

Stiffening Ring

Centerline of the first ring.

Nozzle

Centerline of the nozzle. If the nozzle is located in a head, then enter the distance from the
head centerline. This dimension should always be entered if it is not zero.

Weight

Point at which the weight acts.

Force and Moment

Point at which the force or moment acts.

Platform

Bottom of the platform.

Packing

Start of the packed section.

Saddle

Vertical centerline of the saddle.

[Link] 353/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tray

Bottom of the lowest tray.

Lug

Centroid of the lug attachment weld.

Legs

Centroid of the leg attachment weld. The software uses the value of Overall Length of
Legs when performing AISC unity checks.

Liquid

Start of the liquid section.

Insulation

Start of the insulated section.

[Link] 354/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lining

Start of the lined section.

Halfpipe Jacket

The distance that the jacket starts from the circumferential seam of this element. This
value, in conjunction with Length Along Shell of Jacket Section, is used to determine
the weight of the jacket.

Tubesheet

The distance from the shell to the outer face of the nearer tubesheet.

Generic Clip

Center of the clip.

Lifting Lug

For a vertical vessel, the centroid of the weld group. For example, the base of the lug + 1/2
the weld distance (wl) on the side of the lug. If the vessel is horizontal, enter the distance
from the left end or tangent of the vessel to the center of each of the two lugs.

Trunnion

Center of the trunnion diameter.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Bottom of the jacket.

Lug Contact Width (w)

For a flat lug, enter the width of the lug at the base. For a perpendicular lug, enter the
longer length of the lug along the surface. This option is only available when placing a lug.

[Link] 355/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Diameter of Hole in Lug (dh)

Enter the diameter of the hole cut or drilled into most lifting lugs. This option is only
available when placing a lug.

Radius of Semi-circular Arc (r)

Enter the radius of the semi-circular part of the lifting lug where the hole is located. This is
typically circular on flat lugs and semi-circular on perpendicular lugs. This option is only
available when placing a lug.

Height from Bottom to Center of Hole (h)

Enter the distance along the axis of the vessel from the center of hole to the bottom of the
lug. This option is only available when placing a lug.

Trunnion Length (Tl)

Enter the trunnion length. This is the distance between from the vessel surface to the
inside of the trunnion outer cap.

Trunnion Outer Diameter (Tod)

Enter the outside diameter of the trunnion.

Trunnion Wall Thickness (Tthk)

Enter the trunnion wall thickness.

Sling/Bail Width (Tt)

Enter the width of the sling or bail used to lift the trunnion.

Offset from Vessel OD to Center of Hole (off)

Enter the distance from the center of the hole to base of the lifting lug. For perpendicular
lugs this is to the vessel OD. If the orientation is flat this is 1/2 the thickness of the lug. This
option is only available when placing a lug.

[Link] 356/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Lug Fillet Weld Size (tf)

Enter the fillet weld leg size. For stress analysis of the welds, the leg dimension is
converted into the throat dimension. This option is only available when placing a lug.

Length of Weld Along Side of Lifting Lug (wl)

Enter the length of the long welds on the side of the lifting lug. The software multiplies this
value by two when determining the weld area. This option is only available when placing a
lug.

Length of Weld Along Bottom of Lifting Lug (wb)

Enter the length of the short weld. This is usually the bottom weld. This option is only
available when placing a lug.

Collar Thickness (tc)

If the lug has a collar, enter the thickness. The thickness is measured from the outside
surface of the lug to the edge of the collar. This option is only available when placing a lug.

Collar Diameter (dc)

Enter the diameter of the collar. This value is mainly used for documentation. This option is
only available when placing a lug.

Lug Thickness (t)

Enter thickness of the lifting lug plate. This option is only available when placing a lug.

Lug/Trunnion Material
Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

[Link] 357/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Sling Angle from Horizontal

Enter the sling angle in degrees. This option is only available when placing a lug.

Occasional Load Factor

Enter an occasional load factor, used in many construction codes to increase the allowable
stress for an event that is considered occasional in nature. Such occasional loads are
wind, seismic, and the lifting of a vessel. The occasional load factor is multiplied by other
terms in the allowable stress equation to get the overall allowable. If you do not want to
use this value, enter 1.

Impact Factor
Enter the impact factor to account for lifting a vessel when it may be pulled quickly with
sudden force. This value typically ranges from 1.5 to 2.0, although values as high as 3.0
may be entered. The software multiplies the lifting loads by the impact factor. The
theoretical maximum value for this value is 2.0.

[Link] 358/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Number of Lugs in Group

Enter the number of lugs in this group:

For a horizontal vessel, there is typically one lifting lug on each side of the vessel.
The number of lugs in a group is 1. If there are two lugs on each end (such as for a
large vessels), the value is 2.

For a vertical vessel, there are typically two flat lugs located near the top of the
vessel. The number of lugs in a group is 2. A value of 1 for a vertical vessel should
never be used.

Additional Normal Force (Fn)

Enter an additional normal force acting on the lifting lug. This force is typically acting when
there is no spreader bar used in the lifting procedure. For a horizontal vessel, enter the
tangential force acting on the lug. This option is only available when placing a lug.

The normal or tangential force causes weak axis bending on the lug. Even a moderate
force can cause a high bending stress. This is to be avoided. If there is an additional force,
enter the value for each lug. The software applies the impact factor to this value.

[Link] 359/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Pad Parameters

Is there a pad?

Select if there is a pad under the lug or trunnion.

Pad Diameter (Dp)

Enter the diameter of the pad. The pad diameter is the length along the vessel shell, not
the projected diameter around the trunnion. This option is only available when placing a
trunnion.

Circumferential Width (wpb)

Enter the width of the pad along the circumference of the vessel. This option is only
available when placing a lug.

Longitudinal Length (wpl)

Enter the length of the pad along the long axis of the vessel. This option is only available
when placing a lug.

Pad Thickness (thkp)

Enter the thickness of the pad plate.

[Link] 360/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Pad Fillet Weld Size (tfp)

Enter the weld leg length for the pad fillet weld.

Lug Style

Is the lug slotted?

Select if the lifting lug is slotted. This option is only available when placing a lug.

Lug Perpendicular?

Select to analyze lifting lugs that are in a perpendicular orientation to the vertical vessel.

Slot Radius (rs)

Enter the slot radius. This option is only available when placing a lug.

Slot Weld Height (swh)

Enter the slot weld height along the vessel axis from the slot hole center to the lug bottom.
This option is only available when placing a lug.

Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Home tab: Details > Jacket or Vapor/Distribution Belt

Adds ASME cylindrical jackets to the shell on the selected cylinder element, according to
ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 9 or ASME Section VIII, Division 2, Part 4.11. PV
Elite uses PD 5500 and EN 13445 for jacket analysis requirements.

This command is only available when Cylinder is selected as the Element Type.

A Type 1 jacket is specified as either a jacket or a vapor belt. Vapor belts cover perforated
areas of some vessels but are more typically found on shell and tube heat exchangers.
Jackets can have separate design conditions from the parent cylindrical element. Vapor
belts have the same design conditions as the parent cylindrical element. The software
calculates the required thickness and MAWP for the jacket and closure bars. The MAWP of
vapor belts can influence nozzle design as well as the overall MAWP of the vessel. The
software calculates the stiffened length of the inner vessel to account for the closure bars.

[Link] 361/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Both jackets and vapor belts can have nozzles attached. If a nozzle has an internal
projection that cuts into the parent shell, the nozzle reinforcement calculations are for the
parent shell. If the nozzle does not have an internal projection, the calculation is for the
jacket. According to Appendix 9/Part 4.11, nozzle calculations are not required for both the
jacket and inner vessel.

The internal pressure in a vapor belt adds to the vacuum (external) pressure in the inner
shell. This extra pressure is reflected in the external pressure report generated during
analysis.

Appendix 9/Part 4.11 jackets are joined by inter-connecting pipework, affecting static
pressure head considerations.

Enter the specific gravity of the fluid in the jacket or vapor belt. The software uses
this value to calculate the weight of the fluid in the annular area.

Delete

Deletes all jacket data.

From Node

Displays the From Node for the selected element. The From Node is the software-
generated node number describing the starting location of the element. The value cannot
be modified.

Jacket Length L
Enter the length of the jacket along the cylinder element.

[Link] 362/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Dist from From Node to Jacket Bottom

Enter the axial or longitudinal distance from the From Node to the bottom of the jacket.

Jacket Description
Defines an alpha-numeric string to identify the detail. This must be a unique value
compared to all other detail descriptions on the vessel. A consistent naming convention is
recommended. For example, use the From Node number with an alphabetical extension
showing the detail type and the number of details, such as the following descriptions when
10 is the From Node: 10 NOZ A, 10 INS, 10 RIN 1 of 12, or 10 Saddle A.

Is this a Vapor / Distribution Belt?

Select if the jacket is a vapor belt or distribution belt.

Select Jacket Figure

Select either the Type 1 or Type 2 jacket configuration. Other jacket configurations in
ASME Section VIII Division 1, Appendix 9, Fig 9-2 or ASME Section VIII Division 2, Part 4,
Fig 4.11.1 are not supported. PV Elite uses PD 5500 and EN 13445 for jacket analysis
requirements.

Jacket Longitudinal Efficiency

Enter the welded joint efficiency, as defined in ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Table UW-12.
For the weld on a Type 1 jacket (welded from both sides or with a removable backing
strip), use the following efficiencies:

Full radiography: 1.00

[Link] 363/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Spot x-ray: 0.85

No radiography: 0.70

Jacket Material
Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

PV Elite uses PD 5500 and EN 13445 for jacket analysis requirements.

Design Temperature, Internal

Enter the design temperature for internal pressure. Available when Is this a Vapor /
Distribution Belt (cut outs in shell)? is not selected.

Design Temperature, External

Enter the design temperature for external pressure. Available when Is this a Vapor /
Distribution Belt (cut outs in shell)? is not selected.

Jacket Pressure, Internal

Enter the design pressure for internal pressure analysis. Available when Is this a Vapor /
Distribution Belt (cut outs in shell)? is not selected.

Jacket Pressure, External

Enter the design pressure for external pressure analysis. Available when Is this a Vapor /
Distribution Belt (cut outs in shell)? is not selected.

[Link] 364/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Jacket Thickness
Enter the jacket thickness.

Jacket Corrosion Allowance

Enter the thickness of the corrosion allowance for the jacket.

Jacket Length for External Pressure

Enter the length of the jacket to use for external pressure calculations.

Jacket Inside Diameter

Enter the inside diameter of the jacket.

Jacket Head Type

Select the jacket head type:

Elliptical

Torispherical

Hemispherical

Aspect Ratio
The aspect ratio is the ratio of the major axis to the minor axis for the ellipse. For a
standard 2:1 elliptical head, the aspect ratio is 2.0.

Inside Crown Radius

Enter the crown radius in the case of a torispherical jacket head.

Knuckle Radius
Enter the knuckle radius in the case of a torispherical jacket head.

[Link] 365/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Joint Efficiency
Enter the seam efficiency of the jacket. This value is greater than 0 and less than or equal
to 1.0. In general, 1.0 for full radiography. 0.85 for spot x-ray. 0.70 for no radiography.

Jacket Head Thickness

Enter the new thickness of the jacket head.

Corrosion Allowance
Enter the corrosion allowance. The program adjusts both the actual thickness and the
inside diameter for the corrosion allowance that you enter.

Select Closure Figure Type

Select one of the following closure types, according to ASME Section VIII, Division 1,
Appendix 9, Fig. 9-5 or ASME Section VIII, Division 2, Part 4, Table 4.11.1. PV Elite uses
PD 5500 and EN 13445 for jacket analysis requirements.

Div. 1 = Type (a)

Div. 2 = Detail 1

[Link] 366/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Div. 1 = Type (b-1)

Div. 2 = Detail 2 (a)

Div. 1 = Type (b-2)

Div. 2 = Detail 2 (b)

Div. 1 = Type (b-3)

Div. 2 = Detail 2 (c)

[Link] 367/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Div. 1 = Type (c)

Div. 2 = Detail 3

Div. 1 = Type (d-1)

Div. 2 = Detail 4 (a)

Div. 1 = Type (d-2)

Div. 2 = Detail 4 (b)

[Link] 368/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Div. 1 = Type (e-1)

Div. 2 = Detail 4 (c)

Div. 1 = Type (e-2)

Div. 2 = Detail 4 (d)

Div. 1 = Type (f-1)

Div. 2 = Detail 5 (a)

[Link] 369/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Div. 1 = Type (f-2)

Div. 2 = Detail 5 (b)

Div. 1 = Type (f-3)

Div. 2 = Detail 5 (c)

Div. 1 = Type (g-1)

Div. 2 = Detail 6 (a)

Div. 1 = Type (g-2)

Div. 2 = Detail 6 (b)

[Link] 370/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Div. 1 = Type (g-3)

Div. 2 = Detail 6 (c)

Div. 1 = Type (g-4)

Div. 2 = Detail 6 (d)

Div. 1 = Type (g-5)

Div. 2 = Detail 6 (e)

Div. 1 = Type (g-6)

Div. 2 = Detail 6 (f)

[Link] 371/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Div. 1 = Type (h, i-1(a))

Div. 2 = Detail 7 (a)

Div. 1 = Type (h, i-1(b))

Div. 2 = Detail 7 (b)

Div. 1 = Type (h, i-2)

Div. 2 = Detail 7 (c)

[Link] 372/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Div. 1 = Type (k)

Div. 2 = Detail 8

Closure Material
Specifies the name of the material. The software contains a database with most of the
materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software also
includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

PV Elite uses PD 5500 and EN 13445 for jacket analysis requirements.

Closure Thickness
Thickness of the plate used for the closure.

Total Corrosion Allowance

Enter the thickness of the corrosion allowance for the closure.

Specific Gravity of Contents

Enter the specific gravity of any fluid contained within the jacket. This value is usually 1.0.

[Link] 373/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Half Apex Angle

When Type (b-2), Detail 2(b), Type (c), Detail 3, Type (k), or Detail 8 is selected for
Select Closure Figure Type, enter the half apex angle qmax (or theta max). For example:

For more information, see ASME Section VIII, Division 1, paragraph UG-33, Figure UG-
33.1 for half apex angles on typical geometries.

For most internal pressure calculations, the half apex angle should not be greater
than 30º, though the software calculates results for up to 60º. For external pressure
calculations, the angle must not be greater than 60º.

Thickness of Insulation
Enter the thickness of the insulation or fireproofing.

Density of Insulation
Enter the density of the insulation, such as the following typical densities:

Material Type Density

(lbs/ft3)

Calcium Silicate 22.5

Foam Glass 16.0

Mineral Wool 14.0

[Link] 374/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Glass Fiber 11.0

Asbestos 30.0

Careytemp 18.0

Kaylo 10 22.0

Perlite / Celo-temp 1500 23.0

Polyurethane 4.0

Styrofoam 3.0

API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis

Home tab: Details > API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis

Adds API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis information on the selected element.

Previous

Select to view the previous flawed defined on the selected element.

Add New Flaw

Select to define another flaw on the selected element.

Delete

Select to delete the current flaw from the element.

From Node
Displays the From Node for the selected element.

[Link] 375/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Distance from 'From' Node

Enter the distance between the From Node and the flaw that you are defining.

New/Existing Damage Description

Type a description for the damage.

Layout Angle
Specifies the angle between the designated zero degree reference direction on the vessel
and the centerline of the nozzle at the point where it is attached to the shell.

For a horizontal vessel, the zero degree line is at 12:00 (looking at a clock); 90 degrees is
at 3:00. Entering these layout angles is important if the horizontal vessel has a liquid level
and the nozzles are being designed using Design P + Static Head, selected for
Nozzle/clip design pressure options on the Load Cases tab. For a vertical vessel, the
angle is more arbitrary. For purposes of rendering the graphics, the assumption is that the
zero degree line is at 3:00 and 90 degrees is 12:00.

The position of the zero degree reference direction (North, West or East) and the angular
rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) are set in Tools tab, Set Configuration
Parameters , Default Value Settings Tab (Configuration Dialog).

If the new orientation is different from the orientation of the current model, the software
asks to update the model with the new settings. If the settings are updated, the weights
and areas of platforms must be recalculated:

Click Detail List . On the Detail Listing dialog box, click the Platform tab so that
platform data is visible. Click Platform Wind Area and Platform Weight to
recalculate.

Click Platform for each platform. Tab through the fields in the Platform dialog
box, causing the weight and area to be recalculated

The angular settings apply to nozzles, clips, legs, lifting lugs, support lugs, base
rings, platforms, weights and half-pipe jackets.

[Link] 376/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Examples

Default Orientation

Angle Position: North

Rotation Direction: Clockwise

Flaw Type
Select the type of damage observed from the following flaw types.

Part 4 (General Metal Loss) - Select this option when the general metal loss
(uniform or local, inside or outside) exceeds, or is predicted to exceed, the corrosion
allowance before the next scheduled inspection. Assessments are based on point
thickness readings and thickness profiles (see paragraph 4.3.3), whether the metal
loss is uniform or local, and the degree of conservatism acceptable for the

[Link] 377/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

assessment. You can use the methodology shown in Figure 4.2 to determine the
assessment procedure for the evaluation.

Table 4.2 provides component type definitions and examples.

Part 5 (Local Thinning Area) - Select this option when the metal loss on the surface
of the component is localized, and the length of metal loss is about the same as the
width.

Part 5 (Groove like Flaw) - Select this option when the flaw is either:

Groove - A local, elongated, thin-spot caused by directional erosion or

corrosion. The length of the metal loss is significantly greater than the width.

A sharp radius might be present at the base of a groove-like flaw.

Gouge - A local, elongated, mechanical removal or relocation of material from the

component surface resulting in a reduction in wall thickness at the flaw. The length of
the gouge is much greater than the width. The material might have been cold worked
in the formation of the flaw. Gouges are typically caused by mechanical damage, for
example, denting and gouging of a section of pipe by mechanical equipment during
the excavation of a pipeline. Gouges are frequently associated with dents due to the
nature of mechanical damage. If a gouge is present, the assessment procedures of
Part 12 shall be used.

Part 6 (Pitting) - Select this option when one of the four types of pitting is present:

widely scattered pitting over a significant region of the component,

a local thin area (LTA) located within a region of widely scattered pitting,

localized regions of pitting, and

pitting confined within a region of an LTA.

The flowchart in Figure 6.2 provides details of the required assessment procedures.
Depending on the type of pitting damage, you must use for evaluation either the
assessment methods in Part 6 or a combination of assessment methods in Part 5 and Part
6.

Assessment Level
Select the assessment level. See the description below that corresponds to your selection
for Flaw Type.

[Link] 378/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Part 4 (General Metal Loss)

Select Level 1 and Level 2 if the following four points are true. Otherwise select Level 1
only or Level 2 only.

The original design criteria was in accordance with a recognized code or standard
(see Part 1, paragraphs 1.2.2 or 1.2.3).

The metal loss region has relatively smooth contours without notches (that is,
negligible local stress concentrations).

The component is not in cyclic service.

A component is not in cyclic service if the component is subjected to less than 150
cycles throughout its previous operating history and future planned operation, or the
component satisfies the cyclic service screening procedure in Annex B1, paragraph
B1.5.2. A cycle is defined as pressure or temperature variations including operational
changes and start-ups and shut-downs.

The following limitations on component types and applied loads are satisfied:

Level 1 Assessment - Type A Components subject to internal pressure or

external pressure (that is, supplemental loads are assumed to be negligible).

Level 2 Assessment - Type A or B Components (see Part 4, paragraph 4.2.5)

subject to internal pressure, external pressure, supplemental loads (see Annex
A, paragraph A.2.7), or any combination thereof.

Part 5 (Local Metal Loss)

Select Level 1 and Level 2 if the following five points are true. Otherwise select Level 1
only or Level 2 only.

The original design criteria were in accordance with a recognized code or standard
(see Part 1, paragraphs 1.2.2 or 1.2.3).

The material is considered to have sufficient material toughness. If there is

uncertainty regarding the material toughness, then a Part 3 assessment should be
performed. If the component is subject to embrittlement during operation due to
temperature or the process environment, a Level 3 assessment should be
performed. Temperature or process conditions that result in material embrittlement
are discussed in Annex G.

The component is not in cyclic service.

[Link] 379/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

A component is not in cyclic service if the component is subjected to less than 150
cycles throughout its previous operating history and future planned operation, or the
component satisfies the cyclic service screening procedure in Annex B1, paragraph
B1.5.2. A cycle is defined as pressure or temperature variations including operational
changes and start-ups and shut-downs.

The following limitations on component types and applied loads are satisfied:

Level 1 Assessment - Type A Components subject to internal pressure or

external pressure (that is, supplemental loads are assumed to be negligible).

Level 2 Assessment - Type A or B Components (see Part 4, paragraph 4.2.5)

subject to internal pressure, external pressure, supplemental loads (see Annex
2C, paragraph 2C.2.7), or any combination thereof.

A flaw characterized as a groove in accordance with paragraph 5.2.1.b has a groove

radius that satisfies the requirements in paragraph [Link].f.

Part 6 (Pitting)

Select Level 1 and Level 2 if these six points are true. Otherwise select Level 1 only or
Level 2 only.

The original design criteria were in accordance with a recognized code or standard
(see Part 1, paragraphs 1.2.2 or 1.2.3).

The material is considered to have sufficient material toughness. If there is

uncertainty regarding the material toughness, then a Part 3 assessment should be
performed. If the component is subject to embrittlement during operation due to
temperature and/or the process environment, a Level 3 assessment should be
performed. Temperature and/or process conditions that result in material
embrittlement are discussed in Annex G.

The component is not in cyclic service.

A component is not in cyclic service if the component is subjected to less than 150
cycles throughout its previous operating history and future planned operation, or the
component satisfies the cyclic service screening procedure in Annex B1, paragraph
B1.5.2. A cycle is defined as pressure or temperature variations including operational
changes and start-ups and shut-downs.

The following limitations on component types and applied loads are satisfied:

[Link] 380/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Level 1 Assessment - Type A Components subject to internal pressure or

external pressure (that is, supplemental loads are assumed to be negligible).

Level 2 Assessment - Type A or B Components (see Part 4, paragraph 4.2.5)

subject to internal pressure, external pressure, supplemental loads (see see
Annex 2C, paragraph 2C.2.7), or any combination thereof.

Additional requirements for Level 1 assessments are:

The pitting damage is arrested.

The pitting damage is located on only one surface (either inside or outside) of
the component.

The pitting damage is composed of many pits; individual pits or isolated pairs of
pits should be evaluated using the assessment procedures in Part 5.

Additional requirements for Level 2 assessments are:

The pitting damage is characterized by localized regions of pitting, an LTA

located in a region of widely scattered pitting, or pitting that is confined within
an LTA.

The pitting damage is located on either one surface or both surfaces of the
component and the pitting damage is not overlapping (see Figure 6.3)

The pitting damage is composed of many pits; individual pits or isolated pairs of
pits should be evaluated as LTAs using the assessment procedures in Part 5.

A Level 2 only assessment should be performed if:

An appropriate pit comparison chart cannot be found (see paragraph [Link]).

A more detailed assessment of widespread pitting (inclusion of the pit-couple

orientation) is required.

Future Corrosion Allowance, local [FCAml]

Enter the future corrosion allowance (the projected future metal loss) applied to the region
of local metal loss.

[Link] 381/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Future Corrosion Allowance [FCA]

Enter the future corrosion allowance (the projected future metal loss) away from the region
of local metal loss. The future corrosion allowance should be based on past inspection
information or corrosion rate data relative to the component material in a similar
environment. Corrosion rate data can be obtained from API Publication 581 or other
sources (see paragraph 2C.2.7). The FCA is calculated by multiplying the anticipated
corrosion rate by the future service period considering inspection interval requirements of
the applicable inspection code.

Note for Part 6 – Per paragraph 6.2.7, the future corrosion allowance (FCA) shall be
based on the projected future metal loss in the pitting region. The FCA is not applied to the
depth or diameter of the pits.

Uniform Metal Loss [LOSS]

Specify the amount of uniform metal loss away from the local metal loss location at the
time of the assessment. The software uses this value to determine a suitable wall
thickness to use in the assessment.

Note for Part 4 - This is not applicable to Part 4 as the uniform metal loss is general loss.

Remaining Strength Factor [RSFa]

Enter the allowable remaining strength factor [RSFa]. The recommended RSFa for all
major design codes per the 2016 edition of API 579 is 0.90.

Local Metal Loss Data

Orientation w/Respect to Long. Axis [beta]

Enter the angle to the groove-like flaw from the longitudinal axis.

[Link] 382/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Length of Groove-like Flaw [gl]

Enter the length of the flaw. This dimension is based on the corresponding critical
thickness profile (CTP), which is measured parallel and perpendicular to the groove and
should include the projected future corrosion growth.

Width of Groove-like Flaw [gw]

Enter the width of the flaw. This dimension is based on the corresponding critical thickness
profile (CTP), which is measured parallel and perpendicular to the groove and should
include the projected future corrosion growth.

[Link] 383/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Radius at Base of Groove-like flaw [gr]

Enter the radius at the base of the flaw. This dimension is based on the corresponding
critical thickness profile (CTP), which is measured parallel and perpendicular to the groove
and should include the projected future corrosion growth.

Depth of Groove-like Flaw

Enter the depth of the flaw. This dimension is based on the corresponding critical thickness
profile (CTP), which is measured parallel and perpendicular to the grove and should
include the projected future corrosion growth.

[Link] 384/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Local Thinning Area Longitudinal Dimension [s]

Enter the longitudinal extent or length of the region of local metal loss at the time of the
inspection.

Local Thinning Area Circumferential Dimension [c]

Enter the circumferential extent or length of the region of local metal loss at the time of the
inspection.

Distance to Nearest Major Structural Discontinuity [Lmsd]

Enter the distance to the nearest major structural discontinuity. This box indicates that the
software checks the limiting flaw size criteria.

Measurement Data

Point Thickness Readings (Part 4 only)

Select this option to use point thickness readings in the assessment. This option is only
available when Flaw Type is set to Part 4 (General Metal Loss).

If you select this option, you are confirming the assumption of uniform metal loss. Point
thickness readings may be used to characterize the metal loss in a component if there are
no significant differences in the thickness reading values obtained at inspection monitoring
locations.

[Link] 385/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

A minimum of 15 thickness readings should be used unless the level of NDE used can
confirm that the metal loss is general. In some cases, additional readings might be
required based on the size of the component, the construction details used, and the nature
of the environment resulting in the metal loss. A sample data sheet to record thickness
readings is shown in Table 4.2.

API 579 - 2021 uses a limitation on the minimum measure thickness, replacing
the Coefficient of Variation (COV) check used in earlier editions.

Critical Thickness Profile

Select this option to use thickness profiles to characterize the metal loss in a component.
You must use this option if there is a significant variation in the thickness readings, which
can indicate the metal loss might be localized. Thickness profiles should be used to
characterize the remaining thickness and size of the region of metal loss.

Pitting Data (Part 6 Only)

Select this option to consider pitting data. This option is only available when Flaw Type is
set to Part 6 (Pitting).

Level 1 Assessment - The surface damage is measured in terms of pitted area, and
the maximum pit depth is used to quantify the extent of pitting damage. You can use
the standard pit charts (see Figures 6.6 to 6.13) to compare the actual damage on
the component to the damage represented on the pit chart. The pit chart and an
estimate of the maximum pit depth are used to determine acceptability. A cross-
sectional UT thickness scan can determine the pitting profile. Guidelines for
determining the maximum pit depth are in paragraph [Link] of the code.

Level 2 Assessment - The surface damage is measured using a pit-couple (two pits
separated by a solid ligament; see Figure 6.14). The metal loss of each pit in a pit-
couple is modeled as an equivalent cylinder. The diameter and depth of each pit, and
the distance between the pit centers are also required. The orientation of the pit-
couple in the biaxial stress field can also be included in the assessment (see Figure
6.14). The depth and diameter of a pit should be carefully measured because of the
variety of pit types that can occur in service (see Figure 6.5). If the pit has an
irregular shape, you should use a diameter and depth that encompasses the entire
shape for the assessment.

[Link] 386/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Edit Measurement Data

Activates the API 579 Point Thickness Readings dialog box, Critical Thickness Profile
dialog box, or the API 579 Pitting Data dialog box. Use the dialog box to enter the
measurement data for your analysis.

Pitting

Pit Chart

Select the pit chart to use.

Grade 1

Grade 2

Grade 3

Grade 4

Grade 5

Grade 6

Grade 7

[Link] 387/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Grade 8

Maximum Pit Depth (wmax)

Enter the pit depth of the deepest pit. This option is only for a Part 6, Level 1 Assessment.

Maximum Pit Diameter [d]

Enter the pit diameter of the widest pit. This option is only for a Part 6, Level 1
Assessment.

Pitting and Corrosion

Select whether the pitting and corrosion act on the same side or on opposite sides of the
vessel (see Figure 6.4).

Pit Category

Select the pit category:

Widespread Pitting - Select this option when the pitting is widespread across the
element.

[Link] 388/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Localized Pitting - Select this option if the pitting is localized.

LTA in Region of Widespread Pitting - Select this option when the region of local
metal loss (LTA) is in an area of widespread pitting. When you select this option, the
software calculates a combined Remaining Strength Factor for assessing damage.

Pitting Confined in Local Thin Area - Select this option when the pitting damage is
confined within the local thin area.

Remaining Life Assessment Options

Thickness Approach (Parts 4 and 5 only)

Select this option to calculate the remaining life of a component based on a minimum
required thickness for the intended service conditions, thickness measurements from an
inspection, and an estimate of the anticipated corrosion rate. This method is acceptable for
calculating the remaining life for Type A Components (see paragraph 4.2.5). Because the
thickness-based approach (this option) might produce non-conservative results for the
remaining life when applied to Type B, Class 1 Components (see paragraph 4.2.5), you
need to use the MAWP Approach for those components.

MAWP Approach

Select this option to calculate the remaining life of Type A or Type B, Class 1 components
using a systematic method. You must select this option for Type B, Class 1 components.
This approach also ensures that the design pressure is not exceeded during normal
operation if the future corrosion rate is accurately established.

Increase in Pit Size

Select this option if the pitting corrosion propagates by pit size, that is the depth or the
diameter of the pits increases. Enter the pit corrosion rates in the Pit Depth [PPRpit-
depth] and Pit Diameter [PPRpit-dia] fields.

This option is only available when Flaw Type is set to Part 6 (Pitting).

Increase in Pit Density

Select this option if the pitting corrosion propagates by the growth of existing pits or the
formation of new pits. This corrosion method results in an increase in the pit density, that is

[Link] 389/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

the spacing between pits decreases. Enter the pit corrosion rate in Pit Spacing (PPRpit-
spa).

This option is only available when Flaw Type is set to Part 6 (Pitting) and
Assessment Level is set to Level 2 Only or Level 1 and Level 2.

Increase in Pit Region

Select this option if the localized pitting region increases either longitudinally or
circumferentially. An increase in the local pitting region is similar to an increase in a local
thinning area (LTA). Enter the enlargement rates of the pitting region in the Longitudinal
[CrateS] and Circumferential [CrateC] fields.

This option is only available when Flaw Type is set to Part 6 (Pitting) and
Assessment Level is set to Level 2 Only or Level 1 and Level 2.

Previous Average Measured Thickness [tam_prev]

Enter the average measured thickness from the previous inspection. The software uses
this value in the Remaining Life calculations.

Corrosion Rates

Corrosion Rate [Crate]

Enter the future corrosion rate determined from previous thickness data, corrosion design
curves, or experience in similar services. This option is only for a Part 4 Assessment.

Away from Metal Loss [CrateRD]

Enter the anticipated future corrosion rate away from the local metal loss.

This option is only for a Part 5 Assessment.

Longitudinal [CrateS]

Enter the estimated rate of change of the meridional length of the region of local metal
loss. This option is only for a Part 5 or a Part 6 assessment.

[Link] 390/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Circumferential [CrateC]

Enter the estimated rate of change of the circumferential length of the region of local metal
loss. This option is only for a Part 5 or a Part 6 assessment.

Pit Depth [PPRpit-depth]

Enter the estimated rate of change of the pit characteristic depth. Pits can corrode in many
forms and sometimes the pit depth is not affected by corrosion. If you leave this value at 0,
the software does not use a pit depth corrosion rate in the remaining life pitting
calculations. However, if corrosion affects both the pit diameter and the depth and you
specify those values, the software takes both propagation rates into consideration for the
remaining life calculation.

Pit Diameter [PPRpit-dia]

Enter the rate of change of the pit characteristic diameter. Pits can corrode in many forms,
and sometimes the pit diameter is not affected by corrosion. If you leave this value at 0,
the software does not use the pit diameter corrosion rate in the remaining life pitting
calculations. However, if corrosion affects both the pit diameter and the depth and you
specify those values, the software takes both propagation rates into consideration for the
remaining life calculation.

Pit Spacing [PPRpit-spa]

Enter the rate of change, as a negative number, of the average spacing between two
nearest neighboring pits. Measure the rate of change from the center of each pit.

API Overriding Values Dialog Box

Click Overriding Values on the API-579 Flaw/Damage Input/Analysis dialog to activate
the API Overriding Values dialog. Use this dialog to specify overriding values information
for the selected element in areas such as the corrosion allowance on remaining life, design
condition specifics, and overriding force and moment details.

Effective Corrosion Allowance for Remaining Life [CAe]

Enter the effective corrosion allowance the software uses to determine a remaining life,
specifically for iterations in the MAWP approach. This approach optimizes the MAWP
based on an iteration of the future corrosion allowance. When you specify the input for

[Link] 391/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

effective corrosion allowance the software overrides the iterations and instead calculates a
specific remaining life for the given future corrosion allowance.

Use Design Conditions per API 579 2007 Paragraph A.2.2.a

Select this option if you want the software to follow design conditions specified in API 579
2007.

Use Overriding Force and Moments Values

Select this option if you want the software to override the applied forces and moments for
supplemental loads (i.e., seismic, wind, or user-defined) with values that you specify. You
must select this option to activate the applied forces and moments check boxes below this
option.

Applied Axial Force [F]

Enter the magnitude of the external axial force.

Applied Shear Force [V]

Enter the magnitude of the external shear force.

Applied Bending Moment [M]

Enter the magnitude of the external bending moment.

Applied Torsional Moment [Mt]

Enter the magnitude of the external torsional moment.

Rib/Stiffener Analysis
Home tab: Details > Rib/Stiffener Analysis

Creates radial stiffeners (also called ribs) on the selected welded flat head using EN 13445
analysis and the parameters that you define on the Rib/Stiffener Analysis dialog. The
software validates stresses in the ribs and welds.

[Link] 392/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Analyze Ribs on This End/Cover

Select to enable rib, central ring, and weld data for the selected flat head.

From Node

Displays the From Node for the selected element.

Description

Specifies a description for the ribs.

Starting Angle

Specifies the angle between the designated zero-degree line of the vessel and the first rib.

Rib Data

Number of Ribs

Specifies the number of ribs to place radially around the flat head.

Length (l)

Specifies the length of each rib.

Height (h)

Specifies the height of each rib.

Thickness (er)

Specifies the thickness of each rib.

Rib Material

[Link] 393/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Specifies the name of the radial stiffener material. The software contains a database with
most of the materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software
also includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog Box.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog Box and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Central Ring Data

Is There a Central Ring?

Specifies the inclusion of a ring at the center of the radial ribs.

Outside Diameter (d1)

Specifies the outside diameter of the central ring.

Thickness (ec)

Specifies the thickness of the central ring.

Material

Specifies the name of the central ring material. The software contains a database with
most of the materials in ASME Code, Section II, Part D, Table 1A, 1B, and 3. The software
also includes materials for PD 5500 and EN 13445.

Matl...

Click to select a material directly from the Material Database Dialog Box.

Click to open the Material Properties Dialog Box and modify the material properties of the
selected element. The software changes the properties of this element for the analysis but
does not modify the database.

Weld Data

Continuous Attachment Welds

[Link] 394/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Select to allow the continuous welding of the ribs to the flat head. When selected, Throat
thickness (go) is available and weld segments fields are not available.

Throat Thickness (go)

Specifies the actual throat thickness of the weld between the rib and the flat head. The
software compares the value to the minimum required throat thickness.

Number of Weld Segments

Specifies the number of weld segments on one side of a rib. This option is available when
you clear Continuous Attachment Welds.

Weld Segments, Inside (li) to Outside (lo)

Specifies the Throat Thickness and Length for each weld segment. The grid contains a
separate row for each weld segment starting from the inside (#1) at the central ring and
moving to the outside of the flat head.

Quick Results

Displays the Quick Calculation Results dialog which contains analysis results.

Search

Searches the results report. Type text and press ENTER to find the first occurrence. Press
F3 to cycle through additional occurrences.

Delete

Deletes existing radial stiffeners.

OK

Creates radial stiffeners using the provided values, or updates existing radial stiffeners
with the provided values.

Input/Output Panel
The following commands are available on the Input/Output panel on the Home Tab.

Input

[Link] 395/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Shows and hides the data input tabs located in the bottom-left of the interface.

Component Analysis

Activates CodeCalc for component analysis.

Review Database

Opens the output database in Microsoft Access.

Input
Home tab: Input / Output > Input

Activates and hides the input tabs that appear on the bottom-left corner of the interface.

General Input

Enter data for a vessel element. For more information, see General Input Tab.

Report Headings

Enter page heading text and cover sheet text for reports. For more information, see Report
Headings (Heading Tab).

Design/Analysis Constraints

Enter data such as pressures and temperatures, hydrotest data, and wall thicknesses. For
more information, see Design Constraints Tab.

Load Cases

Enter stress combination and nozzle pressure load cases. For more information, see Load
Cases Tab.

Wind Loads

Select a wind design code and enter data required by that code. For more information, see
Wind Loads (Wind Data Tab).

Seismic Loads

Select a seismic design code and enter data required by that code. For more information,
see Seismic Loads (Seismic Data Tab).

[Link] 396/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Component Analysis
Home tab: Input / Output > Component Analysis

Opens CodeCalc and perform analyses separate from the PV Elite model. You can
perform analyses such as local loads on nozzles and tubesheet calculations. For more
information, see CodeCalc Help.

Review Database
Home tab: Input / Output > Review Database

Opens the database in Microsoft Access so you can review the contents. You need to
create the database first using Create Database in the Auxiliary panel. For more
information, see Create Database.

Utility Panel
Provides miscellaneous edit commands for functions such as insert, delete, update, and
flip to edit elements. The following commands are available on the Utility panel on the
Home Tab.

Insert Element

Insert an element before or after the current element.

Delete Element

Delete the currently selected element.

Propagate Element Diameter

Propagate element diameter to connected elements.

Share Information

Share information between elements.

Flip Element Orientation

Flips the orientation of the current element. Use this command when you want to change
the orientation of just a single element. Use Flip Model Orientation on the Tools tab to

[Link] 397/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

flip the entire model.

Select Material

Select a material from the materials database.

Zoom Mode

Zoom in and out of elements in 2D.

View Element

View 2D element plan or layout view.

Compute Ligament Efficiencies

Calculates ASME VIII-1 UG-53.x or 4.10.x ligament efficiencies for tube spacing.

Retirement Limit Calculations

Generate retirement limit calculations.

Life Fraction Calculations

Generate life fraction analysis calculations base on the Code Case on Life Fraction Design
for ASME Section VIII D1 vessels operating in the creep regime.

Transportation Analysis

Perform shipping analysis for a vessel that is transported on saddles.

Share Information
Home tab: Utility > Share Information

If your vessel has multiple elements and you need to copy element data from one element
to the other elements, use this command option.

Select the element that has the data you want to share, and then click the (Share
Information) icon. In the Data Share Dialog window, type the node number of the starting
element for which to copy data in from "From Node". Type the node number of the
ending element for which to copy data in to "From Node". Click the check boxes for the
data items you want to share, such as the diameter, thickness, corrosion allowance,
internal or external pressure, and material properties, and then click OK.

[Link] 398/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

To change nozzle data, select Change Nozzle Materials. The Select New Nozzle and
Nozzle Flange Material window displays. You can select a new nozzle, pad, or flange
material. You can also change the class or grade of a nozzle flange. To exclude any
nozzles from being updated, click the box next to the nozzle in the Exclude Nozzle list
box. Click Update all Nozzles Now to apply the changes. Click Exit to close the window
without applying the changes.

Flip Element Orientation

Home tab: Utility > Flip Element Orientation

Vessels are defined one element to the next (from bottom-to-top for vertical vessels and
from left-to-right for horizontal vessels). If the vessel begins with a skirt element, it is a
vertical vessel. Vertical vessels on legs and horizontal vessels start with a head element. If
that first element is improperly oriented for the vessel that you want to model, use this
command to correct the orientation.

After the second element is added, the vessel can no longer be flipped between horizontal
and vertical using this command. However, you can use this command later if heads, body
flanges, or cone elements need to be flipped. To flip the entire model after the second
element has been added, use Flip Model Orientation on the Tools tab.

Retirement Limit Calculations

Home tab: Utility > Retirement Limit Calculation

After a vessel or exchanger has been in service, it experiences corrosion, fouling, erosion
as well as other issues during the course of its use. As a result of corrosion, the thickness
of the vessel wall, nozzles, and so forth decreases over time. At some point, the thickness
of the component might not fulfill the requirements of the code. This could simply be that
the wall thickness is no longer acceptable for internal or external pressure or that a nozzle
might no longer meet code requirements for basic minimum structural wall thickness or
area replacement.

It is useful to determine the thickness of these components to determine their retirement

limit. To do this in the past, you had to iterate on the element’s corrosion allowance until it
failed in some way. The element thickness minus the iterated corrosion allowance yields
the retirement limit. This process can be very tedious and time consuming especially
considering the interaction between nozzles and their host elements. Depending on the
complexity of the vessel or exchanger, a re-rate can take several days. Cone-to-shell
junction analysis, horizontal vessel analysis, and others are also considered during the re-

[Link] 399/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

rating analysis. Days of manual work are collapsed into just a few seconds of analysis
using this feature.

Generate retirement limit thickness

Select to perform retirement limit calculations during analysis runtime and displays element
retirement limits on the status bar.

If the joint efficiency of the element is less than one, there will be two extra calculations
shown on the status bar: Tmin, as (Tmin at seam) and Tmin, afs (Tmin away from seam).
Because the thickness calculation involves the joint efficiency, the application shows both
results for your convenience. Below is an excerpt from the internal pressure report for a
cylinder:

Element/Component Rerate Information:

Corrosion Allowance at Retirement Limit: 0.7124 in.
Retirement Limit (Corroded Condition): 0.2876 in.
Rerate Corrosion Allowance: 0.1250 in.
Corroded Retirement Limit: 0.8750 in.
Retirement Limit, MDMT: 0.4520 in.
Retirement Limit, Away from Seam: 0.2445 in.

Generate Minimum Safe Operating Temperature Curves

Select to compute a pressure temperature curve known as an MSOT (Minimum Safe

Operating Temperature) curve. If selected, the application computes pressure versus
temperature curves for the shells, heads and nozzles where an MDMT calculation is
required. For each pressure, the governing temperature is consolidated for each
component and the governing value is chosen. The curve data is the then plotted by the
graph processor. There is an option to plot the curve in the output processor after the
analysis is finished. If the point of actual process temperature and pressure is plotted and
it falls outside of the curve, this is an unsafe condition.

Consider design MDMT when determining tmin values for elements

Select to check the MDMT while performing the rerate analysis. Because calculation of
MDMT values is a function of the stress in the vessel component as well as the thickness,
this can also influence the retirement limit results. Selecting this option might not be
required however, especially if the control system has safeties that will shut the process
down in the event that the temperature is below a certain set point.

After the analysis is run and you return to input, the Tmin values can be shown graphically
by holding down the CTRL key and moving the mouse to the component. Release the

[Link] 400/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

control key to display a tooltip window with various element information including the Tmin
value and governing reason. If the model is changed in any way, the analysis must be re-
run to obtain the new Tmin values.

Weldability Limit Thickness

Specifies the minimum base metal thickness of a component recommended for welding
and hot tapping. PV Elite uses Weldability Limit Thickness in the retirement limit
calculations as a minimum thickness for recommending on-stream welded repair.

The default value of 0.19” (that is, 3/16 in, 0.1875 in, or 4.8mm) is a common
recommended minimum thickness stated in API RP 2201, Safe Hot Tapping Practices in
the Petroleum and Petrochemical Industries (5th Edition 2003, Reaffirmed 2020) and in
other end-user internal specifications.

Life Fraction Calculations

Home tab: Utility > Life Fraction Calculations

You can perform operating conditions calculations in the time-dependent regime for ASME
VIII, Division 1 pressure vessels using the Life Fraction Calculations command. Read
the ASME CC-BPV Life Fraction Code Case publication to understand the conditions
under which you may use the alternative approach for materials operating in the time-
dependent regime.

Perform Life Fraction Analysis for Division 1 Vessels

Select to perform the life fraction calculations.

Number of Cases to Evaluate

Select the number of life fraction operating conditions to calculate. You can define up to
eight cases.

Operating Pressure (psig)

Type the operating pressure to use when calculating the operating condition.

Operating Temperature (F)

Type the operating temperature to use when calculating the operating condition.

Duration (Hours)

[Link] 401/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Type the number of hours to use when calculating the operating condition. A realistic
duration that reflects the equipment's useful life should be used when specifying the
operating condition duration. For example, if the equipment design life is 30 years and the
operating condition under consideration could occur approximately 40 percent of the time,
the operating condition duration would be 105120 hours (30 years x 365 days per year x
24 hours per day x 40%).

Transportation Analysis

Home tab: Utility > Transportation Analysis

You can perform vertical, transverse, and longitudinal load calculations on your vessel's
saddles for road, railroad, barge, and ocean transportation.

Perform Transporation Analysis?

Select this option to perform load calculations on your vessel's saddles.

Perform Road/Railroad/Barge/Ocean Transportation Analysis?

Select your transportation case. You can select any combination of cases as needed, but
you must select at least one case for the analysis to run.

Acceleration G Load Factors

Specify the load factor (in Gs) for each case and direction (longitudinal, transverse, and
vertical). The default G load values are taken from the PIP standards as shown in Table 1.

[Link] 402/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Use Vertical Acceleration Factor on W when Computing Transverse Loads?

Select this option to use the specified vertical acceleration G load when computing the
transverse load (gw) for that case. If this option is not selected, 1.0 is used for the vertical
load in the transverse load calculation. For example below, if you select this option, 1.5 is
used when calculating the transverse road case and 1.3 is used when calculating the
transverse barge case.

Pressure during Transport (usually zero)

Type a value to add an internal pressure during transportation that is used to calculate the
Longitudinal Stress at the top of and bottom of the shell.

Auxiliary Panel
The following commands are available from the Auxiliary panel on the Home Tab.

[Link] 403/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Seamless Pipe Selection Dialog Box

Open the Seamless Pipe Selection dialog box.

List Dialog

Open the Detail Listing dialog box.

Write Foundation 3D File

Create a Foundation 3D file after the model is analyzed. For more information, see
[Link].

Export to DXF File

Export the vessel geometry to a Release 12 Data Exchange File (CAD file). For more
information, see Setting Up the Required Parameters.

Rigging Results

Display rigging results.

Create Database

Create database of input files.

Element Properties

Display a list of element weights, volumes, and surface areas.

Configuration

Open the Configuration dialog box.

Create/Edit Units File

Create or review unit files.

Calculator

Open the Windows calculator.

Switch Datum Input

Enable/Disable nozzle data entry from the datum line.

Create 3D PDF Files

[Link] 404/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Enable/Disable creation of 3D model PDF files.

Seamless Pipe Selection Dialog Box

Home tab: Auxiliary > Pipe Properties

Opens the Seamless Pipe Selection dialog box, where you can select piping properties
for the shell, nozzle, or leg from the currently selected piping database.

Pipe Schedule
Select the pipe schedule from the drop-down menu.

Nominal Pipe Diameter

This value automatically gets populated after the pipe schedule is selected. This value can
then be modified if needed.

Deduct Mill Tolerance from Thickness?

Check this box if you want to deduct the mill tolerance from the thickness. This option has
no effect on nozzles or pipe legs.

List Dialog
Home tab: Auxiliary > List Dialog

Opens the Detail Listing dialog box, where you add details for platforms, nozzles,
weights, packing, forces/moments, trays, and pressure rings.

[Link] 405/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

The location of the detail can be specified from the datum position. Select the type of detail
to edit by clicking its tab. Enter the needed data for each row. Press + to add a row.

The software automatically assigns the value for From Node.

Description is required. If you do not enter one, the software ignores the
row and the data is lost.

All other data must be entered as required.

Rows of data can be duplicated from one row to the next. Click on the listing number of the
item to copy to highlight the row. Copy the row and paste it to a blank row. Change any
data that might be different for that detail.

Adjust detail elevations by

Enter a value to shift the position of all details by the specified elevation distance. A
negative value will move details down or left. A positive value moves the details up or right.
This option is useful when all of the details such as rings, nozzles, and trays need to be
adjusted by a specified amount. This may happen if an element is inserted into the model
after it has been completed and the detail elevations need to be kept constant.

If the adjustment moves a detail (such as a tray) into an element (such as a

body flange), the software does not allow this, and the detail is lost and cannot be

[Link] 406/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

recovered.

But only for "From" nodes > or =

Enter the From Node number where you would like the change in position to start. All
details on this element and the following elements are affected. A value of zero affects all
elements.

On a Head
Specifies that the vessel head contains packing.

Setting Up the Required Parameters

Home tab: Auxiliary > Export to DXF File

Instructs PV Elite to generate DXF files during an analysis run. Optionally, you can use
File > Import/Export > Export Vessel Geometry to R12 DXF File to set this option. If the
scale factor is not set, the DXF Options dialog appears prompting for the scale factor and
any other necessary options. These options should be entered after the vessel has been
completely modeled because the scaling factor is based on the overall height and length of
the vessel. It is best to check the scaling factor at the conclusion of the data input and
before the model is analyzed.

Create default border

Select to put a border around the drawing. The border style differs based on the border
size. You can create your own border styles. The borders are located in the PV
Elite\System folder. They are named ANSI_A.txt and so forth. These text files are
essentially the core of ACAD Release 12 DXF files. See the user border creation section
for more information.

Create nozzle schedule

Select to create a Nozzle Schedule. The nozzle schedule contains information pertaining
to the size and thickness of nozzles, their mark number and the necessity of reinforcing.

Create bill of material

Select to generate a Bill of Material for the major components of the vessel, such as shells,
heads, and conical sections.

Do not show ID lines

[Link] 407/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Normally the DXF file will contain ID as well as OD lines for the major shell sections. If you
do not want to see the ID lines, then check this box.

Show dimensions

Select if you want tail dimensions for the major shell courses. The element diameters and
thicknesses are shown in the BOM.

Insert design data and general notes

Select if you want the software to include design data and general notes in the DXF file.

Drawing size

Select A, B, C or D. Each size has a different style.

Scale factor

Enter the scale factor. We recommend letting the program select this value by clicking
Compute and Insert Scale Factor. We then recommend rounding up to the nearest
typical scale factor.

User Border Creation

In order to do the following, you must use Windows Explorer, AutoCad, and Notepad.

1. Start AutoCAD and open your border. The border should be ANSI standard
dimensions (8½ by 11, and so forth) scaled for the non-printable area of the paper.

2. After the border drawing is open, save it as a release 12 DXF file.

3. After the file has been saved it will be necessary to edit it with a text editor such as
Notepad. Because the main drawing will have a DXF header, it will be necessary to
delete the one in the border drawing. The DXF header ends on about line 960 with
the word Entities. Delete through this line.

4. Next delete the last four lines in the file. This is the end of file marker.

5. Save the file with a txt extension.

6. Next rename the file in the PV Elite\System folder that you will be replacing. We
suggest putting a new extension on it.

7. Save/Copy your border in the PV Elite\System folder and then rename it replacing
our default border. You should now have new ANSI_?.txt file in the PV Elite\System

[Link] 408/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

subdirectory.

Review our border drawing text files before you start. Note that the border drawings must
not contain any block attributes. These are not supported in our current implementation.

Create Database
Home tab: Auxiliary > Create Database

Creates a Microsoft Access database that contains all the input values.

Use Review Database in the Input / Output panel to review the database. For more
information, see Review Database.

Create 3D PDF Files

Home tab: Auxiliary > Create 3D PDF Files

Instructs PV Elite to create or update the 3D PDF files during analysis. When PV Elite
creates the 3D PDF files, the software activates the Insert 2D Page and Insert 3D Page
options on the Preview/Print pane of the Output Processor.

Select this option and create the 3D PDF files prior to generating your final reports. If you
make modifications to the geometry of your vessel after creating the 3D PDF files, select
this option to turn it on prior to reanalyzing the vessel to update your 3D PDF files. After
selecting reports from the Report List, click Print to PDF on the Preview/Print pane of the
Output Processor and select Insert 3D Page to include the 3D model in the output report
PDF. You can also click Print to 3D PDF on the Preview/Print pane of the Input Processor
to print the 3D model as a separate PDF file.

You must have Adobe Acrobat version 11 (or higher) to utilize the 3D PDF feature.

Analyze Panel
The following commands are available on the Analyze panel on the Home Tab.

Analyze

Analyze the vessel and produce reports and forms.

Error Check Only

[Link] 409/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Error check the vessel input.

Review Reports

Review the analysis data output for the vessel from the last analysis.

Review the DXF File

Opens the .dxf file of the model in any software installed on your computer system that is
capable of viewing .dxf-formatted files. For more information, see DXF File Generated by
PV Elite During Runtime.

Analyze
Home tab: Analyze > Analyze
Keyboard: F12

Analyzes the current model and creates the output files. Click reports in the Report List to
see results of the analysis. For more information about the reports, see Review Reports
and Output Processor.

For more information about how PV Elite performs an analysis, see PV Elite Analysis.

Although not required, we recommend that you run Error Check Only before you run
an analysis.

Error Check Only

Home tab: Analyze > Error Check Only

Runs only error checking on the model without running the analysis. Select Warnings and
Errors in the Report List to see results of the error check.

Error Checking
The Input Processor makes many data consistency checks during the input session. For
example, the processor creates an error message if you try to specify a nozzle 20 feet
from the bottom of a 10-foot shell element. However, not all data can be confirmed on
input so a general error processor is run prior to the analysis. This error processor can be
run as a stand-alone from the Analyze panel, Error Check Only .

In addition to the notes that are presented on the screen during error checking, these error
messages appear in the output report and are accessible through the output review
processor.

[Link] 410/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

As with all engineering and designing, the vessel analyst must use common
sense to insure the model is basically correct. This is a great advantage of the 3D graphics
as it reveals obvious errors.

Review Reports
Home tab: Analyze > Review

Displays the results of your analysis and output that results to a Microsoft Word file or an
ASME Form using Microsoft Excel. For more information about reports, see Output
Processor.

DXF File Generated by PV Elite During Runtime

Home tab: Analyze > Review the DXF File

Opens the DXF file using drawing software installed on your computer that supports DXF
files. If this command is available, the DXF file for this job was created during the last run.
Clicking this command submits the file to Windows, which in turn launches your drawing
software. If the input is altered, the analysis must be run in order to generate a new DXF
file.

Use Export to DXF File to define the DXF settings to use.

Units/Code Panel
The following commands are available on the Units/Code panel on the Home Tab.

Units

Specifies a units file that converts all properties in the model to the selected units. This can
also be changed by Tools > Select Units.

Design Code

Specifies the design code is used for analysis. Select (ASME) Division 1, (ASME)
Division 2, PD 5500, or EN 13445.

Div. 2 Class

[Link] 411/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Defines if this is a Class 1 or Class 2 ASME Division 2 vessel.

[Link] 412/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tools Tab
The following utility commands are available on the Tools tab:

Set Configuration Parameters

Sets configuration options for this analysis.

Select Units

Selects a new units file.

Lock/Unlock the Current Input File

Protects the current input file from having modifications made to it.

Create/Review Units

Reviews the current units file, or create a new units file.

Units Conversion

Opens the PV Elite Units Conversion Utility.

Edit/Add Materials

Edits a materials database.

File Extraction Utility

Opens the File Extraction Utility . The utility extracts input and output data files for
compressed PV Elite files.

VUE File Exporter

Opens the VUE File Exporter. The utility converts PV Elite input files into .vue format,
which can be used in Intergraph Smart® applications.

PED Classification Utility

Opens the PED Classification Utility. The utility performs calculations on the active
model to determine compliance with the design and fabrication standards of the European
Pressure Equipment Directive (PED).

[Link] 413/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Calculator

Opens the Windows calculator.

Renumber the Nodes

Resequences the From Node and To Node numbers of the elements in the vessel.

Flip Model Orientation

Flips the orientation of the entire model from horizontal to vertical or from vertical to
horizontal. Use Flip Element Orientation on the Home Tab > Utility Panel to flip just a
single element in your model.

Enter in U-1 Form Information for This Vessel

Creates an ASME U-1 form for the current vessel.

Compute Ligament Efficiencies

Calculates ligament efficiencies for tube spacing.

Display Driver

Selects your display driver. If you then have display issues, try the other option.

Configuration
Tools tab: Set Configuration Parameters
Home tab: Auxiliary > Set Configuration Parameters

Sets job-specific settings in the Configuration dialog. Many settings affect the analysis
results. Always review the configuration at the start of a new job.

Job Specific Setup Parameters Tab (Configuration Dialog)

Nozzle Analysis Directives Tab (Configuration Dialog)
ASME Directives Tab (Configuration Dialog)
Material Impact Test Temperatures Tab (Configuration Dialog)
Weld Seam Options Tab (Configuration Dialog)
DXF Options & Weld Seam Info. Tab (Configuration Dialog)
Default Value Settings Tab (Configuration Dialog)
Saving Options Tab (Configuration Dialog)
AI Settings Tab (Configuration Dialog)

[Link] 414/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Job Specific Settings Tab (Configuration Dialog)

Print water volume in gallons

Select to print out the element volume in gallons, instead of the default Volume cubic
diameter unit. This command is independent of the selected units system.

Round thickness to nearest nominal size

Select to round thicknesses to the nearest 1/16 of an inch (if you are in English units) or
the nearest 1mm (if you are in SI or MM units). The software increases the thickness of an
element if you so specify in Design Constraints Tab and the element thickness is
inadequate.

Print equations and substitutions

Select to print formulas and substitutions for internal and external pressure calculations in
analysis reports.

Print flange calcs for external pressure

Select to always print external pressure calculations on flanges in addition to the default
internal pressure calculations. When this option is not selected, the software does not print
external pressure calculations unless the required thickness generated by the external
pressure exceeds the thickness generated by the internal pressure.

Use Eigen solver

Select to use an Eigen solver for natural frequency calculations.

The natural frequency of a structure can be calculated using more than one method. When
this option is not selected, the traditional method is to use the analysis technique of Freese
or Rayleigh-Ritz. For a skirt-supported free standing vessel, this method provides
acceptable results. When the support configuration is not a skirt/base type, such as legs,
lugs or intermediate skirt, this method may not provide accurate results. By default, this
option is selected and the Eigen solver is used.

The natural frequency Eigen solver uses numerical methods to solve the general equation
of motion. Namely, the software solves the following matrix problem:

[[K] - w2[M]]{a} = {0}

[Link] 415/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

which for the general case is a set of n homogeneous (right-hand side equal to zero)
algebraic system of linear equations with n unknown displacements ai and an unknown
parameter w2. This is known as an Eigen problem. This iterative solution, for which not all
ai = 0, requires that the determinant of the matrix factor of {a} be equal to zero, in this
case:

abs([[K] - w2[M]) = 0

After building stiffness [K] and mass [M] matrices of the model with appropriate boundary
conditions (such as, anchors at skirts, bottom of legs, and at support lugs), the software
can extract modes that are meaningful in the solution of the dynamics problem, particularly
the modal response spectrum analysis. Using this generic-frequency Eigen solution
method, the software can accurately extract modes of vibration for models that do not fit
neatly into the cantilever beam model required for the Freese integration method. The
natural frequency of the vessel is used in several of the wind and seismic codes.

If the selected earthquake code uses response spectrum, the software

automatically uses the Eigen Solver, even if this option is not selected.

Use nominal head thickness when computing longitudinal

stress
Select to use the nominal thickness of the head in the longitudinal stress calculation. Using
this option effectively lowers the longitudinal stresses and increases the compressive
allowable stress at the intersection of the skirt and bottom head.

By default, PV Elite uses the finished (minimum) thickness when determining longitudinal
stresses on elliptical and torispherical heads due to pressure and bending moments. This
is a conservative calculation of the longitudinal stress at the base of the straight flange.

Lap joint flanges are lines of support for external pressure

Allows the software to consider lap joint flange elements as a line of support for the
external pressure calculation according to Interpretation VIII-1-86-107, November 18,
1986. In Fig. UG-28, the interpretation defines the design length of the vessel section, L,
as the distance between schematically drawn bolted flanges. According to the
interpretation, L does not terminate if the bolted flanges are lap joint flanges according to
Fig. 2-4 sketch (1) or (1)(a).

[Link] 416/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

As of September 2020, ASME VIII-1 and VIII-2 do not address the status of L as a
line of support. Because of this disparity between the code and Interpretation VIII-1-
86-107, you must use your own discretion.

You can apply this option to all codes.

No MDMT calculations
Select to use the MDMT check in the analysis.

No MAWP calculations
Select to use the MAWP check in the analysis.

Use bolt load instead of bolt area times bolt stress

Select to use the calculated value of the bolt load instead of the bolt area times its
allowable stress in the design of annular baserings. This leads to a less conservative
basering/bolting/chair cap thickness calculation.

External length L includes flange thickness

Select to make the external length L for cylinders connected to weld neck flanges.

Add moments at lug supports due to seismic loads

Adds seismic bending moments at lug supports.

Vary compressive allowable for internal/external cases

Select to use the external design temperature to calculate the stress factor "B" for load
combination cases that involve external pressure and dead weight. The software uses the
design internal temperature to calculate the allowable compressive stress from the
External Pressure Chart. By default, the software uses the maximum of the internal and
external design temperatures to calculate the allowable compressive stress for operating-
type cases. This is also true for cases involving internal pressure.

For example, a load case of "IP + OW + WI" uses the design temperature for internal
pressure to calculate the allowable compressive stress. The load case "EP + OW + WI"
uses the external design temperature to calculate the allowable compressive stress.

[Link] 417/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

When using this option, a disruption in process may leave the column at
design internal temperature and a vacuum. If the design external temperature was much
lower, this could lead to non-conservative results.

Show only un-factored loads in the vessel summary

Displays only allowable stress design support loads where the factor is 1. This option is
used for earthquake and wind codes, such as ASCE codes, that contain factors for
converting calculated loads between allowable stress design and load resistance factor
design (LRFD).

Allowable tower deflection

Enter a value for the allowable vertical tower deflection, if the default of 6 inches per 100
feet does not meet your design specification.

Wind shape factor

Enter a value for the wind shape factor, if your design specification requires a specific
value that does not correspond to the software-calculated value. For cylindrical structures,
the value is typically 0.7.

Operating natural frequency (Hz) (Optional)

Enter a value for the operating natural frequency. This is typically a value that you
calculate separately when you want to use a method different than the Rayleigh method
used by the software. In general, the Rayleigh method is suitable for most vessel designs,
and you do not need to enter a value.

Empty natural frequency (Hz) (Optional)

Enter a value for the empty natural frequency. This is typically a value that you calculate
separately when you want to use a method different than the Rayleigh method used by the
software. In general, the Rayleigh method is suitable for most vessel designs, and you do
not need to enter a value.

Test natural frequency (Hz) (Optional)

Enter a value for the test natural frequency. This is typically a value that you calculate
separately when you want to use a method different than the Rayleigh method used by the

[Link] 418/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

software. In general, the Rayleigh method is suitable for most vessel designs, and you do
not need to enter a value.

Material database selection

Allows you to specify an older version of the ASME database.

Input echo language

Select the language to use for the Input Echo report. Make this selection before you
analyze the model.

No bill of material
Prevents generation of a bill of material.

Consider nozzle loads on supports

Resolves user-defined local nozzle loads to the supporting structure according to the
requirements of EN 13445. Loads are included in the design of the foundation, bolts, and
base plates. With this option, you usually do not use the global forces and moments.

PV Elite uses the methodology of Visual Vessel Design (VVD).

No earthquake deflection calculations

Disables deflection calculations for vertical vessels due to lateral earthquake loads.

Syntax highlighting in output reports

Select to highlight failures and problem areas in data reports.

No extended ASCII characters in output

Select to replace extended ASCII characters with multiple characters of the same value in
equations. For example, ½ is replaced with 1/2. Some non-English versions of Windows
do not display these characters correctly.

[Link] 419/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Metric output is in consistent units

Select to allow the software to change units so that they are displayed consistently. For
example, units of stress may be displayed in MPa and pressure in Bar. For meaningful
output, these units should be the same.

Metric input to imperial output

Select to indicate for the software to display any metric input units in imperial units in the
output reports. When you select this configuration setting, the software automatically
disables the Metric Output is in Consistent Units setting, as it is not applicable.

Use commas instead of decimals in numbers

Uses the comma character (,) as the decimal indicator in numbers. Clear this option to use
the period character (.) as the decimal indicator. For example, 0,35 or 0.35.

Use metric ASME material database

Select to indicate the software uses the metric version of the ASME Material Database.
Specify the year of the material database in the Material Database Year box. The
software defaults to using the current year if you do not specify a material database year.

Metric constant selection

ASME Code Section VIII Division 1 contains a number of constants used for comparison in
certain calculations. These values are presented in both Imperial and Metric units. An
example would be the minimum thickness per UG-16(b) of 1/16" (1.5mm) or 3/32"
(2.5mm). Note that the values in mm have been [Link] software can work with
either depending on the selection made in this pull down.

Imperial

Use the Imperial constants

Metric

Use the Metric constants

Determine at runtime

The software determines the value to use depending on the set of currently selected units.
For new files, the default is the Determine at Runtime.

[Link] 420/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Nozzle Analysis Options Tab (Configuration Dialog)

Nozzle/clip design pressure options

Select one of the following design pressure methods for calculating the pressure at the
nozzle:

1. MAWP + Static Head to Element Bottom - Calculates the internal pressure on

the nozzle on the bottom of the element where the nozzle is located. This pressure is
the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) of the vessel plus the static liquid
pressure head to the bottom of that element. Thus, the design pressure can vary for
nozzles located on different elements. This option is appropriate if you are certain
that your nozzle locations will not vary during the design process. If you use this
option and a nozzle is lowered in the vessel and under additional pressure due to
liquid head, you must rerun the analysis in order to determine if the nozzle geometry
is satisfactory.

2. Design P + Static Head - Calculates the exact internal pressure at the nozzle
location. The pressure is the design internal pressure plus the additional static liquid
pressure at the nozzle location. This option is appropriate for re-rating vessels or for
the design of new vessels where there are no MAWP considerations. If the overall
MAWP of the vessel is to be determined, it is strongly recommended that the model
be rerun with the computed MAWP to be sure that all components pass at this higher
pressure, which will be stamped on the nameplate. The pressure for all elements can
be changed at Design Internal Pressure on the Design Constraints Tab.

3. Overall MAWP + Static Head (governing element) - Calculates one design

internal pressure for all of the nozzles located on the vessel, based on the static
liquid pressure to the bottom of the element that is governing the MAWP. If the nozzle
location on a vessel changes due to a client request, there is no need to rerun nozzle
calculations because the pressure used in the calculations does not change. This
method is ideal for designing new vessels and is generally the most conservative
option.

4. MAWP + Static Head to Nozzle - Calculates the MAWP of the vessel and then
adds the static liquid pressure from the liquid surface to the nozzle location. For
nozzles at different elevations, the design pressure will vary.

If the bottom head is governing the MAWP, this will be the most conservative
option.

[Link] 421/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

If the resulting nozzle reinforcement MAWP does not need to govern the MAWP
of the vessel, options 1, 3 or 4 should be used. This is a common requirement for vessels
that are used in the chemical and petro-chemical industries.

Nozzle sort options

Select a sort order of nozzles for the Nozzle Schedule report. Select By Name
Ascending, By Name Descending, By Diameter, Ascending, By Diameter,
Descending, or No Sorting.

Nozzle loads applied at end of nozzle

Select this option if you want to enter the nozzle loads at the end of the nozzle.

Compute areas per PD 5500 [Link]

Select to perform the pressure times area calculations according to PD 5000:2018,
[Link]. The standard calculations according to design section 3 are always Calculated.

Use AD-540.2 sketch b and not sketch d for normal limit (pre
2007)
Select to use sketch (b) for the calculation of the vertical nozzle thickness limit, according
to ASME Section VIII, Division 2, paragraph AD-540.2. Sketch (b) shows an integral
connection with a smooth radius. Sketch (d) shows a similar geometry with an alternative
pad plate and fillet. By default, the software uses sketch (d) to calculate the vertical
thickness limit.

No corrosion on inside welds

Select if inside nozzle welds do not corrode or you do not wish to remove the corrosion
allowance when computing the area. By default, the software always corrodes the inner
fillet weld when calculating the area available in the inside weld. The default method is the
most conservative because the area under the weld is corroded in accordance with figure
UG-37 of the ASME Code. This option is not valid when using PD 5500.

Compute increased nozzle thickness

Select to calculate the minimum nozzle wall to account for external loading. In many cases
pressure vessels are designed and built long before the piping system is attached to them.

[Link] 422/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

This means that the nozzle loadings are unknown. When this option is selected, then the
minimum nozzle thickness trn is maximum of:

trn = (.134, trn for internal pressure) <= Nps 18

trn = (OD/150, trn for internal pressure) > Nps 18

Using this requirement in addition to UG-45 provides some additional metal to work with to
satisfy thermal bending stresses in the nozzle. You can also specify the minimum wall
thickness of the nozzle trn in Nozzle. If you do so, that vale overrides this calculation.

These formulae are not in the ASME Code. They are used in industry.

Compute and print areas for small nozzles

Select to calculate the nozzle reinforcement areas and MAWPs of small nozzles when the
requirements of code paragraph UG-36 are met. UG-36 discusses the requirement of
performing area replacement calculations when small nozzles are involved. Openings in
vessels not subject to rapid fluctuations in pressure do not require reinforcement other
than that inherent in the construction under the following conditions:

3.5 inch finished opening in a shell or head 0.375 inches required thickness or less

2.375 inch finished opening in a shell or head greater than 0.375 inches required
thickness

If your geometry meets this criteria and this option is not selected, then the nozzle
reinforcement areas and MAWPs are not calculated. If you require a single nozzle to be
checked, place the text #SN in the nozzle description to force the software to calculate the
areas for the selected small nozzle.

Compute chord length in hillside direction

Select to use the chord length to calculate the included angle for hillside nozzle
calculations. By default, the software uses the actual length of removed material.

Consider MAPnc
Select to require that nozzle reinforcement calculations are performed for the MAP new
and cold condition. The software checks to see if the nozzle is reinforced adequately using
the MAPnc generated during internal pressure calculations. When the area-of-replacement
calculations are made for this case, cold allowable stresses are used and the corrosion
allowance is set to 0. Designing nozzles for this case helps the vessel to comply with

[Link] 423/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

UG99 or appropriate (hydrotest) requirements. Check your design requirements to see if

this case is required by your client.

Consider external loads for nozzle Tr

Select to calculate the nozzle area of replacement requirements using the required
thickness of the shell. This value, tr, is critical in the ASME code. The software determines
the maximum thickness based on the highest stress ratio and uses that value if it governs
over the required thickness based on internal or external pressure. There are cases where
pressure requirements do not govern the value of tr. This can occur when a nozzle is
located near the bottom of a tall vertical vessel. If there is a high wind load or seismic load
on the structure, bending stress can govern the required thickness of the shell section. If
this is the case, then the value of tr (per UG-22 Div. 1) should be based on the controlling
factor.

Optionally, if tr needs to be specified for a specific nozzle, the value can be

entered directly to User Tr on the Nozzle Input/Analysis Dialog Box of Nozzle .

Use Appendix 1-9 (Div. 1)

Select to use ASME Code Case 2168. On February 14, 1994 ASME approved case 2168,
providing an alternative method for reinforcing radial nozzles in cylindrical shells. The
nozzle must be connected to the cylindrical shell by a full penetration groove weld.

Use Appendix 1-10 instead of UG-37

Select to analyze nozzles according to ASME VIII, Division 1, Appendix 1-10 instead of
UG-37 for applicable nozzles.

If there are large diameter nozzles under external presure

ASME large nozzle calc options

Select the load cases to use for evaluation of large openings. Select Use 1-7 or Use 1-10.

ANSI flange pressure reduction options

Specifies a method for ANSI flange pressure reduction. Several methods are available to
de-rate the flange MAWP based on external loads. If flanges are externally loaded they
have the potential to leak. To keep this from occurring, it might be necessary to choose a

[Link] 424/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

heavier class of flange than one that is good for the design pressure per the B16.5/47
standard.

The ASME code has no rules on a method to use. The code does state, however
(in an ASME VIII-1 UG-44 Code Case), that the external loadings on flanges must
considered.

Kellogg Method

The Kellogg method is well known and conservative. The axial load and moment are used
to compute an equivalent pressure that is then deducted from the flange rating from the
B16/47 table.

ASME UG-44 | 4.16.12

Use the UG-44 method per the ASME VIII, Division 1 and Division 2: 2019 Edition code
updates that relate to UG-44, Table UG-44 (Div 1) and Paragraph 4.16.12, Table 4.16.12
external loads on weld neck flanges.

50% Stress Method

If the computed stress/allowable stress is < 0.5 on the pipe wall, then the allowable
pressure is the full rating from the ANSI/ASME standard. If the stress ratio is >= 0.5, then
the full equivalent pressure based on the Kellogg method is subtracted from the flange
rating.

DNV Method

The DNV method is 1.5 times the ANSI flange rating minus the equivalent pressure based
on the Kellogg method. The idea is that because the flanges will be hydrotested at an
elevated pressure and because there will be loading applied (flanges in the piping system),
then their rating can be elevated using the above equation. Most piping is tested to 1.5
times the design pressure.

No ANSI flange MAWP reduction when using UG-44 | 4.16.12

Does not derate the minimum allowable working pressure of an ANSI flange when you
select ASME UG-44 | 4.16.12 for ANSI flange pressure reduction options.

Use user defined Fm values for ANSI flanges

Uses Fm values instead of ASME code-defined values to derate the minimum allowable
working pressure of an ANSI flange when you select ASME UG-44 | 4.16.12 for ANSI

[Link] 425/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

flange pressure reduction options.

You can modify the Fm values used by editing the [Link] file found
in the System Folder, available on the File Tab.

Consider nozzle loads for UG-45

Calculates the required nozzle wall thickness based on bending and membrane stresses
caused by nozzle loads. The software then includes the required thickness with the UG-45
minimum nozzle neck thickness evaluation.

Nozzle opening MAWP is not restricted by the shell (ASME)

When using ASME VIII-1 UG-37 for nozzle reinforcement, the MAWP of the opening is
iteratively computed based on several items including UG-45, UG-37 areas, and other
considerations. The MAWP of the opening is the minimum of the overall UG-37 calculation
and the MAWP of the parent component to which the nozzle is attached. In some cases,
you might want to know the MAWP of the junction without regard to the parent’s MAWP. If
that is the case, select this option.

No B31.3 stress checks on nozzles (ASME)

Select if ASME B31.3 analysis should not be performed for nozzle neck calculations.

If this option is selected, a note displays on the Nozzle Calcs output report(s),
stating the software did not compute external and pressure loads per the user's request.

ASME Options Tab (Configuration Dialog)

Use the vessel MAWP to compute the MDMT

Select to use the MAWP for the vessel when determining the required thickness to use in
the temperature reduction calculation according to UCS 66.1 (Div. 1), or Section [Link]
(Div. 2 2007 Edition or later). The MAWP also includes MAWPs determined during nozzle
calculations. If this option is not selected, the design pressure on the element is used to
determine the MDMT reduction for that element.

If the pressure specified on each element is the MAWP, do not select this option.
Otherwise, the temperature reduction is conservatively low.

[Link] 426/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

For PD 5500, EN 13445, and Division 2 pre-2007, this option is ignored.

Do not use nozzle MDMT interpretation VIII-1-01-37

Select to control the MDMT calculation of the nozzle to shell junction, according to Section
VIII, Division 1 (1998 Edition, 2000 Addenda), Figure UCS-66.l, Interpretation VIII-1-01-37,
March 9, 2001. The interpretation states that if a nozzle neck with a nominal noncorroded
thickness that is heavier than that of the shell is attached to the shell with a corner joint,
then the shell becomes the governing thickness as defined in UCS-66(a)(1)(b). When
evaluating the nozzle joint per UCS-66(b) of Section VIII, Division 1, the tr and tn
thicknesses are those of the shell.

Reduce the MDMT due to lower membrane stress

Select to calculate the reduced MDMT value per UCS 66.1. If this option is not selected,
the software calculates the basic MDMT per UCS 66.

UCS-66.1 ratios below 0.35 compute MDMTs of -155F

Select to let UCS-66.1 ratios below 0.35 compute MDMT’s of -155F.

UCS-68(c) MDMTs can be less than -55F

Select to use UCS-68(c) MDMT’s to be less than -55F.

Consider longitudinal stress when computing MDMTs

Select to consider longitudinal stress when computing MDMTs.

ASME VIII-1 MDMT option

Select the needed option.

ASME code edition

Select the database the software uses for tables of allowable stress versus temperature.
This entry is only valid for Section VIII Division 1 and Section VIII Division 2, and is not
available if Use Pre-99 Addenda (ASME VIII-1 only) is selected.

Select this option before entering other data.

[Link] 427/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Use Code Case 2286

Select to use ASME code case 2286-1, a set of alternative rules for determining allowable
external pressure and compressive stresses for cylinders, cones, spheres, and formed
heads. This code case is applicable for ASME Section VIII Divisions 1 and 2. In the current
ASME code rules, there are no provisions for computation of allowables when external
pressure acts with bending and other compressive loads simultaneously.

These rules were first published in the late 1990's and reaffirmed on January 1, 2004.
Review the code case before selecting this option. The following sections are covered in
PV Elite:

2.2 Stress Reduction Factors

3.1 External Pressure
3.2 Uniform Axial Compression
3.2.1 Local Buckling
3.2.2 Column Buckling
3.3 Axial Compression due to Bending Moment
3.4 Shear (Allowable in Plane Shear Stress)
4.1.1 Allowable Circumferential Compression Stresses for Cones
4.1.3 Cone-Cylinder Junction Rings
4.2.1 Allowable Longitudinal and Bending Stresses for Cones
4.2.2 Unstiffened Cone-Cylinder Junctions
4.2.3 Cone-Cylinder Junction Rings
4.3.1 Allowable in Plane Shear Stress for Cones
5.1.1 Allowables for Uniform Axial Compression and Hoop Compression
5.1.2 Allowables for Uniform Axial Compression and Hoop Compression (Column
Buckling)
5.2 Allowables for Axial Compression due to Bending Moment and Hoop Compression
5.3 Allowables for Hoop Compression and Shear
5.4 Allowables for Uniform Axial Compression, Axial Compression due to Bending Moment,
Shear in the presence of Hoop Compression
5.4.1 Local Buckling (Section 5.4)
5.4.2 Column Buckling (Section 5.4)
5.5 Allowables for Uniform Axial Compression, Axial Compression due to Bending Moment,
Shear in the absence of Hoop Compression
5.5.1 Local Buckling (Section 5.5)
5.5.2 Column Buckling (Section 5.5)
6.0 Sizing of Rings
6.1 Sizing of Small Rings

[Link] 428/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

6.4 Local Stiffener Geometry Requirements

8.1.1 Spherical Shell with Equal Biaxial Stresses

Does the use of 2286 guarantee thinner required thicknesses and lower stresses due to
combined loading?

No, it does not. The results are a function of the geometry. However, the results for
allowable external pressure are generally higher than those computed using the typical
UG-28 external pressure methods.

What happens during the analysis when this option is selected?

The software follows several steps in determining values that are needed during the 2286
calculations. One of these steps is to determine the lengths, such as LB1 and LB2. These
are the distances between major lines of support, such as heads, body flanges and conical
sections. The software does not distinguish large rings that act as bulkheads, according to
paragraph 6.1(b). For cones, Line of Support Options in General Input Tab must be set
to Both Ends a Line of Support. The ASME Steel Stack option in Design Constraints
Tab is not compatible with this option and is also ignored if both are checked.

The first calculations that appear for 2286 are in the External Pressure Calculations
report, with the calculation of the allowable pressure at the given thickness. After
completing this step, the software iterates to determine the required thickness for the given
external pressure. If the element is a cylinder, the maximum length between stiffeners is
calculated. These results are displayed in the summary at the end of the External
Pressure Calculations report. Because Factor A and Factor B are not applicable, they are
set to "No Calc".

After completing the external pressure calculations, the software calculates individual
stresses for each stress category and summarizes them in the Stress Due to Combined
Loads report. The allowable stresses are calculated for the combined loads (including
external pressure). Unity checks according to 5.4 and 5.5 are made. The software also
compares direct axial, shear and bending stresses to their respective allowables. If any of
these are higher than the combined unity check, the maximum value is reported as the
Unity Check.

A supplemental table in the Stress Due to Combined Loads report displays the results of
λc, L and the calculated allowable stresses for each element for each load case. In some
cases, the allowables may not be calculated, especially when there is no external pressure
or when the load is only tensile. Some elements, such as welded flat heads and flanges,
are not applicable and do not have any results. If this is the case, the printed stress value
may read "No Calc" or may be blank.

[Link] 429/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

If there any conical transitions in the model, the software calculates the necessity of
junction rings and their requirements according to section 4.2.3. Cone-to-cylinder junction
rings must satisfy inertia requirements from equations (4-1) and (4-5). The net area of the
junction must be greater than or equal to the result of equation (4-4). The maximum
distance from the cone-cylinder junction is defined in paragraph 4.2.3. The distance is
defined as, "The nearest surface of the stiffening ring shall be located with a distance of Tr
or 1 in., whichever is greater from the cone junction." Tr is the contact or stem width of the
ring. Because the software handles arbitrary sections, the check value is one inch (25.4
mm). If the ring is farther than one inch from the junction, it is ignored.

For ASME VIII-1, compute K in corroded condition

The K value is the stress concentration factor used in determining the required thickness of
elliptical heads. If the elliptical head has an internal corrosion allowance, the computed
value of K decreases resulting in a lower required thickness. If that is what you want,
select this option.

Use Div. 1 App. 46 (Div. 1 allowables using Div. 2 Part 4)

ASME Appendix 46 allows the use of ASME VIII-2 formulas in a Division 1 design. In
addition, the allowable stress values from Division 1 must be used. Using the Code Case
generally results in a more economical design, especially in the area of head thickness
and nozzle reinforcement. Be sure to read the Code Case before using this option. It is
important to understand the restrictions when using any Code Case.

Use Pre-99 addenda (ASME VIII-1 only)

Select if you are re-rating an older vessel to the pre-99 ASME addenda, and would like to
use the older material allowables. As of January 2000, the 1999 addenda of ASME
Division 1, Section 2, Part D is mandatory. The revision includes changes to the material
properties of many materials, such as increases of allowable stresses in some ranges. By
default, this option is not selected and the higher allowable stress database is used.

Select this option before any vessel modeling occurs. For an existing file,
you must access the material database for each existing element to update material
properties. Other design codes are not affected.

[Link] 430/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Use 2004 A-06 addenda for Division 2

Select if the model is ASME Section VIII< Division 2, to use the older code rules in the
analysis.

Select prior to entering any vessel data.

For ASME VIII, shell head joints are tapered

Select if the shell to head junction is tapered as shown in the figure (ASME VIII-1 Figure
UW-13.1).

For ASME VIII-1, use Table G instead of exact equation for A

PV Elite can determine the strain factor ‘A’ used in ASME VIII-1 for external pressure
calculations by either:

Formula

Table G in Section II Part D

Both selections yield a nearly identical result in most cases. However, PV Elite runs faster
when using the formula option. The default is to use the data from Table G.

Increase flat head/cover thickness for reinforcement

Select to bypass reinforcement of a single opening of a flat end connection, according to
Section VIII Division 1, paragraph UG-39(d)(2). This effectively increases the required
thickness of the blind flange cover. This option can only be used if there is only one nozzle
located in the blind flange.

[Link] 431/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Disregard bolt space correction factor for ASME flange design

Select this option to avoid using the ASME Section VIII, Appendix 2 Equation (7) or the PD
5500 bolt space correction factors in the design of heat exchanger flanges and tubesheets,
like Taylor-Forge. Using the correction factor is an industry-standard practice that is
applied in other pressure vessel design codes. When the actual bolt spacing exceeds the
allowable bolt spacing, the software multiplies the correction factor by the moment to
design a thicker flange. In these cases, do not select this option.

Use ASME code case 2260/2261

Select to use modified equations to calculate the required thickness of
elliptical/torispherical heads, as defined in ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Code Case 2260,
May 20, 1998, Alternate Design Rules for Ellipsoidal and Torispherical Formed Heads. A
thinner head is typically designed with these rules.

Impact Test OptionsTab (Configuration Dialog)

Consider UG-84 tables in MDMT calculations

Select to have the software consider the tables in UG-84 when determining the MDMT for
the materials.

Consider UCS-66(g) in MDMT calculations

Select to have the software calculate whether a material can be exempt from impact
testing for a lower MDMT based on UCS-66(g).

Consider UCS-66(g) in MDMT Calculations

Select to have the software determine whether to calculate an MDMT colder than the input
test temperature based on UCS-66(i).

Set MDMTs for low temperature materials

Select to manually enter the MDMT for low temperature materials. Note that impact tested
materials will appear in the selection. Temperatures for impact tested materials that are
lower than allowed by specification can be entered here as well.

Press the refresh button to update the list of materials that might have been
added to the model since the last time the dialog was visited.

[Link] 432/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Weld Seam Options Tab (Configuration Dialog)

Starting angle

Defines the default seam angle #1 of the first longitudinal weld seam on the selected
element when using the Longitudinal Weld Seam Data Tab.

Set Starting Angle to -1 if you do not want the software to automatically create weld
seam.

Offset successive element seams by

Defines the default seam angle #1, offset from the first longitudinal seam on the previous
element, for the first longitudinal weld seam on the selected element. This staggers seams
from one element to the next

Default longer plate dimension, length

Defines the circumferential distance between longitudinal seams. This dimension is usually
the longer dimension of plates or sheets as they are received from the mill.

The software saves this value as a software default, not a model default. You should check
the value before creating seams in a model.

Default shorter plate dimension, width

Defines the default starting length of elements. This dimension is usually the shorter
dimension of plates or sheets as they are received from the mill.

The software saves this value as a software default, not a model default. You should check
the value before creating seams in a model.

DXF Options Tab (Configuration Dialog)

Create default border

Select to put a border around the drawing. The border style differs based on the border
size. You can create your own border styles. The borders are located in the PV
Elite\System folder. They are named ANSI_A.txt and so forth. These text files are
essentially the core of ACAD Release 12 DXF files. See the user border creation section
for more information.

Create nozzle schedule

[Link] 433/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Select to create a Nozzle Schedule. The nozzle schedule contains information pertaining
to the size and thickness of nozzles, their mark number and the necessity of reinforcing.

Create bill of material

Select to generate a Bill of Material for the major components of the vessel, such as shells,
heads, and conical sections.

Do not show ID lines

Normally the DXF file will contain ID as well as OD lines for the major shell sections. If you
do not want to see the ID lines, then check this box.

Show dimensions

Select if you want tail dimensions for the major shell courses. The element diameters and
thicknesses are shown in the BOM.

Insert design data and general notes

Select if you want the software to include design data and general notes in the DXF file.

Drawing size

Select A, B, C or D. Each size has a different style.

Scale factor

Enter the scale factor. We recommend letting the program select this value by clicking
Compute and Insert Scale Factor. We then recommend rounding up to the nearest
typical scale factor.

Default Value Settings Tab (Configuration Dialog)

Sets the initial values for commonly used properties. PV Elite uses the values that you
define here as default settings. You can edit the default value during creation.

Diameter
Specify the default element diameter.

Finished Thickness
Specify the default finished thickness.

[Link] 434/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Corrosion Allowance
Specify the default corrosion allowance thickness.

Internal Pressure
Specify the default internal pressure.

Temperature for Internal Pressure

Specify the default temperature for internal pressure.

External Pressure
Specify the default external pressure.

Temperature for External Pressure

Specify the default temperature for external pressure.

ASME material
Specify the default ASME material.

PD 5500 material
Specify the default PD 5500 material.

EN 13445 material
Specify the default EN 13445 material.

ASME nozzle material

Specify the default ASME nozzle material.

PD 5500 nozzle material

Specify the default PD 5500 nozzle material.

[Link] 435/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

EN 13445 nozzle material

Specify the default EN 13445 nozzle material.

No auto advance when adding details

PV Elite generates a description for a new detail (such as for a nozzle or stiffening ring; for
example, Ring 1:1) when you add a detail to the model. Select this option to disable the
automatic generation of a description for any added details. You must give each detail a
unique name when you add a new detail if you select this option.

For ASME, use the metric database on startup

Select to always use the metric database for ASME.

Foundation loads on a new page

Select to report foundation loads on a new page.

Disable Undo and Redo

Select to disable the ability to undo and redo changes.

Separate output reports by element

Select to separate the element analysis into different reports, by element, in the output
processor. By selecting this option, you will see all the internal and external results by
element rather than all together in the reports.

No external pressure report produced when there is no

external pressure
Select to suppress the creation of the external pressure report when there is no external
pressure.

Do not compress the input files

Select to not compress the input files.

[Link] 436/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Level of precision (equations and substitutions)

Select the number of significant values to display in equations and substitutions on output
reports.

Units file
Specify the units file to use.

Default nozzle database

Select the default nozzle database.

Always use the specified default nozzle database

Select to always use the nozzle database defined in Default nozzle database.

Default 0 angle position

Based on the drawing layout, specify which direction is the principle direction.

Default rotation direction

Select whether positive rotation is clockwise or counter-clockwise from the direction
specified in Default 0 angle position.

Save Options Tab (Configuration Dialog)

Enable autosave
Select to have PV Elite autosave your project at an interval that you define in Save Interval
(minutes).

Save interval (minutes)

Select the number of minutes between autosaves. This option is only available when
Enable autosave is selected.

Perform silent background saves

Select to have PV Elite perform the autosaves silently.

[Link] 437/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Tip text
Select the tooltip font color.

Tip back
Select the tooltip background color.

Default save folder location

Specify the default folder to save your project files.

Default Templates folder location

Specify the folder for PV Elite template (.pvpt) files.

Check for update options

Specify how often PV Elite should automatically check for an updated version.

Default System folder location

Specify the system folder.

AI Settings Tab (Configuration Dialog)

Specifies whether or not you want to use PV Elite's Artificial Intelligence (AI) feature. If you
choose to use AI's help, AI stores all the data entries that you make into the various PV
Elite parameters in a database. Then, when you start a new design, AI chooses the best or
most used values for a parameter based on your previous entires for that parameter.

Select Units
Tools tab: Select Units

Selects a new units file and changes the units system of the current job. For example, if
your current job is in English units and you would like to change the units to millimeters,
then use this option. After selecting a new units file, the current input values are converted
into that set of units. To get a set of reports in the new units, run Analyze again.

Delivered units files have the .fil extension and are in the C:\Users\Public\Public
Documents\Intergraph CAS\PVELITE\<version number>\System folder. Many unit systems

[Link] 438/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

are delivered, such as English, MM, SI, Inches, and Newtons. Unicode systems are
delivered for use in China, Japan, Taiwan, and Korea, where multibyte character sets are
used.

Lock/Unlock the Current Input File

Tools Tab > Lock/Unlock the Current Input File

Locks or unlocks the current input file. For example, if a file is unlocked, you can use this
option to lock the file and create a read-only file. You cannot save changes made to a
read-only file or analyze the file. If a file is locked, you can use this option to unlock the file
and save changes made to the file or perform an analysis.

If you attempt to save changes or perform an analysis on a locked file, a warning message
displays to inform you that the file is locked and is read-only. To save the changes you can
unlock the file, or you can use the Save As function to save the changes under a new file
name.

A newly created file must first be saved before it can be locked.

Create/Review Units
Tools Tab > Create\Review Units

[installation folder] > [Link]

Allows you to create a new custom units file or edit an existing units file for use with PV
Elite or CodeCalc.

Delivered units files have the .fil extension and are in the C:\Users\Public\Public
Documents\Intergraph CAS\PVELITE\<version number>\System folder. Many unit systems
are delivered, such as English, MM, SI, Inches, and Newtons. Unicode systems are
delivered for use in China, Japan, Taiwan, and Korea, where multibyte character sets are
used. You can save new units files to the system folder or to another folder.

Use Tools Tab > Configuration Dialog Box to specify the units file to use at startup.

Use Tools Tab > Select Units to select a new units file. The data in your job file is
immediately converted to the new units.

[Link] 439/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Create a New Units File Dialog

Create a new units file

1. On the Tools tab, click Create/Review Units to open the Create a New Units File
Dialog.

2. Do one of the following for each type of unit:

Select defined values for Constant or User Unit.

Type values for or Constant and User Unit.

3. Click Save and Exit .

4. Select a folder path and type a file name, and then click Save.

Edit an existing units file

1. On the Tools tab > click Create/Review Units to open the Create a New Units File
Dialog

2. Click Open , select an existing .fil units file, and then click Open.

3. Change unit types as needed by doing one of the following:

Select defined values for Constant or User Unit.

Type values for or Constant and User Unit.

4. Click Save and Exit .

5. Select a folder path and type a file name. You can also use the same file name to
replace the open file with the new unit values.

6. Click Save.

Create a New Units File Dialog

Specifies units and constants for a units file.

Open

Open an existing units file for editing.

[Link] 440/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Save

Saves the units file.

Save and Exit

Saves the units file and closes the dialog box.

Help

Opens the help.

Name

Displays the type of unit, such as Length, Area, or Pressure.

System Unit

Displays the default system unit used as a multiplier for conversions, such as feet, sq-
inches, and psig.

Constant

Select a defined conversion constant used as a multiplier for conversions, or type your
own value.

User Unit

Select a defined unit for the conversion from the drop-down, or click in the box and type
your own unit.

If you select a defined Constant, the software changes User Unit to the correct unit.
If you select a defined User Unit, the software changes Constant to the correct
value.

If you type your own value for Constant and User Unit, you must manually ensure
that the combination provides the needed conversion.

Review Current Model Units

Tools Tab > Create/Review Units > Review Current Model Units

[Link] 441/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Opens the Units Conversion Constants dialog, which allows you to review the current
units used in the model. If the model, such as a model you received from someone else,
originally used a .fil units file that is not in the System folder of your PV Elite installation,
you can also create a new units file.

Create New Units File

Creates a new .fil units file from the units shown in the dialog and saves it to the System
folder using the name of the original units file. The name of the original units file displays in
the dialog title.

This command only displays when the units file used to create the model is not in
the System folder of your PV Elite installation.

Edit/Add Materials
Tools tab: Edit/Add Materials

Edit Material

Edit PD 5500 Material Database

Edit EN 13445 User Material Database

The Material Database Editor utility opens. You can edit existing material and create new
material in the selected material database. The new material does not affect the current
job. To change an element or detail to the new material, open the Material Database
Dialog for each element or detail.

Material Database Editor

The Material Database Editor utility allows you to add custom materials to a delivered
ASME, PD 5500, or EN 13445 material database for use with PV Elite or CodeCalc.

When you use this utility, material database files with the .bin extension are created in the
[Installation Folder]\System folder. These files contain only the custom materials you have
added. The custom materials can then be merged into the main material databases.

The delivered databases contain allowed material for the current codes. You typically
only add custom material if you are required to use an outdated material, or need to
add material from a different code.

[Link] 442/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Have the appropriate code available when adding new material. You will enter code-
based material properties such as Chart Data, Material Band, and S Factor. The
properties needed vary with the database that you are editing.

Material Properties

Create a new custom material

1. Click Tools > Edit/Add Materials and select the ASME, PD 5500, or EN-13445
material database.

2. Click Add .

A new row named New Material appears in the grid of the Material Database view
in the right pane.

3. In the Material Properties view in the left pane, type values for the new material.

As you type values, check the Stress vs. Temperature graph in the
right pane. Stress must not increase as temperature decreases.

4. Repeat these steps for each new material that you want to add.

5. Click Save to save the new material to a user database file.

6. Click Merge to add the user database to the material database of the software.

After merging, the custom material now appears at the bottom of the material
database list for any command using the material database in PV Elite or CodeCalc.

Create a custom material based on an existing material

1. Click Tools > Edit/Add Materials and select the ASME, PD 5500, or EN-13445
material database.

2. Click Edit .

The contents of the software database appear in the grid of the Material Database
view in the right pane.

3. Select a material for the Material Database grid.

[Link] 443/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

4. Click Select and click Yes on the confirmation dialog box.

The copied material appears in a new row in the grid of the Material Database view.

5. In the Material Properties view in the left pane, type new values as needed.

You must change Material Name so that the name is unique in the user
database and in the material database after merging.

As you type values, check the Stress vs. Temperature graph in the right pane.
Stress must not increase as temperature decreases.

6. Click Save to save the new material to a user database file.

7. Click Merge to add the user database to the material database of the software.

After merging, the custom material now appears at the bottom of the material
database list for any command using the material database in PV Elite or CodeCalc.

Material Properties
The following code-based values are typically used as material properties.

Material Name

Type an allowed external pressure chart name. The software uses the chart name to
calculate the B value for all external pressure and buckling calculations. If you type a valid
value for Material Name, the software will look into its database and determine the
external pressure chart name for this material and enter it into this cell. The program will
also determine this chart name when you select a material name from the material
selection window.

Carbon Steel

CS-1 Carbon and Low Alloy Sy<30000

CS-2 Carbon and Low Alloy Sy>30000

[Link] 444/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

CS-3 Carbon and Low Alloy Sy<38000

CS-4 SA-537

CS-5 SA-508, SA-533, SA-541

CS-6 SA-562 or SA-620

Heat-Treated Steel

HT-1 SA-517 and SA-592 A, E, and F

HT-2 SA-508 Cl. 4a, SA-543,B,C

Stainless Steel (High Alloy)

HA-1 Type 304

HA-2 Type 316, 321, 347, 309, 310, 430B

HA-3 Type 304L

HA-4 Type 316L, 317L

HA-5 Alloy S31500

Non-Ferrous Material

NFA-1 AL3003, O and H112

[Link] 445/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

NFA-2 AL3003, H20

NFA-3 AL3004, O and H112

NFA-4 AL3004, H34

NFA-5 AL5154, O and H112

NFA-6 C62000 (Aluminum Bronze)

NFA-7 AL1060, O

NFA-8 AL5052, O and H112

NFA-9 AL5080, O and H112

NFA-10 AL5456, O

NFA-11 AL5083, O and H112

NFA-12 AL6061, T6, T651, T6510 and T6511

NFA-13 AL6061, T4, T451, T4510 and T4511

NFA-20 AL5454, O and H112

NFC-1 Annealed Copper

NFC-2 Copper Silicon A and C

[Link] 446/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

NFC-3 Annealed 90-10 Copper Nickel

NFC-4 Annealed 70-30 Copper Nickel

NFC-5 Welded Copper Iron Alloy Tube

NFC-6 SB-75 and SB-111 Copper Tube

NFN-1 Low Carbon Nickel

NFN-2 Ni

NFN-3 Ni Cu Alloy

NFN-4 Annealed Ni Cr Fe

NFN-5 Ni Mo Alloy B

NFN-6 Ni Mo Cr Fe

NFN-7 Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu

NFN-8 Ni Fe Cr Alloy 800

NFN-9 Ni Fe Cr Alloy 800H

NFN-10 Ni Moly Chrome Alloy N10276

NFN-11 Ni Cr Fe Mo Cu Alloys G and G-2

[Link] 447/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

NFN-12 Cr Ni Fe Mo Cu Co, SB-462, 463, and so

on.

NFN-13 Ni Fe Cr Si Alloy 330

NFN-20 Ni Cr Mo Grade C-4

NFN-15 Ni Mo Alloy X

NFN-16 Ni Mo Alloy B2

NFN-17 Ni Cr Mo Co N06625 (Alloy 625)

NFN-18 Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G3)

NFN-19 Ni Mo Cr Fe Cu (Grade G3, >3/4)

NFN-20 Work Hardened Nickel

NFT-1 Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 1

NFT-2 Unalloyed Titanium, Grade 2

NFT-3 Titanium, Grade 1

NFZ-1 Zirconium, Alloy 702

NFZ-2 Zirconium, Alloy 705

Elastic Modulus Reference #

[Link] 448/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Specifies the ASME elastic modulus reference number which corresponds to data in ASME
Section II Part D tables such as TM-1 and TM-2. Many materials have a composition or
UNS number that does not match the criteria of what is supplied in the ASME code. In
these cases, the reference number will be brought in as zero. If this happens, you will
need to enter in an appropriate value.

Ref. # Table Material Designation or UNS Number

1 TM-1 Carbon Steels with C<= 0.3%

2 TM-1 Carbon Steels with C> 0.3%

3 TM-1 Material Group A

4 TM-1 Material Group B

5 TM-1 Material Group C

6 TM-1 Material Group D

7 TM-1 Material Group E

8 TM-1 Material Group F

9 TM-1 Material Group G

10 TM-1 S13800

11 TM-1 S15500

12 TM-1 S45000

[Link] 449/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

13 TM-1 S17400

14 TM-1 S17700

15 TM-1 S66286

16 TM-2 A03560

17 TM-2 A95083

18 TM-2 A95086

19 TM-2 A95456

20 TM-2 A24430

21 TM-2 A91060

22 TM-2 A91100

23 TM-2 A93003

24 TM-2 A93004

25 TM-2 A96061

26 TM-2 A96063

27 TM-2 A92014

[Link] 450/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

28 TM-2 A92024

29 TM-2 A95052

30 TM-2 A95154

31 TM-2 A95254

32 TM-2 A95454

33 TM-2 A95652

34 TM-3 C93700

35 TM-3 C83600

36 TM-3 C92200

37 TM-3 C28000

38 TM-3 C36500

39 TM-3 C46400

40 TM-3 C65500

41 TM-3 C66100

42 TM-3 C95200

[Link] 451/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

43 TM-3 C95400

44 TM-3 C44300

45 TM-3 C44400

46 TM-3 C44500

47 TM-3 C64200

48 TM-3 C68700

49 TM-3 C10200

50 TM-3 C10400

51 TM-3 C10500

52 TM-3 C10700

53 TM-3 C11000

54 TM-3 C12000

55 TM-3 C12200

56 TM-3 C12300

57 TM-3 C12500

[Link] 452/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

58 TM-3 C14200

59 TM-3 C23000

60 TM-3 C61000

61 TM-3 C61400

62 TM-3 C65100

63 TM-3 C70400

64 TM-3 C19400

65 TM-3 C60800

66 TM-3 C63000

67 TM-3 C70600

68 TM-3 C97600

69 TM-3 C71000

70 TM-3 C71500

71 TM-4 N02200

72 TM-4 N02201

[Link] 453/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

73 TM-4 N04400

74 TM-4 N04405

75 TM-4 N06002

76 TM-4 N06007

77 TM-4 N06022

78 TM-4 N06030

79 TM-4 N06045

80 TM-4 N06059

81 TM-4 N06230

82 TM-4 N06455

83 TM-4 N06600

84 TM-4 N06617

85 TM-4 N06625

86 TM-4 N06690

87 TM-4 N07718

[Link] 454/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

88 TM-4 N07750

89 TM-4 N08020

90 TM-4 N08031

91 TM-4 N08330

92 TM-4 N08800

93 TM-4 N08801

94 TM-4 N08810

95 TM-4 N08825

96 TM-4 N10001

97 TM-4 N10003

98 TM-4 N10242

99 TM-4 N10276

100 TM-4 N10629

101 TM-4 N10665

102 TM-4 N10675

[Link] 455/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

103 TM-4 N12160

104 TM-4 R20033

105 TM-5 R50250

106 TM-5 R50400

107 TM-5 R50550

108 TM-5 R52400

109 TM-5 R56320

110 TM-5 R52250

111 TM-5 R53400

112 TM-5 R52402

113 TM-5 R52252

114 TM-5 R52404

115 TM-5 R52254

116 TM-5 R60702

117 TM-5 R60705

[Link] 456/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

118 TM-1 12Cr-13Cr Group F

119 TM-1 Material Group G

120 TM-1 Material Group H

121 TM-1 Material Group I

122 TM-1 Material Group J

123 TM-4 N06686

124 TM-5 R56323

220 TEMA Ni-Mo Alloy B

221 TEMA Tantalum

222 TEMA Tantalum with 2.5% Tungsten

223 TEMA 7 MO (S32900)

224 TEMA 7 MO PLUS (S32950)

225 TEMA 17-19 CR Stn Steel

226 TEMA AL-6XN Stn Steel (NO8367)

227 TEMA AL-29-4-2

[Link] 457/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

228 TEMA SEA-CURE

229 TEMA 2205 (S31803)

230 TEMA 3RE60 (S31500)

Thermal Expansion Coefficient Reference #

Reference Number Table Description/UNS Number

1 TE-1 Carbon & Low Alloy Steels, Group 1

2 TE-1 Low Alloy Steels, Group 2

3 TE-1 5Cr-1Mo and 29Cr-7Ni-2Mo-N Steels

4 TE-1 9Cr-1Mo

5 TE-1 5Ni-¼4Mo

6 TE-1 8Ni and 9Ni

7 TE-1 12Cr,13Cr and 13Cr-4Ni Steels

8 TE-1 15Cr and 17Cr Steels

9 TE-1 27Cr Steels

10 TE-1 Austenitic Group 3 Steels

[Link] 458/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

11 TE-1 Austenitic Group 4 Steels

12 TE-1 Ductile Cast Iron

13 TE-1 17Cr-4Ni-4Cu, Condition 1075

14 TE-1 17Cr-4Ni-4Cu, Condition 1150

15 TE-2 Aluminum Alloys

16 TE-3 Copper Alloys C1XXXX Series

17 TE-3 Bronze Alloys

18 TE-3 Brass Alloys

19 TE-3 70Cu-30Ni

20 TE-3 90Cu-10Ni

21 TE-4 N02200 and N02201

22 TE-4 N04400 and N04405

23 TE-4 N06002

24 TE-4 N06007

25 TE-4 N06022

[Link] 459/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

26 TE-4 N06030

27 TE-4 N06045

28 TE-4 N06059

29 TE-4 N06230

30 TE-4 N06455

31 TE-4 N06600

32 TE-4 N06625

33 TE-4 N06690

34 TE-4 N07718

35 TE-4 N07750

36 TE-4 N08031

37 TE-4 N08330

38 TE-4 N08800,N08801,N08810,N08811

39 TE-4 N08825

40 TE-4 N10001

[Link] 460/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

41 TE-4 N10003

42 TE-4 N10242

43 TE-4 N10276

44 TE-4 N10629

45 TE-4 N10665

46 TE-4 N10675

47 TE-4 N12160

48 TE-4 R20033

49 TE-5 Titanium Gr 1,2,3,7,11,12,16 and 17

50 TE-5 Titanium Grade 9

51 TEMA 5Cr-1/2Mo

52 TEMA 7Cr-1/2Mo & 9Cr-1Mo

53 TEMA Ni-Mo (Alloy B)

54 TEMA Nickel (Alloy 200)

55 TEMA Copper-Silicon

[Link] 461/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

56 TEMA Admiralty

57 TEMA Zirconium

58 TEMA Cr-Ni-Fe-Mo-Cu-Cb (Alloy 20Cb)

59 TEMA Tantalum

60 TEMA Tantalum with 2.5% Tungsten

61 TEMA 17-19 CR (TP 439)

62 TEMA AL-6XN

63 TEMA 2205 (S31803)

64 TEMA 3RE60 (S31500)

65 TEMA 7 MO (S32900)

66 TEMA 7 MO PLUS (S32950)

67 TEMA AL 29-4-2

68 TEMA SEA-CURE

69 TEMA 80-20 Cu-Ni (C71000)

Minimum Thickness (in.)

[Link] 462/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Type the minimum allowable thickness for the material. If the material has no minimum
thickness, type -1.

Maximum Thickness (in.)

Type the maximum allowable thickness for the material. If the material has no maximum
thickness, type -1.

Creep Temperature (F)

Type the temperature at which the material is governed by time dependent properties.

MDMT Exemption Temperature (F)

When the material uses an impact tested product specification, type the impact
temperature. Otherwise, type 1.

Product Form

Type an integer that designates the product form of the material.

Form Product Form

Value

1 Plate

2 Forgings

3 Seamless pipe

4 Welded pipe

5 Welded tube

6 Seamless tube

7 Bolting

[Link] 463/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

8 Castings

9 Fittings

10 Seamless/welded pipe

11 Seamless/welded tube

12 reserved

13 Seamless pipe and tube

14 Pipe

15 Bar

16 Sheet

17 Tube

18 Forged pipe

19 Seamless/welded fitting

20 Drawn seamless tube

21 Condenser & heat exchanger tubes

22 Seamless extruded tube

[Link] 464/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

23 Rod

24 Seamless and welded fittings

25 Welded fittings

26 Seamless fittings

27 Finned tube

28 Seamless U-bend tube

29 Welded condenser tube

Impact Reduction Temperature (F)

When the material is eligible for a -5ºF temperature reduction according to UCS-66(g),
type -5. Otherwise, type 0.

Material Band

The material band is used to determine the modulus of elasticity and coefficient of thermal
expansion for that type of material.

Material Basic Material Type/composition

Band

M0 Carbon steel

M1 Carbon manganese steel

M2 Carbon molybdenum steel

[Link] 465/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

M4 Low alloy MG Cr Mo V steel

M5 3.5Ni

M6 9Ni

M7 1-1.5Cr .5Mo

M8 .5Cr .5Mo .25V

M9 2.25Cr 1Mo

M10 5Cr .5Mo

M11 9Cr1Mo

M12 12Cr1Mo1V

File Extraction Utility

Input and output data files for each project in PV Elite, CodeCalc, and TANK, when saved,
are compressed into a single file. The File Extraction utility allows you to extract these files.
After extracting a file, you can view or open a specific input or output file directly from its
folder location on the computer.

File Extraction Dialog Box

Extract a file
1. In the File Type field, select the file type of the file(s) you want to extract.

2. In the Selected Folder Name field, enter the file path of the folder that contains the
compressed files. Click the ellipses to open the Browse for Folder dialog box and
select a file folder.

[Link] 466/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

3. In the Files to Extract pane, select the file(s) to extract. Select the check box at the
top of the pane to select all the files.

4. Click Extract to extract your files.

The extracted file(s) display in the Extracted Files pane.

5. Click Exit to close the utility.

6. Open the extracted file from its location on the computer.

File Extraction Dialog Box

Select and extract compressed files from within the File Extraction dialog box.

File Type

Allows for selection of the type of file (by file extension, such as .cc, .pv, .tk) you want to
locate.

Selected Folder Name

Displays the file path of the folder that contains the compressed files. Select the ellipsis to
browse for a folder on the computer that contains compressed program files.

Files to Extract

Displays the compressed files.

Extracted File Name

Displays the files extracted from those in the Files to Extract pane.

Extract

Extracts the selected file(s) in the Files to Extract pane.

Exit

Exits the application.

VUE File Exporter

The VUE File Exporter utility allows you to export PV Elite and TANK files into VUE format.
After exporting your files into VUE format, you can view your vessel or tank and add it to
projects in SmartPlant Review.

[Link] 467/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

VUE File Exporter Dialog Box

Export a File
1. Click the PV Elite and TANK File Folder ellipsis.

The Browse For Folder dialog box displays.

2. Select the file folder containing the PV Elite or TANK file(s) you want to export, and
click OK.

3. Click the VUE File Destination Folder ellipsis.

The Browse For Folder dialog box displays.

4. Select the file folder in which to place the exported VUE file(s), and click OK.

5. In the List of Files pane, select the check box of the file(s) to export. Select the
check box at the top of the pane to select all the files.

6. (Optional) In the Colors pane, click the ellipsis in the detail row to select the color in
which the detail will display in SmartPlant Review.

To apply a color to the entire model, click the ellipsis in the Apply Color to
Entire Model row and select a new color in the Color Editor dialog.

Select PV and TK Colors to apply your element and detail color scheme from
PV Elite or TANK to the converted models.

Select S3D Colors to apply your color scheme from Intergraph Smart™ 3D to
the converted models.

7. Click Export to export the selected file(s).

8. Open the converted file from its location on the computer.

VUE File Exporter Dialog Box

Use the VUE File Exporter dialog to select the files in which to convert to VUE format. You
can also select the colors for which the vessel elements and details will display in
SmartPlant Review.

Icon Drop Down Menu

Contains Recent Source and Recent Destination options to select previously used file
paths. The Exit option closes the application.

[Link] 468/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

PV Elite and TANK File Folder

Displays the file path of the folder that contains the PV Elite or TANK files to be converted.
Click the ellipsis to browse for a folder on the computer that contains PV Elite or TANK
files.

VUE File Destination Folder

Displays the file path in which to place the converted PV Elite and TANK files. Click the
ellipsis to browse for a folder on the computer in which to place the converted VUE files.

VUE File Destination Folder same as PV Elite and TANK File Folder

Select this check box to have the software place converted VUE files in the same folder as
the original PV Elite or TANK files.

List of Files Pane

Displays the PV Elite or TANK files in the selected folder that are available to be
converted. Upon successful completion of the export process, a green check mark
displays in the Status column. If a file is not successfully exported, a red exclamation mark
displays in the Status column.

Colors Pane

Displays a list of the various vessel or tank details and the colors in which they will display
in SmartPlant Review. To change a detail color, click the ellipsis in the detail row and select
a new color in the Color Editor dialog. To apply a color to the entire model, click the
ellipsis in the Apply Color to Entire Model row and select a new color in the Color Editor
dialog.

Select the PV and TK Colors option to apply the color scheme from PV Elite or TANK to
the converted models. Select the S3D Colors option to apply the color scheme from
Intergraph Smart™ 3D to the converted models. Select the Reset All option to apply the
default color scheme of the VUE File Exporter utility.

Export

Select this option to export the selected PV Elite or TANK files.

PED Classification Utility

Performs calculations on the active model to determine compliance with the design and
fabrication standards of the European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED).

[Link] 469/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Performs PED Category Calculations

Select to perform the PED calculations.

PED Version

Specifies the PED version. Select PED 2014/68/EU for the current version effective since
July 2016. Select PED 97/23/EC for the previous version adopted in May 2002.

Parameter columns

When the active model is a pressure vessel, the columns display as Vessel Parameters
and N/A. The N/A column is not used.

When the active model is a heat exchanger, the columns display as Shell-side and Tube-
side.

Equipment Type per Article 4

Specifies the equipment type. Select 1.1 Vessels, 1.2 Fired Heaters, or 1.3 Piping.

Fluid State

Specifies whether the fluid is Gaseous or Liquid.

Fluid Group

Specifies whether the fluid is Group 1, Hazardous or Group 2, Non-Hazardous.

Print PED Module Text

Adds descriptive text for PED modules to the PED results that are appended to the output
report.

Maximum Allowable (Design) Pressure

Specifies the maximum allowable pressure. PED requires a value greater than or equal to
0.5 bar(g).

Press TAB after defining the value to see PED classification results in the status area.

Maximum Volume / Piping Nominal Diameter

Specifies the maximum vessel interior corroded volume. You can also let the software
calculate the value by using Calculate Weight, Volume, and Surface Area .

[Link] 470/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

When 1.3 Piping is selected for Equipment Type per Article 4, this property specifies the
nominal diameter of the pipe.

Press TAB after defining the value to see PED classification results in the status area.

Maximum Temperature (for Piping)

Displays the maximum piping temperature.

Status area

Displays PED classification results at the bottom of the dialog.

Calculate Weight, Volume, and Surface Area

Opens the Element Weight, Volume, and Surface Area dialog. The dialog displays the
weight and volume information for each element in the model.

Status area

Displays total weight and volume values for all elements at the bottom of the dialog.

Update Volumes

Inserts the total corroded volumes into the Maximum Volume fields of the PED
Classification Utility.

You should only update the volume after modeling the entire vessel.

Calculator
Tools tab: Calculator

Opens the Windows-supplied calculator utility. Use Ctrl-C and Ctrl-V to copy and paste
values between the calculator and PV Elite.

Enter in U-1 Form Information for This Vessel

Tools tab: Enter in U-1 Form Information for This Vessel

Opens the Additional Vessel Information dialog box into which you enter additional
information to produce an ASME U-1 form for the vessel. After analysis, an intermediate
results file (.pvu) is created. This file is read by a Microsoft Excel macro when Create

ASME Form is clicked in Review Reports, and the worksheet fields are populated
with the calculated results. For more information, see Review Reports.

[Link] 471/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Compute Ligament Efficiencies

Tools tab: Compute Ligament Efficiencies

Opens the ASME VIII-1 UG-53 Ligament Efficiency Scratch Pad dialog box which is
used to calculate ASME VIII-1 UG-53.x or 4.10.x ligament efficiencies for tube spacing.

Ligament Efficiency Calculation per Figure

Select one of the following:

UG-53.1 or 4.10.1

UG-53.2 or 4.10.2

UG-53.3 or 4.10.3

UG-53.4 or 4.10.4

and Figure

When UG-53.4 or 4.10.4 is selected for Ligament Efficiency Calculation per Figure,
select one of the following as the secondary figure:

UG-53.5 or 4.10.5

UG-53.6 or 4.10.6

Diameter of Tube Holes (d), Longitudinal Pitch of Tube Holes (p), Unit Length of
Ligament (p1), Diagonal Pitch of tube Holes (p' or p*), Number of Tube Holes in
Length p1 (n), and Angle of Diagonal with Longitudinal line (theta)

Based on the selected ligament efficiency figure, enter values for each dimension.

After all values are entered, the efficiencies are calculated and displayed as a percentage
at the bottom of the dialog box. If there is an error, it is also displayed.

All figures are shown below.

UG-53.1 or 4.10.1

FIG-53.1 Example of Tube Spacing with Pitch of Holes Equal in Every Row

[Link] 472/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

UG-53.2 or 4.10.2

FIG-53.2 Example of Tube Spacing with Pitch of Holes Unequal in Every Second
Row

UG-53.3 or 4.10.3

FIG-53.3 Example of Tube Spacing with Pitch of Holes Varying in Every Second and
Third Row

[Link] 473/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

UG-53.4 or 4.10.4

FIG-53.4 Example of Tube Spacing with Pitch with Tube Holes on Diagonal Lines

UG-53.5

FIG-53.5 Diagram for Determining the Efficiency of Longitudinal and Diagonal

Ligaments Between Openings in Cylindrical Shells

[Link] 474/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

UG-53.6

FIG-53.6 Diagram for Determining Equivalent Longitudinal Efficiency of Diagonal

Ligaments Between Openings in Cylindrical Shells

[Link] 475/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

View Tab
The following commands are available on the View tab.

Toggle Status Bar

Click to display or hide the status bar at the bottom of the software window. The status bar
displays information about the selected vessel element.

Rigging Results

Displays the calculated rigging results.

Reset Pane Layout

Restores the software views to the default settings.

Toggle Status Bar

Click to display or hide the status bar at the bottom of the software window. The status bar
displays information about the selected vessel element.

Split
Click to split the graphics view into two panes: a 2D view and a 3D view. Drag the mouse
left and right in the graphics view to the needed location of the split and click to set the split
location.

[Link] 476/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

3D Tab
The 3D tab contains commands that control the display of elements in the 3D View. The
3D View shows the actual vessel geometry in three dimensions. In addition to showing the
outer surfaces, the model can also be viewed in wire frame and hidden line mode.
Different shading modes such as Flat Shaded and Gourard are supported. Other
operations, such as panning, zooming and model rotation are also supported.

Right-click anywhere on the 3D view to display the context menu. These same commands
are also on the 3D tab. The toolbar for performing some basic operations appears on the
right side view. For more information, see 3D Graphics Toolbar.

When in 3D viewing mode, the dialog box for a detail can be activated by double-
clicking a detail. It might be necessary to first select Select by Single Click .

Visibility

Select and clear the different options to display and hide that element in the 3D graphics
view. For example, you might want to hide the skirt to get a better view of a nozzle at the
bottom of a vessel. The elements are not deleted from the model, just hidden.

Wireframe

Shows lines and curves to show the object's borders and all its edges.

Flat Shaded

Shows the objects with shaded surfaces and outlined edges.

Gouraud Shaded

Shows the objects with shaded surfaces and smooth edges.

Hidden Line

Shows the objects using lines and curves to show the object's borders.

Orthographic View

Displays all objects the same relative size regardless of the distance from the observer.

[Link] 477/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Perspective View

Specifies that the view should display the vessel using perspective rendering. Perspective
rendering is characterized by:

Objects being drawn smaller as their distance from the observer increases.

The size of object dimensions along the line of sight are smaller relative to the
dimensions across the line of sight.

Delete Cutting Plane Grid

Removes a cutting plane from the view that you placed using the Insert Cutting Plane
command on the 3D Graphics Toolbar.

Fonts and Colors

Activates the Plot Properties dialog with which you can customize the colors of elements in
the display.

Fixed View

Turn on the fix the view.

Shadow

Turns the vessel shadow on and off.

Show Materials

Assigns a unique color for each material used in the vessel, and displays those colors in
the view and legend grid.

Show Wall Thickness

Assigns a unique color for each wall thickness value defined in the vessel, and displays
those colors in the view and legend grid.

Show Temperature

Assigns a unique color for each temperature value defined in the vessel, and displays
those colors in the view and legend grid.

[Link] 478/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Show Pressure

Assigns a unique color for each pressure value defined in the vessel, and displays those
colors in the view and legend grid.

3D Graphics Toolbar
The 3D graphics toolbar controls how your model displays in the 3D View. By default, this
toolbar displays vertically on the right side of the graphics window. You can toggle the 3D
graphics toolbar off and on using the quick access toolbar customization command (black
drop-arrow) in the top left-corner of the main window.

Pre-defined Views

Changes the current view to front, back, top, bottom, left, right view or a standard isometric
view.

Zoom Extents

Resizes the model so that it fits in the current window.

Zoom Window

Use the mouse to draw a window around the portion of the model that you want to zoom in
on. This is a rubber band zoom. Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom in and out.

Orbit

Rotates the model in any direction using the mouse. Click the right mouse button and
move the mouse to rotate the model.

Turntable Orbit

Rotates the model about the Y-axis.

Pan

Translates the model in the direction the mouse is dragged. Pressing the mouse wheel
and holding it down while moving the mouse will also pan the model.

Zoom Camera

Zooms in or out. Click this button, then press the left mouse button and move the mouse
diagonally across the screen to zoom in or out. Alternately, spin the mouse wheel to zoom
in and out.

[Link] 479/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Select by Window

Selects details that are inside a fence that you define.

Select By Click

Allows the selection of a detail for further manipulation.

Translate Detail

Translates the selected detail in the view. This toolbar option is not available in TANK.

Insert Cutting Plane

Inserts a cutting plane when you click this button and then click anywhere in the window.
You can then rotate the cutting plane after it has been initiated. The rotating plane exposes
the various layers of the vessel. The visibility of the cutting plane can then be turned off
after the view is set. To restore the model, right- click in the 3D window and choose Delete
Cutting Plane.

Transparency

The main exterior shells of the model are transparent.

Show Nozzle List

Displays list of nozzles in a list box. The list allows a nozzle to be located in the model for
editing. This toolbar option is not available in TANK.

Redraw the Model

Refreshes the model graphics in the 3D view. You can also press F5 to refresh.

[Link] 480/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Help Tab
The following commands are available on the Help tab.

Help Topics

Opens the PV Elite help.

Help Language

Allows you to select the language in which to view documentation; either English or
Japanese.

View

Opens the printable PV Elite User's Guide, QA Manual, and QA certificate.

Quick Start

Opens the printable PV Elite Quick Start.

Foundation 3D Help

Opens the help menu for all Foundation 3D related help topics.

Check for Updates

Checks your version of the software against the most current version. You must be
connected to the Internet for this option.

Email Support

Creates an email with your system and software information. You can type your support
question and send to support ppmcrm@[Link]. However, eCustomer is the best
method to reach support. eCustomer provides a comprehensive knowledge base of
information and allows Hexagon to track all customer queries, including bug reports, user
issues, and user-generated ideas for improvement of the software.

What's New

Opens a page in your default browser that describes the new features added in the most
recent version of the software. For information about your software version, see the Help

[Link] 481/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

option on the File Tab.

[Link] 482/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

General Input Tab

Select a vessel element in the graphics view to make it current, and then edit data for that
element on the General Input tab.

1. Select the Home tab.

2. In the Input/Output panel, select Input > General Input .

The General Input tab appears at the bottom-left of the PV Elite window.

3. Use the element navigation arrows to navigate quickly between

elements in the vessel.

[Link] 483/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Element Data (General Input Tab)

All elements share a common set of parameters described below. A few of the parameters
might be disabled depending on the active element.

Element Description
Enter an optional description for the element. The description can be up to 48 characters in
length and can consist of both letters and numbers. When defined, the description is used
in the output reports instead of the node numbers. Descriptions are also annotated in the
3D graphics view.

This value is not a function of the selected vessel code (such as, PD 5500, EN or ASME).

From Node
Displays the software-generated node number describing the starting location of the
element. The From Node value for this element is also used to define starting locations for
details such as nozzles, insulation, and packing that are associated with this element. This
value is not a function of the selected vessel code (such as, PD 5500, EN or ASME).

The software defines a vertical vessel from bottom to top. If the vertical vessel is on skirt,
the first element is the skirt. If it is on legs or lugs, the first element is a head and the legs
or lugs are defined as details on the appropriate head or shell elements.

The software defines a horizontal vessel from left to right. The first element in a horizontal
vessel is usually a head, and the support saddles are defined as details on the appropriate
shell elements.

To Node
Displays the software-generated node number that describes the ending location of the
element. The To Node value is incremented by 10 above the From Node value. The To
Node is the From Node for the following element. For example, if the value of To Node for
a head is 50, then the value of From Node for the shell is 50. This value is not a function
of the selected vessel code (such as, PD 5500, EN or ASME).

[Link] 484/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Element Type
Specifies the type of the element.

Cylinder

A cylindrical shell

Elliptical

An elliptical head

Torispherical

A torispherical (F&D) head

Spherical

A spherical head

Conical

A conical head or shell segment

Welded Flat

A welded flat head

Body Flange

A body flange or blind flange

Skirt

A skirt with an optional base ring

If you change the element type, all the element's detail data, such as nozzles,
are removed.

[Link] 485/1125
10/8/24, 8:57 AM Hexagon Documentation Site Export

Diameter Basis
Select the type of diameter to use for the element. Select